Personnel Qualification Standard: Naval Education and NAVEDTRA 43466-D CH-1 Training Command 6 August 2020

Naval Education and NAVEDTRA 43466-D CH-1
Training Command 6 August 2020
PERSONNEL
QUALIFICATION
STANDARD
FOR
SECURITY FORCE WEAPONS

NAME (Rate/Rank) ______________________________
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT B: Distribution authorized to U.S. Government agencies only due to

administrative/operational use on 6 August 2020. Other requests for this document must be referred to
the Commanding Officer, Naval Personnel Development Command, N7, 1905 Regulus Ave.,
Virginia Beach VA 23461.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any means that will prevent disclosure of contents or
reconstruction of the document.
Unclassified technical documents bearing this distribution statement will be given the same physical
protection prescribed in SECNAVINST 5720.42F for "For Official Use Only" material.
Although the words “he”, “him,” and “his” are
used sparingly in this manual to enhance
communication, they are not intended to be
gender driven nor to affront or discriminate
against anyone reading this material.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................ 1

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS ............................................................................................................................. 3
INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................... 5
SUMMARY OF CHANGES (REV D) .............................................................................................................. 9
SUMMARY OF CHANGES (REV D, CHANGE 1) ........................................................................................... 10
WATCHSTATION REQUALIFICATIONS ................................................................................................... 13
ACRONYMS USED IN THIS PQS ............................................................................................................... 15
100 INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS ........................................................................................ 17

101 SAFETY FUNDAMENTALS .................................................................................................................... 19
102 W EAPON FUNDAMENTALS .................................................................................................................. 24
103 ARMS, AMMUNITION, AND EXPLOSIVES FUNDAMENTALS ...................................................................... 30
104 USE OF FORCE FUNDAMENTALS ......................................................................................................... 38
105 MARKSMANSHIP FUNDAMENTALS ....................................................................................................... 41
106 NIGHT VISION FUNDAMENTALS ........................................................................................................... 60
107 M9 SERVICE PISTOL FUNDAMENTALS ................................................................................................. 66
108 M11 SERVICE PISTOL FUNDAMENTALS ............................................................................................... 67
109 .38 CALIBER REVOLVER FUNDAMENTALS ............................................................................................ 68
110 AN/M8 PYROTECHNIC FUNDAMENTALS .............................................................................................. 69
111 M500 SHOTGUN FUNDAMENTALS ....................................................................................................... 70
112 MP5 (SERIES) SUBMACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS ............................................................................. 74
113 M14 SERIES RIFLE (M14, M14A, M14 SSR, M21, MK14 EBR) FUNDAMENTALS ................................ 75
114 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE FUNDAMENTALS................................................................................................. 80
115 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER FUNDAMENTALS...................................................................................... 84
116 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER FUNDAMENTALS ........................................................................................ 87
117 GRENADE FUNDAMENTALS ................................................................................................................. 89
118 MK46 MOD 0 LIGHT MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS .......................................................................... 97
119 M240 (B/N) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS ......................................................................... 99
120 M60 (SERIES) MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS.................................................................................. 105
121 M-2 .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS .................................................................. 107
122 MK19 MOD 3 GRENADE MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS .................................................................. 113
123 MK38 MOD 1 25MM MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS ........................................................................ 119
124 MK 44 MOD 0/1, GUN W EAPON SYSTEM FUNDAMENTALS ................................................................. 121
125 40MM SALUTING MOUNT FUNDAMENTALS ........................................................................................ 123
126 M107 LONG RANGE SNIPER RIFLE FUNDAMENTALS .......................................................................... 125
127 DESIGNATED MARKSMAN/OBSERVER FUNDAMENTALS ...................................................................... 129
128 CLEARING BARREL SUPERVISOR FUNDAMENTALS ............................................................................. 132
129 LINE COACH FUNDAMENTALS ........................................................................................................... 134
130 RANGE SETUP AND INSTRUCTION FUNDAMENTALS ............................................................................ 141
131 RANGE SAFETY OFFICER FUNDAMENTALS ........................................................................................ 158
132 W ARNING SHOTS FUNDAMENTALS.................................................................................................... 167
200 INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS ................................................................................................... 169

201 M9 SERVICE PISTOL SYSTEM........................................................................................................... 171
202 M11 SERVICE PISTOL SYSTEM......................................................................................................... 172
203 .38 CALIBER REVOLVER SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... 173
204 AN/M8 PYROTECHNIC PISTOL SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 174
205 M500 SHOTGUN SYSTEM ................................................................................................................ 175
206 MP5 (SERIES) SUBMACHINE GUN SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 178
207 M14 SERIES RIFLE SYSTEM ............................................................................................................. 179
208 M16 (SERIES) SERVICE RIFLE SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 183
1
209 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER SYSTEM ............................................................................................... 188
210 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER SYSTEM ................................................................................................. 191
211 GRENADE SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................... 193
212 MK46 MOD 0 LIGHT MACHINE GUN SYSTEM ................................................................................... 197
213 M240 (B/N) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN SYSTEM ................................................................................... 199
214 M60 (SERIES) MACHINE GUN SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 203
215 M2.50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN SYSTEM ................................................................................ 205
216 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN SYSTEM .................................................................... 209
217 MK38 MOD 1 25MM MACHINE GUN SYSTEM .................................................................................. 213
218 MK 44 MOD 0/1 GUN W EAPON SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 215
219 40MM SALUTING MOUNTS SYSTEM................................................................................................... 217
220 M107 LONG RANGE SNIPER RIFLE SYSTEM...................................................................................... 219
300 INTRODUCTION TO WATCHSTATIONS ..................................................................................... 223

301 M9 SERVICE PISTOL OPERATOR ...................................................................................................... 225
302 M11 SERVICE PISTOL OPERATOR .................................................................................................... 227
303 .38 CALIBER REVOLVER OPERATOR ................................................................................................. 229
304 AN/M8 PYROTECHNIC PISTOL OPERATOR ........................................................................................ 231
305 M500 SHOTGUN OPERATOR ............................................................................................................ 233
306 MP5 (SERIES) SUBMACHINE GUN OPERATOR................................................................................... 243
307 M14 SERIES RIFLE OPERATOR ........................................................................................................ 245
308 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE OPERATOR ...................................................................................................... 257
309 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER OPERATOR ........................................................................................... 269
310 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER OPERATOR ............................................................................................. 277
311 GRENADIER ..................................................................................................................................... 279
312 MK46 MOD 0 LIGHT MACHINE GUN/M249 SQUAD AUTOMATIC W EAPON (SAW) OPERATOR ............. 287
313 M240 (B/N) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN OPERATOR ............................................................................... 289
314 M60 (SERIES) MACHINEGUN OPERATOR .......................................................................................... 303
315 M-2 .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN OPERATOR ......................................................................... 305
316 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN OPERATOR ............................................................... 317
317 MK38 MOD 1 25MM MACHINE GUN OPERATOR .............................................................................. 329
318 MK44 MOD 0/1 GUN W EAPON SYSTEM OPERATOR ......................................................................... 331
319 DESIGNATED MARKSMAN/OBSERVER ............................................................................................... 333
320 40MM SALUTING MOUNT OPERATOR ................................................................................................ 343
321 M107 LONG RANGE SNIPER RIFLE OPERATOR ................................................................................. 351
322 CLEARING BARREL SUPERVISOR ...................................................................................................... 361
323 DUTY ARMORER .............................................................................................................................. 377
324 LINE COACH .................................................................................................................................... 387
325 SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP INSTRUCTOR ...................................................................................... 409
326 CREW SERVED W EAPONS INSTRUCTOR............................................................................................ 427
327 GRENADIER INSTRUCTOR ................................................................................................................. 443
328 RANGE SAFETY OFFICER ................................................................................................................. 457
QUALIFICATION PROGRESS SUMMARY .............................................................................................. 467

LIST OF REFERENCES USED IN THIS PQS........................................................................................... 473
2
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The PQS Manager gratefully acknowledges the assistance of the following personnel in writing
this PQS:
GMC(SW) David, HUDSON MIDLANT RMC, Norfolk, VA

GMC(SW) Bernie, MCLAUGHLIN CENSECFOR LS, Chesapeake, VA
GMC(SW) William, Wright CENSECFOR LS, Chesapeake, VA
MAC(SW) Alex, HEBERT CENSECFOR LS, Chesapeake, VA
AO1(AW) Jason, SELIGSON VFA-81, Virginia Beach, VA
GM1(SW) Stephanie, THORNTON MIDLANT RMC, Norfolk, VA
GM1(SW) Calvin, COLEMAN USS PONCE (LPD 15), Norfolk, VA
MA1(SW/AW) Carroll, WILLIAMS MIDLANT Region, Norfolk, VA
GM2(SW) Aaron, BOLTON USS COOK (DDG 75), Norfolk, VA
GM2(SW) Daniel, ROBERTS MIDLANT RMC, Norfolk, VA
GM2(SW) Curtis, HAMPTON NWS YORKTOWN, Yorktown, VA
GS Billy, BRYANT NTTC LACKLAND, San Antonio, TX
GS Linda, CHRISTENSEN CENSECFOR HP DET, Norfolk, VA
GS James, HOEVER CENSECFOR, Norfolk, VA
GS Dan, JASPER CENSECFOR, Norfolk, VA
GS Gerald, WEAVER NTTC LACKLAND, San Antonio, TX
The Model Manager for this PQS:
CENSECFOR VIRGINIA BEACH VA (N54) 757-462-5209 DSN 253
3
INTRODUCTION
PQS PROGRAM
This PQS program is a qualification system for officers, enlisted, and civilian personnel where
certification of a minimum level of competency is required prior to qualifying to perform specific
duties. A PQS is a compilation of the minimum knowledge and skills that an individual must
demonstrate in order to qualify to stand watches or perform other specific routine duties necessary
for the safety, security or proper operation of a ship, aircraft or support system. The objective of
PQS is to standardize and facilitate these qualifications.
CANCELLATION
This Standard cancels and supersedes NAVEDTRA 43466-D, August 2008; and 43471-A.
APPLICABILITY
This PQS is applicable to all military and civilian personnel carrying weapons in performance of
their duties.
MODEL MANAGER
The Model Manager manages a specific PQS manual. This includes overseeing the process of
monitoring and updating assigned PQS manuals from the standpoint of technical content and
relevance within the community.
TAILORING
To command tailor this package, first have it reviewed by one or more of your most qualified
individuals. Delete any portions covering systems and equipment not installed on your ship,
aircraft or unit. Next, add any line items, fundamentals, systems and watchstations/workstations
that are unique to your command but not already covered in this package. Finally, the package
should be reviewed by the cognizant department head and required changes approved by the
Commanding Officer or his designated representative. Retain the approved master copy on file
for use in tailoring individual packages.
NOTE: THE END OF EACH LINE ITEM TASK IS MARKED WITH A GROUP OF NUMBERS WHICH INDICATES
SHOOTER PROFICIENCY {1, 2, 3, 4}. IF YOU ARE NOT IN THAT CATEGORY YOU DO NOT NEED TO
COMPLETE THE TASK TO QUALIFY.
5
INTRODUCTION (CONT’D)
THE CATEGORIES ARE AS FOLLOWS: (FROM OPNAVINST 3591.1E, SMALL ARMS TRAINING AND
QUALIFICATION)
1. CATEGORY I. THOSE PERSONNEL WHO ARE ISSUED A PISTOL PRIMARILY FOR

PERSONAL PROTECTION. THIS CATEGORY INCLUDES MOST OFFICERS,
CHIEF PETTY OFFICERS, OFFICER ACCESSION PERSONNEL,
DISBURSING OFFICERS, COURIERS, AIRCREWS, NAVAL CONSTRUCTION
FORCE, AND MILITARY SEALIFT COMMAND (MSC) PERSONNEL WHO
ARE ARMED IN THE COURSE OF THEIR DUTIES. PERSONNEL/UNITS IN
THIS CATEGORY ARE THOSE NON-SECURITY PERSONNEL/UNITS WHOSE
MISSION EXPOSES THEM TO POTENTIAL HOSTILE FIRE, THUS REQUIRING
THEM TO BE ARMED FOR SELF-DEFENSE.
2. CATEGORY II. THOSE PERSONNEL WHO ARE ISSUED A PISTOL PRIMARILY TO

MAINTAIN SECURITY OF DOD ASSETS. THIS CATEGORY INCLUDES LAW
ENFORCEMENT, SECURITY FORCES, AND ARMED WATCH STANDERS
(BOTH SHIPBOARD AND SHORE BASED). PERSONNEL/UNITS IN THIS
CATEGORY ARE SECURITY PERSONNEL/UNITS AND SECURITY FORCE
TEAMS.
3. CATEGORY III. EXPEDITIONARY WARFARE COMBAT SKILLS.
4. CATEGORY IV. SPECIAL OPERATIONS TRAINING.
QUALIFIER
The PQS Qualifier is designated in writing by the Commanding Officer to sign off individual
watchstations. Qualifiers will normally be E-5 (or civilian equivalent) or above and, as a minimum,
must have completed the PQS they are authorized to sign off. The names of designated Qualifiers
should be made known to all members of the unit or department. The means of maintaining this
listing is at the discretion of individual commands. For more information on the duties and
responsibilities of PQS Qualifiers, see the PQS Unit Coordinator’s Guide.
CONTENTS
PQS is divided into three sections. The 100 Section (Fundamentals) contains the fundamental
knowledge from technical manuals and other texts necessary to satisfactorily understand the
watchstation/workstation duties. The 200 Section (Systems) is designed to acquaint you with the
systems you will be required to operate at your watchstation/workstation. The 300 Section
(Watchstations) lists the tasks you will be required to satisfactorily perform in order to achieve
final PQS qualification for a particular watchstation/workstation. All three sections may not apply
to this PQS, but where applicable, detailed explanations are provided at the front of each section.
6
INTRODUCTION (CONT’D)
REFERENCES
The References used during the writing of this PQS package were the latest available to the
workshop, however, the most current References available should be used when qualifying with
this Standard.
NOTES
Classified References may be used in the development of PQS. If such references are used, do
not make notes in this book as answers to questions in this Standard may be classified.
TRAINEE
Your supervisor will tell you which watchstations/workstations you are to complete and in what
order. Before getting started, turn to the 300 Section first and find your watchstation/workstation.
This will tell you what you should do before starting your watchstation/workstation tasks. You may
be required to complete another PQS, a school, or other watchstations/workstations within this
package. It will also tell you which fundamentals and/or systems from this package you must
complete prior to qualification at your watchstation/workstation. If you have any questions or are
unable to locate references, contact your supervisor or qualifier. Good luck!
PQS FEEDBACK REPORTS

This PQS was developed using information available at the time of writing. When equipment and
requirements change, the PQS needs to be revised. The only way the PQS Model Manager knows
of these changes is by you, the user, telling us either in a letter or via the Feedback Report
contained in the back of this book. You can tell us of new systems and requirements, or of errors
you find.
7
SUMMARY OF CHANGES (REV D)
(AUGUST 2008)
CHANGES TO FUNDAMENTALS, SYSTEMS, AND WATCHSTATIONS:
Fundamental Title Action Comment

Warning Shots To address fleet warning shot
Added
Fundamentals procedures
System Title Action Comment

None NA NA
Watchstation Title Action Comment

To address fleet warning shot
M14 Service Rifle Operator Modified
procedures
To address fleet warning shot
M16 (Series) Rifle Operator Modified
procedures
MK46 Mod 0 Light
Machinegun /M249 Squad To address fleet warning shot
Modified
Automatic Weapon (SAW) procedures
Operator
M240 (B/N) Medium To address fleet warning shot
Modified
Machine Gun Operator procedures
M60 (Series) Machinegun To address fleet warning shot
Modified
Operator procedures
M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy To address fleet warning shot
Modified
Machine Gun Operator procedures
9
SUMMARY OF CHANGES (REV D, CHANGE 1)
(AUGUST 2020)
CHANGES TO FUNDAMENTALS, SYSTEMS, AND WATCHSTATIONS:
Fundamental Title Action Comment

M9 Service Pistol Deleted
M11 Service Pistol Deleted These 4 fundamentals updated and

moved to NAVEDTRA 43466-1A, Security
.38 Caliber Revolver Deleted Force Weapons, Pistols
AN/M8 Pyrotechnic Deleted
MP5 (series) Submachine Gun Deleted
M79 Grenade Launcher Deleted

These 5 fundamentals deleted. Weapons
MK46 MOD 0 Light Machine Gun Deleted
no longer issued to users of this PQS.
M60 (series) Machine Gun Deleted
MK44 MOD 0/1, Gun Weapon System Deleted

Weapon system covered by NAVEDTRA
MK38 MOD 1 25MM Machine Gun Deleted
43188-B
System Title Action Comment

M9 Service Pistol Deleted
M11 Service Pistol Deleted These 4 systems updated and moved to

NAVEDTRA 43466-1A, Security Force
.38 Caliber Revolver Deleted Weapons, Pistols
AN/M8 Pyrotechnic Deleted
MP5 (series) Submachine Gun Deleted
M79 Grenade Launcher Deleted

These 5 systems deleted. Weapons no
MK46 MOD 0 Light Machine Gun Deleted
longer issued to users of this PQS.
M60 (series) Machine Gun Deleted
MK44 MOD 0/1, Gun Weapon System Deleted

Weapon system covered by NAVEDTRA
MK38 MOD 1 25MM Machine Gun Deleted
43188-B
10
SUMMARY OF CHANGES (REV D, CHANGE 1) (CONT’D)
(AUGUST 2020)
Watchstation Title Action Comment

M9 Service Pistol Operator Deleted
M11 Service Pistol Operator Deleted These 4 watchstations updated and

moved to NAVEDTRA 43466-1A, Security
.38 Caliber Revolver Operator Deleted Force Weapons, Pistols
AN/M8 Pyrotechnic Operator Deleted

MP5 (series) Submachine Gun
Deleted
Operator
M79 Grenade Launcher Operator Deleted
MK46 MOD 0 Light Machine Gun These 5 watchstations deleted. Weapons
Deleted
Operator no longer issued to users of this PQS.
M60 (series) Machine Gun Operator Deleted
MK44 MOD 0/1, Gun Weapon System
Deleted
Operator
MK38 MOD 1 25MM Machine Gun Weapon system covered by NAVEDTRA
Deleted
Operator 43188-B
Reflects movement of some prerequisites
Clearing Barrel Supervisor Modified
to NAVEDTRA 43466-1A
11
WATCHSTATION REQUALIFICATIONS
Due to changes in policies, systems, or procedures, personnel dealing with the subject matter of
this PQS may be required to requalify IAW NAVEDTRA 43100-1G, ch. 5, PQS Unit Coordinator’s
Guide.
The following watchstations regardless of qualifications achieved in previous versions, shall be

completed.
Only fundamental and watchstation tasks associated with warning shots.
13
ACRONYMS USED IN THIS PQS
Not all acronyms or abbreviations used in this PQS are defined here. The Subject Matter
Experts from the Fleet who wrote this Standard determined the following acronyms or
abbreviations may not be commonly known throughout their community and should be defined
to avoid confusion. If there is a question concerning an acronym or abbreviation not spelled out
on this page nor anywhere else in the Standard, use the references listed on the line item
containing the acronym or abbreviation in question.
API Armor Piercing Incendiary

BFA Blank Firing Adapter
CBRN Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear
CJCS Commander Joint Chiefs of Staff
CLP Cleaner, Lubricant, & Protectant
CQ Close Quarters
CS Chlorobenzylidene Malononitrile (Tear Gas)
CSW Crew Served Weapon
DC Direct Current
DODIC Department of Defense Identification Code
FLIR Forward Looking Infra-Red
FM Titanium Tetrachloride Smoke
FOD Foreign Object Debris
FS Sulfur Trioxide–Chlorosulfonic Acid Smoke
HC Grained Aluminum, Zinc Oxide, and Hexachloroethane Smoke
HE/TP High Explosive/Target Practice
HERO Hazards of Electromagnetic Radiation to Ordnance
HMMWV Highly Mobile Multi Wheeled Vehicle
IDDT Interpret-Draft-Disseminate-Train
LOMAH Location of Miss and Hit
LTL Less Than Lethal
METL Mission Essential Task List
MG Machine Gun
MOPP Mission Oriented Protective Posture
NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization
NBC Nuclear, Biological, Chemical
NLW Non-Lethal Weapon
NV Night Vision
NVD Night Vision Device
NVG Night Vision Goggles
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
RCA Riot Control Agent
RCO Range Control Officer
RF Radio Frequency
RFI Ready For Issue
ROE Rules Of Engagement
RSO Range Safety Officer
SDZ Surface Danger Zone
T&E Traversing & Elevation
TA Terephthalic Acid Smoke
15
ACTONYMS USED IN THIS PQS (CONT’D)
TP-T Target Practice – Tracer

TTO Training Time Out
16
100 INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS
100.1 INTRODUCTION
This PQS begins with a Fundamentals section covering the basic knowledge and
principles needed to understand the equipment or duties to be studied. Normally, you
would have acquired the knowledge required in the Fundamentals section during the
school phase of your training. If you have not been to school or if you need a refresher,
the references listed at the beginning of each fundamental will aid you in a self-study
program. All references cited for study are selected according to their credibility and
availability.
100.2 HOW TO COMPLETE

The fundamentals you will have to complete are listed in the watchstation (300
section) for each watchstation. You should complete all required fundamentals before
starting the systems and watchstation portions of this PQS, since knowledge gained
from fundamentals will aid you in understanding the systems and your watchstation
tasks. When you feel you have a complete understanding of one fundamental or
more, contact your Qualifier. If you are attempting initial qualification, your Qualifier
will expect you to satisfactorily answer all line items in the fundamentals. If you are
requalifying or have completed the appropriate schools, your Qualifier may require
you to answer representative line items to determine if you have retained the
necessary knowledge for your watchstation. If your command requires an oral board
or written examination for final qualification, you may be asked any questions from
the fundamentals required for your watchstation.
17
101
101 SAFETY FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NTRP 3-07.2.2, Force Protection Weapons Handling Standard Procedures and
Guidelines
[b] OPNAVINST 3591.1e, Small Arms Training and Qualification
[c] NAVEDTRA 14324, Gunner’s Mate
[d] NAVSEA OP 3347, U.S. Navy Ordnance Safety Precautions
[e] NAVSEA OP4, Ammunition Afloat
[f] OPNAVINST 3500.39B, Operational Risk Management
[g] OPNAVINST 5530.13C, Department of the Navy Physical Security Instruction for
Conventional Arms, Ammunition, and Explosives (AA&E)
[h] OPNAVINST 5100.19E, Navy Occupational Safety and Health (NAVOSH) Volume I
SOH and Major Hazard-Specific Programs
[i] NAVSEA OP 3565, Electromagnetic Radiation Hazards, Vol. I (Hazards to Personnel,
Fuel, and Other Flammable Material)
[j] NAVEDTRA 14234, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 1
[k] TM 10698A-23B&P/2, USMC, Technical Manual, Shotgun, Combat 12 Gauge,
Semiautomatic, M1014
101 .1 Discuss the concept of ORM. [ref. f, encl. 1, pg. 1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
(Signature and Date)
.2 Explain the following as they apply to ORM: [ref. f, encl. 1, pg. 2 thru 3]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Identifying hazards
b. Assessing hazards
c. Making risk decisions
d. Implementing controls
e. Supervising
___________________________________
.3 Describe the function, duties and authority of the Range Safety Officer (RSO) during
weapons training. [ref. b, encl. 1, pg. 1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
19
101 SAFETY FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
101 .4 Describe the function and duties of the line coach during weapons training. [ref. b,
pg. 10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.5 State and discuss the general range safety rules. [ref. b, encl 1, pg. 3 thru 4]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.6 State and discuss range pistol safety rules. [ref. b, encl. 1, pg. 4 thru 5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.7 State and discuss range rifle safety rules. [ref. b, encl. 1, pg. 5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 State and discuss range shotgun safety rules. [ref. b, encl. 1, pg. 5 thru 6]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.9 State and discuss Machine gun safety rules. [ref. b, encl. 1, pg. 6 thru 7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 Discuss the purpose of the “ready line” during small arms training. [ref. b, encl. 1,
pg. 7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.11 Discuss the purpose of the “firing line” during small arms training. [ref. b, encl. 1,
pg. 8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
20
101 .12 Discuss the purpose, action(s) required and verbal signal for “Training Time Out”
during weapons training. [ref. b, encl. 1, pg. 12 thru 13] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.13 Discuss requirements for use of dummy ammunition in weapons training, pre-fire
and/or post-fire checks. [ref. b, encl. 2, pg. 2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.14 State and describe personal protective equipment required during small arms firing.
[ref. b, encl. 1, pg. 4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.15 Discuss misfires with blank ammunition. [ref. c, ch. 3, pg. 3-51] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 State how familiarity can lead to carelessness. [ref. e, ch. 3, 3-29] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.17 Discuss the application and benefit of the Operational Risk Management (ORM)
process to small arms handling. [ref. a, ch.1, pg. 1-2 thru 1-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.18 Explain the purpose of the safety observer during ordnance firings. [ref. d, ch. 1]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.19 Discuss the following: [ref. d, ch. 2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Firing cutouts
___________________________________
21
101 .20 Discuss the following terms as they relate to safe stowage of small arms and
ammunition: [ref. g] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Armory construction. [ch. 3, pg. 3-1]
b. Safes. [ch. 3, pg. 3-2]
c. Arm racks. [ch. 3, pg. 3-2]
d. Stowage containers. [ch. 3, pg. 3-2]
e. Intrusion Detection Systems. [ch. 3, pg. 3-2]
f. Off Installation/Unit stowage. [ch. 3, pg. 3-3]
g. Construction exemptions. [ch. 3, pg. 3-3]
h. RFI Lockers. [ch. 3, pg. 3-4]
i. Stowage in vehicles, aircraft, and small craft. [ch. 3, pg. 3-4]
___________________________________
.21 Discuss the following: {1, 2, 3, 4}

a. Accident [ref. e, app. a, pg. a-1]
b. Near mishap [ref. e, app. a, pg. a-11]
c. Hazard prevention [ref. h, ch. A4, pg. a1-1 thru a1-3]
___________________________________
.22 Discuss HERO. [ref. i, ch. 1, pg. 1-1 thru 1-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.23 Discuss the following terms, hazards, and immediate/remedial actions associated
with each: {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Malfunction [ref. j, ch. 3, pg. 3-9]
b Misfire [ref. j, ch. 3, pg. 3-9]
c. Cookoff [ref. j, ch. 3, pg. 3-9]
d. Stoppage [ref. j, ch. 3, pg. 3-9]
e. Runaway gun [ref. c, ch. 3, pg. 3-30]
f. Hangfire [ref. j, ch. 13, pg. 13-4]
___________________________________
.24 Discuss electrical safety. [ref. h, ch. B7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
22
101 .25 Discuss chemical safety. [ref. h, ch. B3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.26 Discuss storing or shipping weapons with live ammunition. [ref. k, Preface, pg. ix]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
23
102
102 WEAPON FUNDAMENTALS
References:
Guidelines
[b] OPNAVINST 3591.1E, Small Arms Training and Qualification
[c] FM 3-22.9, Rifle Marksmanship, M16A1, M16A2/3, M16A4, and M4 Carbine
[d] NAVEDTRA 14137, Master at Arms
[e] NAVEDTRA 14234, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 1
[f] NAVEDTRA 14235, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 2
[g] NAVEDTRA 14324, Gunner’s Mate
[h] SW360-AA-MMO-A10, Logbook for Machine Gun
[i] FM 23-8, M-14 and M-14A1 Rifles
[j] TM 9-1005-237-23&P, Operator and Unit Maintenance Manual, including Repair Parts
and Special Tools List for, Bayonet-Knife, M6 & M7, w/ Bayonet-Knife, Scabbard, M10;
M9 Multipurpose Bayonet System
[k] SW 363-C3-MMM-010, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Machine Gun, 40MM,
MK19, MOD 3
[l] OPNAVINST 5580.1A (Change 2), Navy Law Enforcement Manual
[m] TM 9-1005-201-10, Operator’s Manual, Machinegun, 5.56MM, M249 W/Equip
[n] SW360-AG-MMO-010, Operator’s Manual, 5.56MM, MK46 MOD 0 Lightweight
Machine Gun
[o] SW300-AA-OPI-010, User’s Manual, for Gun Mounts Mk 26 Mod 17, MK 58 Mod 5,
and Mk 64 Mod
[p] SW370-A3-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, for Carbine, 5.56MM MK 18 MOD 0
[q] FM 3-22.68, Crew-Served Machine Guns, 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm
[r] SW370-AU-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, Submachine Gun, 9mm H&K MP5
102 .1 State what condition weapons should be in when issued/received. [ref. a, ch. 2-8,
pg. 2-9, 3-19, 4-16, 5-15, 6-17, 7-11, 8-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.2 Define the following: [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 8-3 thru 8-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Recoil operated
b. Blow-back operated
c. Gas operated
___________________________________
.3 State the definition of “small arms.” [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
24
102 WEAPONS FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
102 .4 Discuss weapon emplacements that might be employed in a defensive position.
[ref. f, ch. 7, pg. 7-1 thru 7-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.5 Name the members of a machine gun team and state what they are responsible for
carrying into a combat situation. [ref. f, ch. 1, pg. 1-17] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.6 State the purpose of tracer rounds. [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-19] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.7 Describe the principle directions of fire. [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-6 thru 4-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 Describe the use and purpose of the range cards. [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-22 thru 4-26]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.9 Explain the difference between a stoppage and a malfunction of a small arm. [ref. a,
ch. 2, pg. 2-7, para 2.1.7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 State the purpose of the Logbook for Small arms/Machine Gun. [ref. h, Instructions,
pg. 1 thru 2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
25
102 .12 Discuss the following weapon terms: {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Rapid Fire [ref. c, ch. 7, pg. 7-7]

b. Sustained Fire [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-5]
c. Cyclic Fire [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 8-4]
d. Maximum Range [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 8-4]
e. Maximum Effective Range [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 8-4]
f. Cycle of Operation [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 8-1]
1. Feeding [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 8-1 thru 8-2]
2. Chambering [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 8-2]
3. Locking [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 8-2]
4. Firing [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 8-2]
5. Unlocking [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 8-2]
6. Extracting [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 8-2]
7. Ejecting [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 8-2]
8. Cocking [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 8-2]
g. Muzzle Velocity [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-38]
h. Caliber [ref. c, glossary, pg. 6]
i. Gauge [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-1]
j. Trajectory [ref. i, ch. 3, pg. 3-1]
k. Semiautomatic [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-3]
l. Automatic [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-3]
m. Burst [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-9]
___________________________________
.13 Explain the various class of fire: [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-29 thru 3-32] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Flanking
b. Frontal
c. Oblique
d. Enfilade
e. Grazing
b. Plunging
c. Overhead
d. Fixed
e. Traversing
f. Searching
g. Combined searching and traversing
h. Swinging traverse
i. Free
k. Defilade [ref. q, ch. 5, pg. 5-14]
___________________________________
26
102 .14 Discuss general clearing barrel procedures. [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-2; ch. 2, pg. 2-14]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.15 Explain the principals of ballistics: [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-32 thru 5-39] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Internal
b. External
c. Terminal
d. Bullet Dispersion Range
___________________________________
.16 Discuss the following terms as they relate to use of bayonets: [ref. j, Preface, pg. a]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Handling
b. Electrical insulation
c. Securing scabbard
___________________________________
.17 Discuss the following universal weapons terms, definitions, and procedures:
{1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Universal Safety Rules [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-1 thru 1-2]

b. General Weapons Condition Codes [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-2 thru 1-3]
c. Weapon Handling Commands [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-2 thru 1-3]
___________________________________
.18 State whom all weapon deficiencies are reported to. [ref. k, ch. 4, pg. 0012 00-7]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.19 Discuss Category I and II personnel as it relates to weapons qualifications. [ref. b,

pg. 2] {1 & 2}
___________________________________
27
102 .20 Discuss the following terms as they relate to weapon/ammunition possession:
{1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Issuing weapons to personnel with disqualifiers [ref. b, pg. 4]
b. Disqualifying factors [ref. b, pg. 4 thru 5]
c. Personnel obligations [ref. b, pg. 6 thru 12]
d. Simulator/Crew Served Weapon Applicability [ref. b, encl.1. Pg. 1]
e. DD Form 2760 Qualification to Possess Firearms or Ammunition [ref. b,
pg. 14]
f. OPNAV 5512/2 Authorization to Carry Firearms [ref. l, ch. 4, pg. 4-2]
g. OPNAV 3591/1, Small Arms Qualification Record [ref. b, pg. 8]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.21 Discuss the following terms as it relates to simmunition use: {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Use of standard rounds [ref. a, ch. 15, pg. 15-1 and 15-6]
b. Loading simmunition [ref. a, ch. 15, pg. 15-1 and 15-6]
c. Force on Force [ref. a, ch. 15 pg. 15-1]
___________________________________
.22 Discuss Audible Pop on the Range. [ref. b, encl. 1, pg. 9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.23 Discuss reloading of Run Away Guns. [ref. m, Preface, pg. c] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.25 Discuss mixing of weapon parts or modification of weapon assembles/parts/mounts.

[ref. n, Preface, pg. b; ref. o, ch. 1, pg. 1-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.26 Discuss the as they relate to CSW: [ref. o, ch. 1, pg. 1-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Mounts and assigned stands

b. Elevation/Train Stops
c. Modification of Elevation/Train Stops
___________________________________
28
102 .27 Discuss wearing of gloves during weapon operation. [ref. p, Preface, pg. vi]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.28 Discuss destruction of weapon/firearms. [ref. q, ch. 1, pg. 1-39 thru 1-40]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.29 Discuss use of live ammunition for weapons handling manipulations (Dry fire).
[ref. r, Preface, pg. i] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.30 State requirements for marksmanship awards. [ref. c, pg. 8 thru 9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
29
103
103 ARMS, AMMUNITION, AND EXPLOSIVES FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] OPNAVINST 5530.13C, Physical Security of Arms, Ammunition, and Explosives

[b] NAVSEA SW010-AF-ORD-010, Identification of Ammunition
[c] NAVSEA SW030-AA-MMO-010, Navy Gun Ammunition Description, Operation and
Maintenance
[d] OPNAVINST 5100.19E, Navy Occupational Safety and Health (NAVOSH) Volume I
SOH and Major Hazard-Specific Programs
[e] NAVSEA OP4, Ammunition Afloat
[f] NAVSEA OP5, Ammunition Ashore
[g] NAVSEA SW050-AB-MMA-010, Pyrotechnic, Screening, Marking and Counter
Measure Devices
[h] DoD 4540.5-M, DoD Nuclear Weapons Transportation Manual
[i] DoD 5160.65-M, Single Manager for Conventional Ammunition
[k] NTRP 3-07.2.2, Force Protection Weapons Handling Standard Procedures and
Guidelines
[l] NAVSUP P-724, Conventional Ordnance Stockpile Management
[m] TM 9-1005-224-10, Operator’s Manual, Machine Gun, 7.62-MM, M60 W/E and
Machine Gun, 7.62-MM, M60D W/E
[n] SW010-AD-GTP-010, Technical Manual, Small Arms and Special Warfare Ammunition
[o] SW370-BB-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, Shotgun, 12 Gauge Mossberg 500A1
[p] FM 4-30.13, Ammunition Handbook (TT&P) and Procedures for Munition Handlers
[q] SW030-AA-MMO-010, Technical Manual, Navy Gun Ammunition, Description
Operation, and Maintenance
103 .1 Explain screening requirements for individuals responsible for AA&E in relation to
the following terms: [ref. a, ch. 1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Screening Officials [pg. 1-4]

b. Periodicity [pg. 1-4]
c. Record entries [pg. 1-4]
d. Civil service [pg. 1-5]
e. Considered areas [pg. 1-4 thru 1-5]
___________________________________
.2 Discuss the different security risk categories of AA&E. [ref. a, app a, pg. A-1 thru
A-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
30
103 ARMS, AMMUNITION, AND EXPLOSIVES (CONT’D)
103 .3 Discuss the location, access, and control of AA&E spaces. [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-1 thru
3-4; ch. 4, pg. 4-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.4 Explain accountability and stowage procedures for weapons: [ref. a] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Physical count [ch. 5, pg. 5-1 thru 5-4]

b. Serial number inventories [ch. 5, pg. 5-1 thru 5-4]
c. Custody receipts [ch. 3, pg. 3-4]
d. Disposition and demilitarization [ch. 5, pg. 5-4 thru 5-5]
e. Transportation [ch. 6, pg. 6-1 thru 6-19]
___________________________________
.5 Explain the following types of gun ammunition: {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Small arms [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 2-1]

b. Fixed ammunition [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 2-3]
c. Separated ammunition [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 2-3]
___________________________________
.6 Discuss the method of color coding, markings and lettering. [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 2-
1 thru 2-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.7 Discuss applicable safety precautions when handling gun ammunition. [ref. d,

ch. C14, pg. C14-1 thru C14-2; ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-26; ref. f, ch. 2, pg. 2-
1 thru 2-41] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 Discuss the purpose and features of hand-manipulated signaling devices. [ref. g,

ch. 5, pg. 5-1 thru 5-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
31
103 .9 Explain the purpose and use of compatibility codes. [ref. f, ch. 3, pg. 3-14 thru 3-21]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 Discuss the purpose and features of Screening Agents and Devices. [ref. g, ch. 10,
pg. 10-1 thru 10-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.11 Discuss the purpose and features of the chemical light wand. [ref. g, ch. 13, pg. 13-
1 thru 13-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Discuss the following types of magazines: [ref. f, ch. 8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Standard earth covered [pg. 8-13]

b. Non-standard earth covered [pg. 8-14]
c. Keyport [pg. 8-14]
d. Gallery [pg. 8-14]
e. Corbetta [pg. 8-14]
f. Multiplate steel arch type [pg. 8-14]
g. Temporary arch type [pg. 8-14]
h. Ready service locker/magazine [pg. 8-14 thru 8-15]
i. Portable [pg. 8-15]
j. Triple arch type [pg. 8-15]
___________________________________
.13 Discuss the following storage facilities by designation: [ref. f, ch. 6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Class I [pg. 6-13]

b. Class II [pg. 6-13]
c. Class III [pg. 6-14]
___________________________________
.14 Discuss the purpose and features of Target Illumination Devices. [ref. g, ch. 6,
pg. 6-1 thru 6-18] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
32
103 .15 Describe how to conduct magazine inspections. [ref. a, app E/F; ref. f, ch. 11,
pg. 11-51] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 Describe the placards for the following: [ref. f] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Fire and Chemical Hazard Symbol [ch. 4, pg. 4-34 thru 4-40]
b. Explosive Limits [ch. 7, pg. 7-14 thru 7-15]
c. General Safety Rules/Specific Safety Instructions [ch. 11, pg. 11-11]
d. Requirements for water activated explosives, chemicals or pyrotechnic
mixtures [ch. 11, pg. 11-45]
e. Ammunition Far Side [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 2-13 to 2-14]
___________________________________
.17 Discuss the use and effect of magazine barricades. [ref. f, ch. 7, pg. 7-5 thru 7-6]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.18 Discuss magazines/explosive operations under the following conditions: [ref. f]

{1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Bravo Flag [ch. 12, pg. 12-26]

b. Permitted Operations [ch. 11, pg. 11-16 thru 11-18]
c. Exits [ch. 11, pg. 11-18]
d. Repairs [ch. 11, Pg. 11-18]
___________________________________
.19 Discuss the sources of producing static electricity. [ref. f, ch. 5, pg. 5-4 thru 5-7]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.20 Discuss the safety precautions that apply to static electricity and grounding. [ref. f,
ch. 5, pg. 5-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
33
103 .21 Discuss Safe Haven for ammunition. [ref. h, ch. 3, pg. 28 thru 29] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.22 Discuss fire prevention/protection for the following: [ref. f, ch. 4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Matches, lighters and similar devices [pg. 4-2]

b. Motor vehicles [pg. 4-7]
c. Welding and cutting [pg. 4-10]
d. Smoking [pg. 4-7]
e. Electrical equipment and Machinery [pg. 4-12]
f. Housekeeping [pg. 4-4 thru 4-5]
g. Vegetation and firebreaks [pg. 4-7 thru 4-8]
h. Fuel containers and tank [pg. 4-13 thru 4-14]
i. Boilers and heaters equipment [pg. 4-8 thru 4-9]
j. Fire bills [pg. 4-17 thru 4-18]
k. Evacuation/Drills [pg. 4-19]
l. Portable fire extinguishers [pg. 4-20 thru 4-23]
___________________________________
.23 Define ammunition. [ref. k, Glossary, pg. 25] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.24 Explain the purpose of the Navy Ammunition Logistic Codes (NALC). [ref. l, ch. 2,
pg. 2-16] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.25 Explain the purpose of the Ammunition Lot Number. [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-16]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.26 Explain the purpose of the Notice of Ammunition Reclassification (NAR). [ref. l,
ch. 5, pg. 5-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
34
103 .27 Explain the purpose of the DODIC. [ref. p, app. f, pg. f-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.28 Define projectile. [ref. k, Glossary, pg. 25] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.29 Define cartridge. [ref. k, Glossary, pg. 25] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.30 State who is responsible for the care and safe handling of ordnance. [ref. f, ch. 2,
pg. 2-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.31 What personnel are permitted to handle ammunition. [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 2-2]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.32 What action should be taken when observing the improper handling of explosives?
[ref. d, ch. A-3, pg. A3-1 to A3-09] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.33 How are inexperienced personnel trained for handling ammunition? [ref. e, ch. 2,
pg. 2-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.34 How often must personnel be briefed on the safe handling of ammunition? [ref. e,
ch. 2, pg. 2-17] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
35
103 .35 Describe the action taken when you discover a damaged container or when a round
of ammunition is dropped. [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 2-17] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.36 Explain the purpose and function of a “fuze”. [ref. k, Glossary, pg. 25] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.37 Describe “marking cartridge.” [ref. k, Glossary, pg. 25] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.38 Describe “sabot” ammunition. [ref. k, Glossary, pg. 25] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.39 Discuss the prohibitions on use of non-military ammunition in government/military

weapons. [ref. o, Preface, pg. iii] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.40 Discuss requirements for ammunition used in Navy weapons. [ref. c, encl. 2, pg. 4,
para 9a] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.41 Discuss the following terms as they apply to the safe handling of AA&E [ref. h, ch. 2]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Reporting unsafe conditions. [pg. 2-2]

b. Unauthorized/Inappropriate use of ordnance. [pg. 2-2]
c. Tampering with Arms, Ammunition and Explosives. [pg. 2-2]
d. Identification of service, practice and inert ammunition. [pg. 2-2 thru 2-4]
e. RF Transmissions. [pg. 2-12]
f. Emergency Alarms/Drills. [pg. 2-24]
g. Carrying weapons as security in explosive work areas. [pg. 2-34]
h. Safety training and certification. [pg. 2-26]
i. PPE. [pg. 2-27 thru 2-33]
___________________________________
36
103 .42 Discuss the following in relation to small arms ammunition: [ref. n, ch. 4, pg. 4-1 thru
4-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Case
b. Primer
c. Rimfire Case
d. Centerfire Cases
1. Semi-rimmed
2. Rimless
3. Rimmed
e. Propellant
b. Bullet
e. Classification:
1. Ball
2. Tracer
3. Armor Piercing
4. Armor Piercing Incendiary
5. API Multipurpose
6. Spotter Tracer
7. Match.
8. Blank
9. Signal
10. Dummy
11. Incendiary
12. High Pressure Test
13. Grenade
14. Sabboted [ref. q, ch. 3, pg. 3-2]
___________________________________
.43 Discuss the following in relation to ammunition: {1, 2, 3, 4}

a. Opening ammunition container [ref. m, ch. 5, pg. 0031 00-2]
b. Protection from elements [ref. m, ch. 5, pg. 0031 00-2]
c. Corrosion [ref. m, ch. 5, pg. 0031 00-2]
d. Dented cartridges or loose projectile [ref. m, ch. 5, pg. 0031 00-2]
e. Greasing or oiling ammunition [ref. m, ch. 5, pg. 0031 00-2]
f. Utilization in system or weapon not designed for [ref. n, Preface, pg. xi]
g. Sensitivity of black powder [ref. n, Preface, pg. xii]
h. Exudation [ref. n, Preface, pg. xii]
i. Ricochet [ref. n, Preface, pg. xii]
j. 12-gauge breaching charges [ref. n, Preface, pg. xii]
k. .38 Special cartridges with a +P or +P+ head stamp [ref. n, Preface,
pg. xii]
l. Simmunition and weapon adapters [ref. n, Preface, pg. xiii, xxiv]
m. Short Range Training Ammunition [ref. n, Preface, pg. xiii]
___________________________________
37
104
104 USE OF FORCE FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] OPNAVINST 5580.1A (Change 2), Navy Law Enforcement Manual

[b] SECNAVINST 5500.29C, Use of Deadly Force and the Carrying of Firearms by
Personnel of the Department of the Navy in Conjunction with Law Enforcement
Security Duties and Personal Protection
[c] NTTP 3-07.2.1, Antiterrorism/Force Protection
[d] FM 27-100, Legal Support to Operations
[e] NTTP 3-07.11, Maritime Interception Operations
[f] DOD 5525.1, Status of Forces Agreements
[g] Air Force Instruction 31-207, Arming and Use of Force by Air Force Personnel
[h] CJCSI 3121.01B, Standing Rules of Engagement for U.S. Forces
104 .1 Define use of deadly force. [ref. b, pg. 2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.2 Explain the following methods of force: [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-1 thru 4-2]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Physical presence
b. Verbal
c. Physical apprehension techniques
b. Handcuffs (Restraints)
c. Chemical agents
d. Batons
d. Military working dogs
e. Other DOD approved non-lethal weapons
f. Firearms
___________________________________
.3 State the training requirements for personnel armed in the performance of their
duties. [ref. b, app. e, pg. 7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
38
104 USE OF FORCE FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
104 .4 Discuss the Deadly Force Triangle in reference to the following terms: [ref. c, ch. 7,
pg. 7-2 thru 7-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Opportunity
b. Capability
c. Intent
___________________________________
.5 Explain the following circumstances justifying the use of deadly force: [ref. b, encl. 2,
pg. 9 thru 10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Self-defense and defense of others

b. Assets involving national security
c. Assets not involving national security but inherently dangerous to others
d. Serious offenses against persons
e. Protection of public health and safety
f. Arrest or apprehension
g. Escapes
___________________________________
.6 Discuss ROE as it relates to the following terms: [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 8-3 thru 8-15]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Development responsibilities
b. Purpose
c. Situation/drafting considerations
d. Key concepts
e. ROE Types
f. CJCS Standing ROE
g. IDDT Methodology
___________________________________
.7 State the purpose of warning shots and when allowed. [ref. c, app. e, pg. e-1]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 State the weapons authorized to fire warning shots. [ref. c, app. e, pg. e-1 thru e-2]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
(Signature and Date)b
39
104 USE OF FORCE FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
104 .9 State the criteria used to determine clear fields of fire for warning shots. [ref. c, app.
e, pg. e-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 State the techniques for weapon employment when firing Warning Shots. [ref. c,
app. e, pg. e-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.11 State the difference between Passive and Active subject types. [Maritime
Interception Operations, [ref. e, ch. 4, 1, pg. 4-20, 1-4], {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Discuss the Status of Forces Agreements (SOFA). [ref. f, ch. 1, pg. 1]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.13 Discuss the Inherent Right of Self-Defense. [ref. b, encl. 2, pg. 9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.14 Describe relationship of subject types to the Use of Force Continuum. [ref. g, ch. 1,
pg. 6 thru 13] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.15 Describe Standing Rules of Engagement as they apply to the Inherent Right of Self-
Defense. [ref. h, encl. L, pg. 1 thru 2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
40
105
105 MARKSMANSHIP FUNDAMENTALS
References:
Guidelines
[b] MCRP 3-01B, Marine Corps Pistol Marksmanship Manual
[c] MCRP 3-01A, Marine Corps Rifle Marksmanship Manual
[d] FM 3-22.68, Crew-Served Machine Guns, 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm
[e] OPNAVINST 3591.1E, Small Arms Training and Qualification
[f] FM 23-65, Browning Machine Gun Caliber .50 HB, M2
[g] FM 3-22.27, MK 19, 40-MM Grenade Machine Gun, Mod 3
[h] FM 3-22.31, 40MM, Grenade Launcher, M203
[i] FM 3-22.9, Rifle Marksmanship, M16A1, M16A2/3, M16A4, and M4 Carbine
[j] FM 44-8, Combined Arms for Air Defense
[k] MCWP 3-15.1, Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery
[l] FM 3-23.35, Combat Training with Pistols, M9 and M11
105 .1 Discuss preparing for marksmanship: {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Combat Mindset [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]

1. No Immediate Threat [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-26]
2. Contact Likely (Probable) [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-26 thru 3-27]
3. Contact Imminent [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-27]
b. Physical Preparation [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-2]
c. Mental Preparation [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-2]
d. Knowledge of the Combat environment [ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]
e. Plan of Action [ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]
f. Confidence [ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]
___________________________________
.2 Discuss firing a pistol while wearing gloves. [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 2-17 thru 2-19]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.3 Discuss chamber (press) check procedures: {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Pistol [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-2 thru 3-4]

b. Rifle [ref. c, ch. 3, pg. 3-1 thru 3-2]
___________________________________
41
105 MARKSMANSHIP FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
105 .4 Discuss weather effects marksmanship: {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Wind Effects on a Bullet:

1. Physical Effects [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-1]
2. Determining windage adjustments to offset wind effects [ref. c, ch. 8,
pg. 8-1]
(a) Direction [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-1]
(b) Value Classification [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-1 thru 8-2]
(c) Velocity [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-2]
(d) Flag Method [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-2]
(e) Adjustment [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-2]
(1) Flag and Observed Methods [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-2 thru 8-3]
b. Temperature [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-2 thru 8-4]
c. Precipitation [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-4]
d. Physical/Psychological Effects of Weather on Shooter:
1. Wind [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-4]
2. Temperature:
(a) Extreme Heat [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-4]
(b) Extreme Cold [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-4]
(c) Precipitation [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-4 thru 8-5]
3. Light/Bright Light [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-5]
4. Overcast [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-5]
5. Haze [ref. c, ch. 8, pg. 8-5]
___________________________________
.5 Discuss the following pistol reload procedures. [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-12 thru 3-17]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Dry
b. Condition 1
c. Reloading Considerations
___________________________________
.6 Discuss the following terms as they relate to pistol firing grip: {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Purpose of Pistol Firing Grip [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-2]

1. Sight Stabilization [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-2 thru 5-3]
2. Trigger Control [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-3]
3. Recoil Management [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-3]
___________________________________
42
105 .7 Discuss the following fundamentals of marksmanship: {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Aiming [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-1]

1. Sight Alignment [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-1]
2. Establishing Sight Alignment [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-1]
(a) Grip [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-1]
(b) Controlled Muscular Tension [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-2]
3. Sight Picture [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-2]
4. Eye and Sight relationship [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
5. Eye dominance [ref. i, ch. 4, pg. 4-19]
b. Trigger Control [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
1. Sight Alignment and Trigger Control [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
2. Grip [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
3. Trigger Finger Placement [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
4. Types of Trigger Control:
(a) Uninterrupted Trigger Control [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4]
(b) Interrupted Trigger Control [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4]
c. Breath Control [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4]
d. Application in the Field:
1. Compression of Fundamentals [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4 thru 4-5]
2. Aiming:
(a) Sight Alignment/Sight Picture [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-5]
(b) Trigger Control [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-5]
(c) Breath Control [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-5]
e. Follow Through [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-11]
f. Body/Stable Position [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-11]
___________________________________
.8 State the marksmanship and safety training requirements [ref. e, pg. 2 thru 3]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.9 Discuss the use of civilian marksmanship training. [ref. e, pg. 6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 Describe conditions affecting marksmanship in combat. [ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
43
105 .11 State the purpose of bent elbows in CQ. [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-18] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Discuss the following terms as they relate to pistol firing positions:
NOTE: THE REFERENCE FOR THIS SECTION IS WRITTEN FOR A RIGHT HANDED SHOOTER
a. Firing Position Selection [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}

1. Mobility [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Observation of the Enemy [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Stability [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Purpose of Stability [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Controlled Muscular Tension [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
b. Position Variations [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Position Selection [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Weaver Variation [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Long Range Engagement/Partially Exposed Target [ref. b, ch. 5,
pg. 5-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Advantage [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(c) Disadvantage [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Isosceles Variation [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Short Range Engagement [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Advantage [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(c) Disadvantage [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Standing Position [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Weaver Variation [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-9 thru 5-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Isosceles Variation [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-11 thru 5-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Kneeling Position [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-13] {1, 2, 3, 4}
5. Prone Position [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-18] {1, 2, 3, 4}
6. Crouch. Position [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-11] {1, 2, 3, 4}
7. Techniques of Firing [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Hand-eye Coordination [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-14 thru 2-15] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Flash Sight Picture [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-15] {3, 4}
(c) Quick-Fire Point Shooting [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-15] {3, 4}
(d) Quick-Fire Sighting [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-15] {3, 4}
8. Natural Body Alignment [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-24 thru 5-25] {1, 2, 3, 4}
9. Grip [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) One Handed [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Two Handed [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(c) Fist Grip [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-2 thru 2-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(d) Palm Support Grip [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(e) Weaver Grip [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
10. Isometric Tension [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
44
105 .12 c. 11. Target Engagement [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-7 thru 2-8, 2-15] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Recoil Anticipation [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Trigger Jerk [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(c) Heeling [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Transverse [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-15] {3, 4}
1. Crouching 360-degree Traverse [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-15] {3, 4}
(a) Over left Shoulder [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-15 thru 2-16] {3, 4}
(b) To the Left [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-15 thru 2-16] {3, 4}
(c) To the Front [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-16 thru 2-17] {3, 4}
(d) To the Right [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-16 thru 2-17] {3, 4}
(e) To the Right Rear [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-17 thru 2-18] {3, 4}
2. Kneeling 360-degree Traverse [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-18] {3, 4}
(a) To the Left [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-18 thru 2-19] {3, 4}
(b) To the Front [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-18 thru 2-19] {3, 4}
(c) To the Right [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-18 and 2-20] {3, 4}
(d) To the Rear [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-18 thru 2-208] {3, 4}
(e) To the New Right Side [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-20 thru 2-21] {3, 4}
e. Combat Reloading [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-21 thru 2-23] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.13 Discuss the following terms as they relate to pistol cover/concealment and
marksmanship:
a. Cover [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}

b. Concealment [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Cover Materials [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-1 thru 6-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Firing from Cover [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Fire Position Adjustment [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Application of the Weaver and Isosceles Variations [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6- 2]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Keeping Behind Cover [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-3 thru 6-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Supported Firing Positions: [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. General [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Supported Prone [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Supported Kneeling [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-9 thru 6-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Supported Standing [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-11] {1, 2, 3, 4}
f. Searching and engaging targets from cover: [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-11] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Pie Technique [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-11 thru 6-13] {3, 4}
2. Roll Out [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-13 thru 6-14] {3, 4}
3. Pie/Roll Out Combination [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-14] {3, 4}
___________________________________
45
105 .14 Discuss the following terms as they relate to pistol presentation:
a. Aid to Sight Alignment/Picture [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 7-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}

b. Presentation from the Ready [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 7-1 thru 7-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Presentation from the Alert [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 7-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Presentation from Holster Transport [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 7-2 thru 7-11]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
e. While assuming Kneeling Position [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 7-2 thru 7-11] {3, 4}
1. Isosceles and Weaver Variations from the Standing Carries:
(a) Presentation from the Ready and from the Alert (arms straight)
[ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 7-11 thru 7-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Presentation from the Alert (close quarters, elbows bent) [ref. b,
ch. 7, pg. 7-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Isosceles and Weaver Variations from the Standing Holster Transport
[ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 7-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
f. While Assuming the Prone Position [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 7-12] {3, 4}
1. Isosceles Prone from the Standing Holster Transport [ref. b, ch. 7,
pg. 7-12 thru 7-13] {3, 4}
2. Weaver Prone from the Standing Holster Transport [ref. b, ch. 7,
pg. 7- 13] {3, 4}
g. Search and Assess [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 7-13] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Introduction [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 7-13] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Procedure [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 7-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Actions Taken Upon Assessment [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 7-14]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
h. Presentation from the M12 Holster Transport [ref. b, ch. 7, pg., 7-2 thru 7-4]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
i. Presentation from the M7 Shoulder Holster Transport [ref. b, ch. 7, pg.,
7-4 thru 7-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
j. Presentation from the Assault Holster Transport [ref. b, ch. 7, pg., 7-6 thru 7-7]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
k. Presentation from the Concealed Pistol Holster Transport [ref. b, ch. 7, pg.,
7-8 thru 7-11] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
46
105 .16 Discuss the following as they relate to machine gun marksmanship:
a. Preliminary Gunnery [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}

b. Steady Position [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-4 thru 4-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Aim [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Focus of Eye [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Sight Picture [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Breath Control [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Trigger Control [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
f. grip [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-7]
___________________________________
.17 Discuss the following machine gun firing positions:
a. Prone Position, Bipod Supported [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-6 thru 4-7]
{2, 3, 4}
b. Fighting Position, Bipod Supported [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-7] {2, 3, 4}
c. Prone Position, Tripod Supported [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-8] {2, 3, 4}
d. Fighting Position, Tripod Supported [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-8 thru 4-9]
{2, 3, 4}
e. Under arm [ref. d, ch. 5, pg. 5-35] {3, 4}
f. Hip [ref. d, ch. 5, pg. 5-36] {3, 4}
___________________________________
47
105 .18 Discuss the following terms as they relate to pistol engagement:
a. Target Detection [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}

1. Movement [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Improper Camouflage (concealment) [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-1]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
b. Techniques of Fire [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Double Action Mode [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Single Action Mode [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-2 thru 8-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Factors Affecting Whether to Fire Single Action or Double Action
[ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-3 thru 8-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Two-shot [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
5. Slow Fire [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
6. Reengagement Techniques [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-5] {3, 4}
(a) Slow Fire [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-5 thru 8-6] {3, 4}
(b) Two-shot [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-6] {3, 4}
(c) Offset Aiming Two-shot [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-6] {3, 4}
7. Engaging Multiple Targets [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Prioritizing [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-7 thru 8-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Engaging Multiple [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-8 thru 8-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
8. Engaging Moving Targets [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Types of Moving Targets [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Leading Moving Targets [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-10 thru 8-12]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
(c) Methods [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-12 thru 8-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(d) Applying Marksmanship to Moving Targets [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-14
thru 8-15] {1, 2, 3, 4}
9. Engagement during low-light/darkness: [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-15]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Adaptation [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-15] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Vision Maintenance [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-16] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(c) Target Detection [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-16 thru 8-17] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(d) Engagement [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-18] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(e) Flashlight Techniques [ref. b, ch. 8, pg. 8-18 thru 8-27]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
48
105 .19 Discuss the following terms as they relate to rifle presentation:
a. From Tactical Carry [ref. c, ch. 7, pg. 7-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}

b. From Ready/Alert Carry [ref. c, ch. 7, pg. 7-1 thru 7-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. From Strong Sling Arms Transport [ref. c, ch. 7, pg. 7-2 thru 7-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. From Weakside Sling Arms Transport [ref. c, ch. 7, pg. 7-3 thru 7-4]
e. Search and Assess:
1. Purpose [ref. c, ch. 7, pg. 7-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Technique [ref. c, ch. 7, pg. 7-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Searching and Assessing to a Higher Profile [ref. c, ch. 7, pg. 7-4
thru 7-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.20 Discuss the following terms as they relate to one-handed pistol firing:
a. One-Handed Presentation and Shooting [ref. b, ch. 9, pg. 9-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. One-handed firing [ref. b, ch. 9, pg. 9-1]
2. Adjustment of the standing position [ref. b, ch. 9, pg. 9-1 thru 9-2]
3. Searching and assessing after firing one-handed [ref. b, ch. 9, pg. 9-2]
b. One-Handed Reloading:
1. Dry Reload [ref. b, ch. 9, pg. 9-3 thru 9-7] {3, 4}
2. Condition 1 Reload [ref. b, ch. 9, pg. 9-7] {3, 4}
c. One-Handed Remedial Action [ref. b, ch. 9, pg. 9-7 thru 9-11] {3, 4}
d. Presentation from the holster with the weak hand [ref. b, ch. 9, pg. 9-11]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Pistol Rotation Method [ref. b, ch. 9, pg. 9-11 thru 9-13] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Hand Rotation Method [ref. b, ch. 9, pg. 9-13 thru 9-15] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Knee Placement Method [ref. b, ch. 9, pg. 9-15 thru 9-16] {1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Transferring the Pistol from One Hand to the Other [ref. b, ch. 9, pg. 9-16 thru
9-17] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.21 Discuss the following terms as they relate to advanced pistol firing Techniques:
a. Shooting on the Move [ref. b, ch. 10, pg. 10-1] {3, 4}

b. Moving with the Pistol [ref. b, ch. 10, pg. 10-1] {3, 4}
1. Alert Position [ref. b, ch. 10, pg. 10-1] {3, 4}]
2. Ready Position [ref. b, ch. 10, pg. 10-1] {3, 4}
c. Glide Technique [ref. b, ch. 10, pg. 10-1] {3, 4}
d. Engaging Targets [ref. b, ch. 10, pg. 10-2] {3, 4}
e. Continue Moving [ref. b, ch. 10, pg. 10-2] {3, 4}
f. Reloading and Stoppages [ref. b, ch. 10, pg. 10-2] {3, 4}
e. Turn and Fire [ref. b, ch. 10, pg. 10-2] {3, 4}
1. Engaging Targets 90 Degrees to the Right [ref. b, ch. 10, pg. 10-2 thru
10-3] {3, 4}
49
105 .21 e. 2. Engaging Targets 90 Degrees to the Left [ref. b, ch. 10, pg. 10-3 thru
10-4] {3, 4}
3. Engaging Targets 180 Degrees to the Rear [ref. b, ch. 10, pg. 10-4 thru
10-6] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.22 Discuss the following fundamentals of rifle marksmanship:

a. Aiming [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Sight Alignment [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Sight Picture [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-1 thru 4-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Importance of Correct Sight Alignment [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Factors affecting Sight Alignment [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-2 thru 4-4]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
5. Acquiring and Maintaining Sight Alignment and Sight Picture [ref. c,
ch. 4, pg. 4-4 thru 4-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
6. Size and Distance to the Target [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Long-range Engagements [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-4 thru 4-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Short-range Engagements [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
b. Breath Control [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Breath Control During Long-range or Precision Fire (Slow Fire) [ref. c,
ch. 4, pg. 4-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Breath Control During All Other Combat Situations [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-
5 thru 4-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Trigger Control [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Grip [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Trigger Finger Placement [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Types of Trigger Control:
(a) Uninterrupted Trigger Control [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Interrupted Trigger Control [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Resetting the Trigger [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
5. Follow through and Recovery [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
6. Trigger Squeeze [ref. i, ch. 4, pg. 4-17 through 4-18] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.23 Discuss the following as they relate to machine gun marksmanship

objectives/training:
a. Objectives [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}

1. Accurate Initial Burst [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Adjustment of Fire [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Speed [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-1{1, 2, 3, 4}]
b. Training Phases [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Preliminary [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Basic [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
50
105 .23 b. 3. Advanced [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-1] {3, 4}
c. Training Strategy [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-2 thru 4-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Training for Combat [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.24 Discuss the following terms as they relate to rifle firing positions:
NOTE: THE REFERENCE FOR THIS SECTION IS WRITTEN FOR A RIGHT HANDED SHOOTER
a. Firing Position Selection [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Mobility [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Observation of the Enemy [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Stability [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
b. Types and Uses of the Rifle Web Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Hasty Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-2 thru 5-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Loop Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-3 thru 5-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Factors Common to All Shooting Positions [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
NOTE: THE REFERENCE FOR THIS SECTION IS WRITTEN FOR A RIGHT HANDED
SHOOTER
1. Left Hand [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-4 thru 5-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Rifle Butt in Shoulder Pocket [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Right Hand Grip [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Right Elbow [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
5. Stock Weld [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
6. Breathing [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
7. Muscular Tension/Relaxation [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-6 thru 5-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Elements of a good fighting position [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Bone Support [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Muscle Relaxation [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Natural Point of Aim [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-7 thru 5-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Prone Position [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Application [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Assuming Position [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Moving Forward into Position [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Dropping back into position [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-8 thru 5-9]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Straight Leg Prone Position with the Hasty Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-
9 thru 5-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Straight Leg Prone Position with the Loop Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-10]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
5. Cocked Leg Prone Position with the Hasty Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-
10 thru 5-11] {1, 2, 3, 4}
6. Cocked Leg Prone Position with the Loop Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-
11 thru 5-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
f. Sitting Position [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Crossed Ankle Sitting Position with the Hasty Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-2]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
51
105 .24 f. 2. Crossed Ankle Sitting Position with the Loop Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-13]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Crossed Leg Sitting Position with the Hasty Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-
13 thru 5-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Crossed Leg Sitting Position with the Loop Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-14]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
5. Open Leg Sitting Position with the Hasty Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-14 thru
5-15] {1, 2, 3, 4}
6. Open Leg Sitting Position with the Loop Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-15 thru
5-16] {1, 2, 3, 4}
g. Kneeling Position [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-15] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Assuming Position [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-15] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Moving Forward into Position [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-16] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Dropping Back into Position [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-16] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. High Kneeling Position with the Hasty Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-16 thru 5-
17] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. High Kneeling Position with the Loop Sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-17]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Medium Kneeling Position [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-17 thru 5-18] {1, 2, 3, 4}
5. Low Kneeling Position [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-18] {1, 2, 3, 4}
h. Standing Position [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-18] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Standing position with the hasty sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-18 thru 5-19]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Standing position with the parade sling [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-19] {1, 2, 3, 4}
i. Cover and Concealment [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Types of Cover:
(a) Frontal [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Ideal [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Common Cover Material [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Sand Bags [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Trees/Logs [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(c) Cinder Block [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-1 thru 6-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Firing from Specific Cover Types [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Fighting Hole [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Rooftop [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(c) Window (Supported/Unsupported) [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-2 thru 6-3]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
(d) Vehicle [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-3 thru 6-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Supported Firing Positions [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Cover/Concealment Considerations [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-4]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Adjustment of Shooting Position:
(1) Keeping Behind Cover During Firing [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-4]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
(2) Firing from Right/Left Cover [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-4 thru 6-5]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
52
105 .24 .i 4. (b) (3) Firing Over the Top of Cover [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-5]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
(c) Muzzle Awareness [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(d) Ejection port Clearing [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(e) Resting the Magazine [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(f) Seven cover firing factors [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-6 thru 6-7]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
(g) Supported Firing Positions:
(1) Prone [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(2) Kneeling [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-8 thru 6-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(3) Sitting [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(4) Standing [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-9 thru 6-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(h) Searching for Targets and Engaging from Cover
[ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(1) Pie Technique [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(2) Rollout Technique [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(3) Combing Techniques [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(i) Moving Out from Behind Cover [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 6-11
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.25 Discuss zeroing of rifles:
a. Line of Sight [ref. c, ch. 9, pg. 9-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}

b. Aiming Point [ref. c, ch. 9, pg. 9-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Centerline of Bore [ref. c, ch. 9, pg. 9-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Trajectory [ref. c, ch. 9, pg. 9-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Range [ref. c, ch. 9, pg. 9-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
f. Types of Zero:
1. Battlesight Zero [ref. c, ch. 9, pg. 9-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Zero [ref. c, ch. 9, pg. 9-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. True Zero [ref. c, ch. 9, pg. 9-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
g. Windage and Elevation Rules [ref. c, ch. 9, pg. 9-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Front Sight Elevation Rule [ref. c, ch. 9, pg. 9-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Rear Sight Elevation Rule [ref. c, ch. 9, pg. 9-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Windage Rule [ref. c, ch. 9, pg. 9-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
h. Zeroing Process [ref. c, ch. 9, pg. 9-4 thru 9-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
i. Battlesight Zero Process [ref. c, ch. 9, pg. 9-5 thru 9-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
53
105 .26 Discuss machine gun moving target engagement [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-11] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Leads [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-11] {1, 2, 3, 4}

b. Tracking Techniques [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Trapping Techniques [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Position and Aim [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-12 thru 4-13] {1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Bipod Technique [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-13] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.27 Discuss alternate MG firing positions: [ref. d, ch. 5, pg. 5-35]

a. Underarm [ref. d, ch. 5, pg. 5-35 thru 5-36]
b. Hip Firing [ref. d, ch. 5, pg. 5-36 thru 5-37]
___________________________________
.28 Discuss the following terms as they relate to rifle engagement:

a. Target Detection [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Movement [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Sound [ref. c ch. 10, pg. 10-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Improper Camouflage [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-1 thru 10-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Identify Target Location [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
5. Methods for Area Search [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Hasty [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Detailed [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-2 thru 10-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
6. Maintain Observation [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
7. Range Estimation [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
8. Unit of Measure Method [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
9. Front Sight Post Method [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-3 thru 10-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
10. Visible Detail Method [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Bracketing Method [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Halving Method [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(c) Combination Method [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
b. Factors Effecting Estimation [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-4 thru 10-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Offset Aiming [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Point of Aim Technique [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Elevation [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-5 thru 10-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Windage [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-6 thru 10-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Known Strike of the Round [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Techniques of Fire [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Two-shot [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Single-shot [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Three Round Burst [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Engaging Immediate Threat [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Engaging Multiple Targets [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-7 thru 10-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Prioritizing Targets [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
54
105 .28 .e 3. Engagement Technique [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Firing Position [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Prone [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(c) Sitting [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(d) Kneeling [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(e) Standing [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(f) Alternate Prone [ref. i, ch. 7, pg. 7-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(g) Kneeling Supported [ref. i, ch. 7, pg. 7-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(h) Kneeling Unsupported [ref. i, ch. 7, pg. 7-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(i) Modified Standing [ref. i, ch. 7, pg. 7-3 thru 7-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(j) Urban Operations [ref. i, ch. 7, pg. 7-4 thru 7-6] {3, 4}
(k) Burst fire/automatic position [ref. i, ch. 7, pg. 7-6 thru 7-7]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
f. Engaging Moving Targets [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Types of Moving Targets [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Leads [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Amount of Lead Required [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Three Types of Lead [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
5. Point of Aim Technique [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-9 thru 10-10]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
6. Engagement Methods [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Tracking [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(6) Ambush [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-10 thru 10-11] {1, 2, 3, 4}
g. Engagement of Targets at Unknown Distance:
1. Hasty Sight Setting [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-11] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Point of Aim Technique [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
h. Engagement During Low-light/Darkness: [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-12]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Obtaining NV [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Maintaining NV [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Search. Methods [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Off-Center Vision [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-12 thru 10-13] {1, 2, 3, 4}
i. Engagement while wearing field protective mask [ref. c, ch. 10, pg. 10-14 thru
10-15] {1, 2, 3, 4}
j. Marking of Targets [ref. i, ch. 6, pg. 6-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Number of Targets [ref. i, ch. 6, pg. 6-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Target Exposure Time [ref. i, ch. 6, pg. 6-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Target Spacing [ref. i, ch. 6, pg. 6-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Good/Bad Aiming Points [ref. i, ch. 6, pg. 6-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
55
105 .29 Discuss the following machine gun terms and techniques:
a. Traverse and Search [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-13] {1, 2, 3, 4}

1. Bipod [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-13] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Tripod [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-13 thru 4-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
b. Direct Lay [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Application of Fire [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Fire adjustment [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Sight corrections method [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Adjusted aiming point method [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-14 thru 4-15]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Measurement by visual estimation [ref. g, ch. 5, pg. 5-4 thru 5-6]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Measurement from a map [ref. g, ch. 5, pg. 5-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
5. Measurement by pacing [ref. g, ch. 5, pg. 5-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
6. Binocular measurement [ref. g, ch. 5, pg. 5-7 thru 5-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
7. Measurement by laser range finder [ref. g, ch. 5, pg. 5-9 thru 5-10]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
8. Measurement by firing [ref. g, ch. 5, pg. 5-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
9. Measurement by lateral distance [ref. g, ch. 5, pg. 5-10]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Effects of Wind: [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-15] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Clock System [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-15 thru 4-16] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Measurement [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-16 thru 4-17] {1, 2, 3, 4}
f. Movement, Speed and Alignment [ref. d, ch. 5, pg. 5-38] {1, 2, 3, 4}
g. Reloading [ref. d, ch. 5, pg. 5-38] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.30 Describe the following MG Fire Commands: [ref. k, ch. 6, pg. 6-23 thru 6-25]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Alert
b. Direction
c. Description
d. Range
e. Assignment
f. Control
___________________________________
.31 State the required training content marksmanship/safety/weapon familiarization

training shall cover. [ref. e, encl. 2, pg. 3 thru 4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
56
105 .32 Describe the following MG Field Zero procedures: [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-34 thru 4-36]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Setting of the Sights
b. Burst
c. Correction for Windage
d. Correction for Elevation
e. Confirmation
f. Recording of Zero
___________________________________
.33 Discuss the following MG aerial defense terms:
a. Passive/Active Measures [ref. d, app. c, pg. c-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}

b. Tracers Use [ref. d, app. c, pg. c-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Firing Positions [ref. d, app. c, pg. c-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.34 Discuss MG Advanced Optics and Lasers: [ref. d, app. g, pg. g-1 thru g-6] {3, 4}
a. Zero Procedures
b. Bore Light
c. Concept
d. Zero of Bore Light to Weapon
e. Stabilization
f. Boresight Target Offset
___________________________________
.35 Discuss Tracking. [ref. f, ch. 5, pg. 5-43] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.36 Discuss the following Grenade Launcher marksmanship terms:

a. Steady Position [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Prone Position [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-1 thru 5-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Kneeling Position [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-3 thru 5-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Sitting Position [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-4 thru 5-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Sitting Position Cross-Ankle [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-6 thru 5-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
5. Sitting Position Cross-Legged [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-9 thru 5-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
6. Squatting Position [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-11 thru 5-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
7. Fighting Position [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-12 thru 5-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
8. Standing Position [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-14 thru 5-16] {1, 2, 3, 4}
57
105 .36 b. Aiming [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-17] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Breathing [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-17] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Trigger Control [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-17] {1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Limited Visibility [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-17 thru 5-20] {1, 2, 3, 4}
f. NBC Environment [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-20] {1, 2, 3, 4}
g. Sensing and Adjustment of Fire: [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-22] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Determining Dead Space [ref. h, ch. 6, pg. 6-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
h. Zeroing [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 5-24 thru 5-25] {1, 2, 3, 4}
i. Range Estimation [ref. h, ch. 6, pg. 6-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. 100-Meter Unit-of-Measurement Method [ref. h, ch. 6, pg. 6-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Appearance of Objects Method [ref. h, ch. 6, pg. 6-4 thru 6-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. NV Method [ref. h, ch. 6, pg. 6-5 thru 6-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
j. Employment Considerations [ref. k, ch. 6, pg. 6-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
k. Offensive/Defensive Employment [ref. k, ch. 6, pg. 6-5 thru 6-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
l. Heavy MG Affects against:
1. Armor [ref. k, ch. 6, pg. 6-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Personnel [ref. k, ch. 6, pg. 6-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Aircraft [ref. k, ch. 6, pg. 6-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Firing through vegetation [ref. k, ch. 6, pg. 6-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
5. Complimentary Effects [ref. k, ch. 6, pg. 6-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
m. Danger Space [ref. k, ch. 6, pg. 6-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
n. Overhead Fires [ref. k, ch. 6, pg. 6-36 thru 6-42] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.37 Discuss the following types of targets: [ref. h, ch. 6, pg. 6-7 thru 6-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
a. Point
b. Area
c. Linear
d. Deep
e. Linear with Depth
___________________________________
.39 Discuss the following terms in relation to aerial defense with small arms:
a. Enemy Air Threat [ref. j, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}

b. Small Arms Fire Against Aircraft [ref. j, ch. 5, pg. 5-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Small Arms in Air Defense [ref. j, ch. 5, pg. 5-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Volume Fire [ref. j, ch. 5, pg. 5-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Engagement Principles [ref. j, ch. 5, pg. 5-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Football Field Technique [ref. j, ch. 5, pg. 5-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(b) Aiming Points [ref. j, ch. 5, pg. 5-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Firing Positions [ref. j, ch. 5, pg. 5-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
58
105 .39 e. Paratroopers/Parachutes [ref. j, ch. 5, pg. 5-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
f. Engagement Weapons [ref. j, ch. 5, pg. 5-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
g. Helicopters and UAVs [ref. j, ch. 5, pg. 5-7] {1, 2, 3, 4}
h. Fast Moving Aircraft [ref. j, ch. 5, pg. 5-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}
i. Practice Sequence [ref. j, ch. 5, pg. 5-8 thru 5-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
j. Tracers [ref. j, ch. 6, pg. 6-1 thru 6-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
59
106
106 NIGHT VISION FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] USN/USMC, Helicopter Night Vision Device (NVD) Manual, 6th Edition
[b] TM 11-5855-213-10, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Night Vision Sight,
Individual Served Weapon, AN/PVS-4
[c] TM 9-5855-450-24, Organizational, Direct Support, and General Support, and
Maintenance Manual, For Night Vision Sight, Infrared AN/TAS-4
[d] TM 11-5855-301-12&P, Technical Manual, Operator’s and Unit maintenance Manual
(Including Repair Parts List), Target Pointer Illuminator/Aiming Light (TPIAL), AN/PAQ-
4B
[e] SW370-A3-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, for Carbine, 5.56MM MK 18 MOD 0
[f] SW215-AT-OMI-010, Operator’s Manual, Night Vision Goggles, AN/PVS-7
[g] TM 11-5855-214-10, Operator’s Manual, Night Vision Sight, Crew Served Weapon,
AN/TVS-5
[h] Handbook 03-22, Own the Night V2
106 .1 Discuss the following terms as they relate to Image Intensifier and NVG technology:
a. First Generation (GEN-I) Image Intensifiers [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-1 thru 1-2]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
b. Second Generation (GEN-II) Image Intensifiers [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-2 thru 1-3]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Third Generation (GEN-III) Image Intensifiers [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-3]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Fourth Generation (GEN-IV) Image Intensifiers [ref. h, pg. 5-6]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Thermal Imagers [ref. h, pg. 6-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.2 Discuss the following terms as they affect NVEO systems in a night environment:
a. Electromagnetic Spectrum [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}

1. Reflected vs. Radiant Energy [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-2] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Optical Radiation Light Theories [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Thermal Theory and Principals [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-3 thru 2-6]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.3 State the three major factors that influence NVEO performance. [ref. a, ch. 2,
pg. 2-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
60
106 NIGHT VISION FUNDAMENTAL (CONT’D)
106 .4 Discuss the hazards associated with the materials in the image intensifier of NVGs.
[ref. b, Preface, pg. d thru e] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.5 Discuss Military laser exemption. [ref. d, Preface, pg. a] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.6 Discuss the following terms as they affect NVEO variables:
a. Natural Illumination [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-6 thru 2-8] {1, 2, 3, 4}

b. Artificial Illumination [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Terrain Considerations [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-9 thru 2-10] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Sources of Thermal Energy [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-10 thru 2-11]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Thermal Scene [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-11 thru 2-12] {1, 2, 3, 4}
f. Diurnal Cycle [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-12 thru 2-13] {1, 2, 3, 4}
g. Atmospheric Effects [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-13 thru 2-16] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.7 Discuss the following NVEO image defects:
a. Shading [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-13 thru 3-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}

b. Edge Glow [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-13 thru 3-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Honeycomb Pattern [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-13 thru 3-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Bright Spots/Dark Spots [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-13 thru 3-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Distortion [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-13 thru 3-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
f. Flickering [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-13] {1, 2, 3, 4}
g. Scintillation [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-13] {1, 2, 3, 4}
h. Tilt Defects [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-13] {1, 2, 3, 4}
i. Tube Alignment and Optical Image Differences [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-14]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
j. Collimation [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
61
106 .9 Discuss using individual served weapon sight without eyepiece attached. [ref. b,
Preface, pg. a] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 Discuss the hazard of visible stray during operation of NVEO. [ref. b, Preface, pg. a]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.11 Discuss NVD Scene Interpretation the following terms and their effect on NVEO:
a. Terrain Assessment [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {2, 3, 4}

1. Density [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Terrain Profile [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {2, 3, 4}
b. Common NVEO Scene Descriptions:
1. Shadows [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-2 thru 5-3] {2, 3, 4}
2. Roads [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
3. Water [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-4] {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Open Fields [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-4 thru 5-5] {2, 3, 4}
5. Desert [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
6. Forests [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
7. Snow [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-5 thru 5-6] {1, 2, 3, 4}
8. Artificial Light Sources [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-6 thru 5-7] {2, 3, 4}
9. Thermal Size and Shape [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-7] {2, 3, 4}
10. Internally Heated Sources [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-7] {2, 3, 4}
11. Day vs. Night Thermal Scene [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-7] {2, 3, 4}
c. Atmospheric Impact on NVEO Performance [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-8]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Clouds [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-8 thru 5-9] {2, 3, 4}
2. Fog [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-9] {2, 3, 4}
3. Rain [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-10] {2, 3, 4}
4. Falling/Blowing Snow [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-10] {2, 3, 4}
5. Sand / Dust / Other Obscurants [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-10 thru 5-11] {2, 3, 4}
6. Winds [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-11] {2, 3, 4}
7. Lightning [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-11] {2, 3, 4}
d. Sensor Integration [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-11] {2, 3, 4}
1. NVG Operational Integration [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-11] {2, 3, 4}
2. Situational Awareness [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-12] {2, 3, 4}
3. Spatial Orientation [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-12] {2, 3, 4}
4. Threat Detection/Avoidance [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-12] {2, 3, 4}
5. Workload [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-12 thru 5-13] {2, 3, 4}
62
106 .11 d. 6. Navigation [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-13] {2, 3, 4}
7. Targeting [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-13] {2, 3, 4}
8. Hazard Avoidance [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-14] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Discuss the hazards associated with all infrared optics antireflective coating. [ref. c,
Preface, pg. b] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.13 Discuss Laser protection for NVEO. [ref. a, ch. 9, pg. 9-18 thru 9-22] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.14 Discuss the following as it relates to laser/infrared safety: [ref. d, Preface, pg. a]
{2, 3, 4}
a. Staring into lasers

b. Mirrored surfaces
c. Shining into other peoples eyes
___________________________________
.15 Discuss NVEO Human Factors as they relate to the following terms:
a. Visual Performance [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-1] {2, 3, 4}

1. NVG spatial orientation [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-1] {2, 3, 4}
2. Field of view (FOV) / field of regard (FOR) [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-2 thru 6-3]
{2, 3, 4}
3. NVEO visual acuity and resolution [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-3 thru 6-6] {2, 3, 4}
(a) Angular size of object [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-4] {2, 3, 4}
(b) Illumination of object [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-4] {2, 3, 4}
(c) Contrast [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-4] {2, 3, 4}
(d) Retinal adaptation [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-4] {2, 3, 4}
(e) Atmospheric conditions [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-4] {2, 3, 4}
(f) Relative motion of object [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-4] {2, 3, 4}
(g) Search pattern and time [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-4] {2, 3, 4}
(h) Interpupillary distance (IPD) adjustment [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-6]
(i) Eyepiece lens or diopter adjustment [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-6] {2, 3, 4}
(j) Objective lens focus adjustment [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-6 thru 6-7]
{2, 3, 4}
63
106 .15 a. 3. (k) Tube Alignment, Image Differences and Binocular Fusion [ref. a,
ch. 6, pg. 6-7] {2, 3, 4}
4. Additional Visual Cues [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-7 thru 6-8] {2, 3, 4}
5. Static and Dynamic Visual Cues [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-8] {2, 3, 4}
6. Dark Adaptation [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-9] {1, 2, 3, 4}
(a) Unaided Peripheral Cueing [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-9 thru 6-10] {2, 3, 4}
(b) Post Operation Visual Problems [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-10] {2, 3, 4}
b. Fatigue [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-10] {2, 3, 4}
1. Acute Fatigue [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-10] {2, 3, 4}
2. Cumulative Fatigue [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-10 thru 6-11] {2, 3, 4}
3. Circadian Fatigue [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-11 thru 6-12] {2, 3, 4}
4. Effects of Fatigue [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-13] {2, 3, 4}
5. Sleep [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-13 thru 6-14] {2, 3, 4}
6. Recommendations for Coping with Fatigue [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-14 thru 6-
16] {2, 3, 4}
c. Crew Coordination [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-16] {2, 3, 4}
d. Spatial Disorientation [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-16] {2, 3, 4}
e. Complacency [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-16] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 Discuss the following terms as they relate to NVEO adjustment and assessment:
a. Inspection and Initial Adjustment [ref. a, ch. 8, pg. 8-1 thru 8-6] {2, 3, 4}
b. Alignment Procedures [ref. a, ch. 8, pg. 8-6 thru 8-9] {2, 3, 4}
c. Focus Procedures [ref. a, ch. 8, pg. 8-9 thru 8-12] {2, 3, 4}
d. Image Assessment Procedures [ref. a, ch. 8, pg. 8-13 thru 8-16] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.17 Discuss the components of a NVEO briefs. [ref. a, ch. 21, pg. 21-1 thru 21-3]
{2, 3, 4}
a. SLAP
b. Goggle/Degoggle Procedures
c. Hazards
d. Crew Preparation
e. Ordnance Employment
f. Image Assessment Procedures
___________________________________
64
106 .18 Discuss prolonged activation of infrared aimers. [ref. d, Preface, pg. a] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.19 Discuss the following as it relates to mercury/lithium batteries:
a. Handling [ref. b, Preface, pg. a thru d] {2, 3, 4}

b. Disposal [ref. b, Preface, pg. a thru d] {2, 3, 4}
c. Heating/Hissing [ref. b, Preface, pg. a thru d] {2, 3, 4}
d. Recharging [ref. b, Preface, pg. a thru d] {2, 3, 4}
e. Tampering/Disassembling [ref. b, Preface, pg. a thru d] {2, 3, 4}
f. Bulged or Burst [ref. b, Preface, pg. a thru d] {2, 3, 4}
g. Use of multiple lithium batteries in equipment [ref. b, Preface, pg. a thru d]
{2, 3, 4}
h. Carrying batteries in pockets with metal objects [ref. f, Preface, pg. a] {2, 3, 4}
i. Corrosive Chemical First Aid [ref. g, Preface, pg. d thru e] {2, 3, 4}
j. Storage of equipment with batteries installed [ref. e, ch. 4, pg. 4-29] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
65
107
107 M9 SERVICE PISTOL FUNDAMENTALS
CHANGE-1 NOTE: CONTENT MOVED TO NAVEDTRA 43466-1A, SECURITY FORCE
WEAPONS, PISTOLS.
66
108
108 M11 SERVICE PISTOL FUNDAMENTALS
WEAPONS, PISTOLS.
67
109
109 .38 CALIBER REVOLVER FUNDAMENTALS
WEAPONS, PISTOLS.
68
110
110 AN/M8 PYROTECHNIC FUNDAMENTALS
WEAPONS, PISTOLS.
69
111
111 M500 SHOTGUN FUNDAMENTALS
References:
Guidelines
[b] SW370-BB-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, Shotgun, 12 Gauge Mossberg 500A1
[c] TM 9-1005-338-13&P, Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual,
Mossberg 12-Gauge Shotgun, Model 500
[d] SW370-AQ-MMO-010 Maintenance Manual Naval Special Warfare Shotgun 12 Gauge
Mossberg 500A1
111 .1 Discuss the following M500 Shotgun Condition Codes. [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-9]
{2, 3, 4}
a. Condition 1
b. Condition 2
c. Condition 3
d. Condition 4
___________________________________
.2 Discuss the following M500 shotgun transports. [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-13 thru 4-14]
{2, 3, 4}
a. Strong Side Sling Arms
b. Weak Side Sling Arms
c. Cross Body Sling Arms
___________________________________
.3 Discuss the following M500 Shotgun Carries. [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-14] {2, 3, 4}
a. Tactical Carry
b. Alert Carry
c. Ready Carry
___________________________________
.4 Discuss the following M500 Shotgun Presentation from the following carries. [ref. a,
ch. 4, pg. 4-14 thru 4-15] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
70
111 M500 SHOTGUN FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
111 .5 Discuss the following M500 Shotgun range stoppage clearing procedures.
a. During a Practical Weapons Course [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-7 thru 3-8] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.6 Discuss the following M500 Shotgun stoppages and method/procedure for clearing:
[ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-3] {2, 3, 4}
a. Audible Pop/Reduced Recoil

b. New Round on Elevator
c. Weapon Out of Ammunition
d. Failure to Extract
e. Double Feed
f. Fore-end Fails to Pull to Rear
___________________________________
.7 Discuss the following M500 Shotgun specifications: {2, 3, 4}
a. Caliber [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]

b. Mechanism Type [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
c. Magazine Type [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
d. Magazine and Weapon Ammunition Capacity [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
e. Life Expectancy [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
f. Weight [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
g. Overall Length [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
h. Barrel Length [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
i. Muzzle Velocity [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
j. Maximum Range [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
k. Maximum Effective Range [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-3]
l. Safeties:
1. Safety Button [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 2-8]
___________________________________
.8 Discuss the following terms/procedures as they relate to M500 Shotgun safe

weapon movement: {2, 3, 4}
a. Show Clear Transfer [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-12]

b. Personnel Transferring Weapon Procedures [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-13]
c. Personnel Receiving Weapon Procedures [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-13]
___________________________________
71
111 .9 Discuss the following M500 Shotgun range handling commands and procedures:
{2, 3, 4}
a. Load [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-8 thru 4-9]

b. Make Ready [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-9 thru 4-10]
c. Fire [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-9 thru 4-10]
d. Cease Fire [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-9 thru 4-10]
e. Unload [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-9 thru 4-10]
f. Unload, Show Clear [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-9 thru 4-11]
___________________________________
.10 Discuss the following M500 Shotgun clearing barrel handling commands and
procedures: {2, 3, 4}

b. Unload [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-12]
c. Unload, Show Clear [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-12]
___________________________________
.11 Discuss M500 Shotgun Tactical/Combat Reload procedures. [ref. d, ch. 2, pg.8]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Discuss M500 Shotgun issue to recovery for armory (Includes weapons racks, and
ready service lockers). [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-16] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.13 Discuss M500 Shotgun maintenance procedures: {2, 3, 4}
a. Disassembly [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0014 00-1 thru 00-3]

b. Cleaning/Inspection [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0013 00-1 thru 00-2; 0015 00-1 thru
0016 00-1]
c. Assembly [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0015 00-3 thru 00-6]
d. Function Check [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0017 00-1]
___________________________________
72
111 .14 Discuss M500 Shotgun striking hard surface precautions. [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-7]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.15 Discuss M500 Shotgun pulling the trigger while trigger group is removed. [ref. b,
Preface, pg. iii] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
73
112
112 MP5 (SERIES) SUBMACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS
CHANGE-1 NOTE: THIS FUNDAMENTAL DELETED IN CHANGE-1. SEE SUMMARY OF
CHANGES.
74
113
113 M14 SERIES RIFLE (M14, M14A, M14 SSR, M21, MK14 EBR)
FUNDAMENTALS
References:
Guidelines
[b] TM 9-1005-223-20, Organizational Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and
Special Tools Lists, Rifle, 7.62-MM, M14, W/ E Rifle, 7.62-MM, M14A1, W/E and
Bipod, Rifle, M2
[c] TM 02648C-10/1, Operator’s Manual, Rifle, 7.62MM, M14 Designated Marksman Rifle
(DMR) W/E
[d] NAVEDTRA 14324, Gunner’s Mate
[e] SW370-A2-OPI-010 Operators Manual for Rifle, 7.62 MK14 Mod 0 Enhanced Battle
Rifle
101 .1 Discuss the following M14 Service Rifle Condition Codes. [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-8]
{2, 3, 4}
a. Condition 1
b. Condition 2
c. Condition 3
d. Condition 4
___________________________________
.2 Discuss the following M14 Service Rifle Transports. [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-13] {2, 3, 4}

___________________________________
.3 Discuss the following M14 Service Rifle Carries. [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-13 thru 5-14]
{2, 3, 4}
a. Tactical Carry
b. Alert Carry
c. Ready Carry
___________________________________
75
FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
113 .4 Discuss M14 Service Rifle modes of fire. [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.5 Discuss Presentation from the following M14 Service Rifle Carries. [ref. a, ch. 5,
pg. 5-14 thru 5-15] {2, 3, 4}

___________________________________
.6 Discuss the following M14 Service Rifle stoppages and clearing procedures. [ref. e,
ch. 3, pg. 3-8 thru 3-18] {2, 3, 4}
a. Failure to Load
b. Magazine Inserts with Difficulty
c. Magazine can’t Be Retained in Weapon
d. Audible Pop/Reduced Recoil
e. Failure to Feed
f. Failure to Chamber
g. Bolt Fails to Lock
h. Failure to Fire
i. Short Recoil
j. Fail to Unlock
k. Failure to Hold Bolt Rearward
l. Failure to Extract
m. Failure to Eject
___________________________________
.7 Discuss the following M14 Service Rifle specifications: {2, 3, 4}

76
113 .7 l. Safeties:
1. Safety Lever [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-4]
___________________________________
.8 Discuss the following terms/procedures as they relate to M14 Service Rifle safe
a. Personnel Transferring Weapon Procedures [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-12]

b. Personnel Receiving Weapon Procedures [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-12]
___________________________________
.9 Discuss the following M14 Service Rifle range handling commands and procedures:
{2, 3, 4}
a. Load [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-8]

b. Make Ready [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-9]
c. Load and Make Ready [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-9]
d. Fire [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-10]
e. Cease Fire [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-10]
f. Unload [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-10]
g. Unload, Show Clear [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-10 thru 5-11]
___________________________________
.10 Discuss the following M14 Service Rifle clearing barrel handling commands and
a. Load [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-11]

___________________________________
.11 Discuss M14 Service Rifle condition from issue to recovery. [ref. a, ch. 5, pg. 5-15]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
77
113 .12 Discuss M14 Service Rifle maintenance procedures: {2, 3, 4}
a. Disassembly [ref. c, ch. 3, pg. 3-29 thru 3-41]

b. Cleaning/Inspection [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-1 thru 4-22]
c. Assembly [ref. c, ch. 3, pg. 3-42 thru 3-52]
d. Function Check [ref. c, ch. 3, pg. 3-52]
___________________________________
.13 Discuss effects and response to chemical light puncture during use of line throwing
gun. [ref. d, ch. 3, pg. 3-25] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.14 Discuss M14 Service Rifle spindle valve position prior to firing the rifle. [ref. c, ch. 3,
pg. 3-7] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.15 State Cyclic rates of fire for the M14 Service Rifle. [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 1-12] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 Discuss M14 Service Rifle magazine loading procedures. [ref. c, ch. 3, pg. 3-2]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.17 Discuss Battle Sight Zero for the MK14 EBR. [ref. e ch. 2, pg. 2-17] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.18 Discuss Extending and Retracting the stock for MK14 EBR l. [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 2- 12]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
78
113 .19 Discuss Adjusting the Barrel Tensioning Screw MK14 EBR. [ref. e ch. 2, pg. 2-13]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.20 Discuss Removing the top cover from the MK14 EBR. [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-18 thru
3-19] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.21 Discuss Adjusting the Barrel Tensioning Screw MK14 EBR. [ref. e ch. 2, pg. 2-13]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
79
114
114 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE FUNDAMENTALS
References:
Guidelines
[b] SW 370-BUJ-OPl-010, Operator Manual, for Rifle, 5.66 MM, M16A2 W/E; Rifle, 5.56
MM, M16A3; Rifle, 5.56 MM, M16A4; Carbine, 5.56 MM, M4 W/E; Carbine, 5.56 MM,
M4A1
[c] TM 9-1005-249-10, Operator’s Manual, for Rifle, 5.56MM, M16 and M16A1
NOTE: THIS FUNDAMENTAL ALSO COVERS THE 727, M4, AND MK18 CARBINES.
101 .1 Discuss the following M16 (Series) Rifle Condition Codes. [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-9]
{2, 3, 4}
a. Condition 1
b. Condition 2
c. Condition 3
d. Condition 4
___________________________________
.2 Discuss the following M16 (Series) Rifle Transports. [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-15] {2, 3, 4}

___________________________________
.3 Discuss the following M16 (Series) Rifle Carries. [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-15 thru 6-16]
{2, 3, 4}
a. Tactical Carry
b. Alert Carry
c. Ready Carry
___________________________________
.4 Discuss M16 (Series) Rifle modes of fire. [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-6] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
80
114 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
114 .5 Discuss Presentation from the following M16 (Series) Rifle Carries. [ref. a, ch. 6,
pg. 6-16 thru 6-17] {2, 3, 4}

___________________________________
.6 Discuss the following M16 (Series) Rifle stoppages and clearing procedures. [ref. a,
ch. 6, pg. 6-5 thru 6-8] {2, 3, 4}
a. Failure to Load
b. Magazine Inserts with Difficulty
c. Magazine can’t Be Retained in Weapon
e. Failure to Feed
f. Failure to Chamber
g. Bolt Fails to Lock
h. Failure to Fire
i. Short Recoil
j. Fail to Unlock
k. Failure to Hold Bolt Rearward
l. Failure to Extract
m. Failure to Eject
___________________________________
.7 Discuss the following M16 (Series) Rifle specifications: {2, 3, 4}

f. Weight [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-3 and 6-6]
h. Barrel Length [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-3 and 6-6]
i. Muzzle Velocity [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-3 and 6-6]
k. Maximum Effective Range [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-3 and 6-6]
l. Safeties:
1. Selector Lever [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-5]
___________________________________
81
114 .8 Discuss the following terms/procedures as they relate to M16 (Series) Rifle safe

b. Personnel Receiving Weapon Procedures [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-15]
___________________________________
.9 Discuss the following M16 (Series) Rifle range handling commands and procedures:
{2, 3, 4}
a. Load [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-9 and 6-10]
c. Load and Make Ready [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-10 thru 6-11]
d. Fire [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-11]
e. Cease Fire [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-11]
f. Unload [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-11 thru 6-12]
g. Unload, Show Clear [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-12]
___________________________________
.10 Discuss the following M16 (Series) Rifle clearing barrel handling commands and
a. Load [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-13]
___________________________________
.11 Discuss M16 (Series) Rifle condition from issue to recovery. [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-17]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Discuss M16 (Series) Rifle maintenance procedures: {2, 3, 4}
a. Disassembly [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 0013 00-1 thru 00-11]

b. Cleaning/Inspection [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 0014 00-1 thru 00-14; 0015 00-0 thru
00-5; 0016 00-1 thru 00-11]
c. Assembly [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 0017 00-1 thru 00-16]
d. Function Check [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0010 00-1 thru 00-4]
___________________________________
82
114 .13 State Cyclic rates of fire for the M16 (Series) Rifle. [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 6-3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.14 State precautions concerning the M16 (Series) Rifle Bolt Group cam pin. [ref. c,
Preface, pg. c] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.15 State amount of continuous rapid fired rounds which can cause a cook-off in the
M16 (Series) Rifle. [ref. c, Preface, pg. c] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 State round chambering caused by dropping or jarring the M16 (Series) Rifle. ref. b,
ch. 2, pg. 0008 00-4] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.17 Discuss the M16 Series Rifle magazine loading procedures. [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 00008
00-23] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
83
115
115 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER FUNDAMENTALS
References:
Guidelines
[b] SW 370-AE-MMI-010, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair
Parts and Special Tools List for Launcher, Grenade, 40MM, M203 W/E; Launcher,
Grenade, 40MM, M203A1 W/E; Launcher, Grenade, 40MM, M203A2 W/E
[c] SW370-AE-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, for Launcher, Grenade, 40MM, M203;
Launcher, Grenade, 40MM, M203A1
________________________ ____________________
115 .1 Discuss the following M203 Grenade Launcher Condition Codes.
[ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-5] {2, 3, 4}
a. Condition 1
b. Condition 2
c. Condition 3
d. Condition 4
___________________________________
.2 Discuss M203 Grenade Launcher stoppages and clearing procedures. [ref. a, ch. 7,
pg. 7-2 thru 7-4] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.3 Discuss the following M203 Grenade Launcher specifications: {2, 3, 4}

c. Weapon Ammunition Capacity [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-3]
d. Life Expectancy [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-3]
e. Weight [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-3]
f. Overall Length [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-3]
g. Barrel Length [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-3]
h. Muzzle Velocity [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-3]
i. Maximum Range [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-3]
j. Maximum Effective Range [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-3]
k. Minimum Safe Range [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-3]
l. Safeties:
1. Manual Switch [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-3]
___________________________________
84
115 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
115 .4 Discuss the following terms/procedures as they relate to M203 Grenade Launcher
safe weapon movement: {2, 3, 4}

b. Personal Receiving Weapon Procedures [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-8]
___________________________________
.5 Discuss the following M203 Grenade Launcher handling commands and

a. Load [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-6]

b. Fire [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-6]
c. Cease Fire [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-6]
d. Unload [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-6]
e. Unload, Show Clear [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-7]
___________________________________
.6 Discuss the condition codes which a M203 Grenade Launcher can be issue from/to
the armory. [ref. a, ch. 7, pg. 7-11] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.7 State range hearing protection requirements for M203 Grenade Launcher firing.
[ref. c, Preface, pg. d] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 Discuss M203 Grenade Launcher maintenance procedures: {2, 3, 4}
a. Disassembly [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 2-15 thru 2-22]

b. Cleaning/Inspection [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 2-22 thru 2-23, 2-33 thru 2-37]
c. Assembly [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 2-23 thru 2-30]
d. Function Check [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 0020 00-1 thru 00-17]
___________________________________
.10 Discuss the possible results of M203 Grenade Launcher sear failure. [ref. c,
Preface, pg. b] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
85
115 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
115 .10 Discuss the following M203 Grenade Launcher safety considerations: [ref. a, ch. 7,
pg. 7-7] {2, 3, 4}
a. Carrying weapon in the open position

b. Danger Radius
c. Protected Positions
d. Squeezing trigger during safety removal
e. Firing Canopy Smoke Signals
___________________________________
.11 Discuss potential fatality issues associated with the M203 Grenade Launcher LTL
rounds. [ref. c, Preface, pg. d] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
86
116
116 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER FUNDAMENTALS
CHANGES.
87
117
117 GRENADE FUNDAMENTALS
References:
Guidelines
[b] Army Field Manual 3-23.30, Grenades and Pyrotechnic Signals
[c] OP 3833, Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Grenades
[d] SW010-AD-GTP-010, Technical Manual, Small Arms and Special Warfare Ammunition
[e] TM 43-0001-29, Technical Manual, Army Ammunition Data Sheets, for, Grenades
[f] NWP 3-07.31, Multiservice Procedures for the Tactical Employment of Non-lethal
Weapons
[g] NTTP 3-07.3.2, Tactical Employment of Non-lethal Weapons
[h] SW073-AC-MMA-010, Miscellaneous Chemical Munitions
[i] SW010-AF-ORD-010, Identification of Ammunition
[j] NTTP 3-07.2.1, Antiterrorism/Force Protection
117 .1 Discuss the purpose of the following types of grenades. [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]
a. Fragmentation {3, 4}
b. Illuminating {2, 3, 4}
c. Chemical {3, 4}
d. Offensive {3, 4}
e. Practice and Training {2, 3, 4}
f. Non-lethal (Diversionary) {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.2 Discuss the following components and mechanical functioning of grenades. [ref. b,

ch. 1, pg. 1-2] {2, 3, 4}
a. Body
b. Filler
c. Fuse Assembly
d. Removal Safety Clip and Safety Pin.
e. Release of pressure on Lever
___________________________________
.3 Discuss grenade gripping procedure for right and left handed personnel. [ref. b,
ch. 3, pg. 3-3 thru 3-4] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
89
117 GRENADE FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
117 .4 Discuss the following capabilities MK 12 Grenade Inert. {2, 3, 4}
a. Average person throwing distance (Same as MK3A2) [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-15]
b. Intended Use [ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-27]
c. Color and Markings [ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-27; ref. i, ch. 1, pg. 1-4]
___________________________________
.5 Discuss the following capabilities MK 3A2 Grenade Hand Offensive. {2, 3, 4}
a. Casualty Radius [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-15]

b. Traveling Fragment Distance [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-15]
c. Grenade Type [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-15]
d. Shock Wave in Water [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-1]
e. Color and Markings [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-15]
f. Throwing distance from hull of a ship [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-5]
g. Delay after lever release [ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 1-9]
___________________________________
.6 Discuss the following capabilities Charge, Diversionary, Mk 141 Mod 0. {2, 3, 4}
a. Intended Use [ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-9]

b. Affects [ref. g, app b, pg. B-10]
c. Traveling Shrapnel Distance [ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-9]
d. Grenade Type [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]
e. Color and Markings [ref. g, app b, pg. B-10]
f. Delay after lever release [ref. g, app b, pg. B-10]
___________________________________
.7 Discuss the following capabilities Grenade, Riot Control, CS1, ABC-M25A2:{2, 3, 4}

a. Intended Use [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 2-51]
b. Affects [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 2-51]
c. Grenade Type [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 2-51]
d. Color and Markings [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 2-51]
e. Delay after lever release [ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 1-9]
___________________________________
.8 Discuss grenade employment rules. [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-12] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
90
117 .9 Discuss the following capabilities Fragmentation, Mk 67 Mod 0. {2, 3, 4}
a. Intended Use [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]

b. Affects [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]
c. Traveling Shrapnel Distance [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-7]
d. Grenade Type [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]
e. Color and Markings [ref. b, ch.1, pg. 1-6]
f. Delay after lever release [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-3]
.10 Discuss the following types of Fuzes: [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-3 thru 1-4] {2, 3, 4}
a. Detonating
b. Igniting
___________________________________
.11 Discuss the following capabilities Grenade, Hand, Riot Control, CS, XM 47E3 (M47):
{2, 3, 4}
a. Intended Use [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-11]

b. Affects [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-12]
c. Grenade Type [ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-17]
d. Color and Markings [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-12]
e. Delay after lever release [ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 1-4]
___________________________________
.12 Discuss the following capabilities Grenade, Hand, Riot Control, CS, M7A2 and
M7A3: {2, 3, 4}
a. Grenade Type [ref. b, ch.1, pg. 1-10]

b. Affects [ref. b, ch.1, pg. 1-11]
c. Color and Markings [ref. b, ch.1, pg. 1-11]
d. Burn Time [ref. h, ch.6, pg. 6-16]
e. Safe Personnel Distance [ref. h, ch.6, pg. 6-16]
f. Delay after lever release [ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 1-9]
___________________________________
.13 Discuss grenade employment under adverse conditions. [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-22]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
91
117 .14 Discuss the following capabilities Grenade, Rubber Ball, Non-lethal, GG04:{2, 3, 4}
a. Disbursement Pattern [ref. g, app. b, pg. B-6]

d. Color and Markings [ref. g, app. b, pg. B-6]
e. Delay after lever release [ref. g, app. b, pg. B-6]
___________________________________
.15 Discuss the following capabilities Grenade, Practice, Non-Lethal, GG05: [ref. d]
{2, 3, 4}
a. Number of times reusable [ref. g, app. b, pg. B-7]
d. Color and Markings [ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-41]
e. Delay after lever release [ref. g, app. b, pg. B-7]
___________________________________
.16 Discuss the following capabilities Grenade, M84 Stun. {2, 3, 4}

a. Affects and Radius [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-17]
b. Grenade Type [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]
c. Color and markings [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]
d. Delay after lever release [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-17]
___________________________________
.17 Discuss the following as they relate to grenade Maintenance: {2, 3, 4}

a. Inspection
b. Newly Issued [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 2-1]
c. Packed or Stored [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 2-1]
d. Cleaning [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 2-2]
e. Lubrication [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 2-2]
f. Preventive Maintenance [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 2-2]
g. Unpackaging [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-3; ref. c, ch. 2, 3, pg. 3-1]
___________________________________
.18 Discuss general grenade safety precautions. [ref. b, app. b, pg. B-1; ref. c, ch. 2,
pg. 2-2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
92
117 .19 Discuss the following terms concerned with storing of grenades in ammunition
pouches: [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-1] {2, 3, 4}
a. Fuse Tightness [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-1]

b. Broken Safety Lever [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-2]
c. Bending Safety Pins [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-2]
d. Carrying in Vest or Pouch. [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-2 thru 3-3]
e. Suspension of Grenade by Safety Pin/Clip [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-2]
___________________________________
.20 Discuss the following grenade throwing procedures: {2, 3, 4}

a. Employment [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-4 thru 3-5]
b. Throwing Positions: [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-5]
c. Standing [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-5 thru 3-6]
d. Prone-to-Standing [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-6 thru 3-7]
e. Kneeling [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-7 thru 3-8]
f. Prone-to-Kneeling [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 3-8 thru 3-10]
g. Pull and Drop [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-5]
___________________________________
.21 Discuss the following terms employment of NLW Grenades: {2, 3, 4}
a. Munitions that Cause Discomfort/Incapacitate [ref. f, ch. V, pg. V-1]

b. Munitions that Inflict Trauma [ref. f, ch. V, pg. V-1]
___________________________________
.22 Discuss weather effects on chemical grenades. [ref. h, ch. 6, pg. 6-1] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.23 Discuss CS grenade decontamination. [ref. h, ch. 4, pg. 4-3; ch. 5, pg. 5-11 thru
5-13] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.24 Discuss gas mask and protective equipment required for use with CS grenades.
[ref. h, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
93
117 .25 Discuss wearing of contact lenses during use with of CS grenades. [ref. h, ch. 2,
pg. 2-2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.26 Discuss exposure of chemical grenades to heat or direct sunrays. [ref. h, ch. 2,
pg. 2-2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.27 State the wait period for approaching a misfired CS grenade. [ref. h, ch. 2, pg. 2-2]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.28 Discuss the purpose of identifying a riot grenade as burning or bursting. [ref. h,
ch. 2, pg. 2-3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.29 State the distance a bursting grenade should be thrown. [ref. h, ch. 2, pg. 2-3]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.30 State the distance a burning grenade shall be thrown away from friendly forces.
[ref. h, ch. 2, pg. 2-3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.31 State the reason for avoiding hitting obstacles while throwing grenades. [ref. h,
ch. 2, pg. 2-3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.32 State the grenadier relation to wind and the chemical cloud and rioters. [ref. h, ch. 2,
pg. 2-3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
94
117 .33 Discuss the requirement for removal of employed grenades from operational and
training areas. [ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 1-14] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.34 Discuss the procedures if a MK3A2 grenade is dropped after safety pin and clip are
removed.
a. Ashore [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 2-1] {2, 3, 4}
b. Afloat [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-6{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.35 Discuss throwing or kicking a grenade into sump or ditch. [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 2-1]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.36 Discuss the procedures if an M7A2, M7A3, ABC-M25A2, M84 grenades are
dropped after safety pin and clip are removed. [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 2-1] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.37 Discuss releasing (also known as milking) the safety lever/handle prior to throwing a
grenade. [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 2-1] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.38 Discuss the following terms as they relate to use of the M84 Stun Grenade. [ref. c,
ch. 2, pg. 2-1] {2, 3, 4}
a. Hearing/Eye Protection
b. Throwing at glass or windows
c. Usage
d. Human Targets
___________________________________
.39 Discuss hangfire risk associated with the XM 47E3 Riot Control Grenade, [ref. c,
ch. 1, pg. 1-13] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
95
117 .40 Discuss Grenade deployment commands:
a. Afloat: [ref. i, ch. 7, pg. 7-25] {2, 3, 4}

1. Grenadier Up
2. Stand by for a (Select Number) Grenade Pattern
3. Assume Position/In Position
4. Remove Safety/Safety Removed
5. Pull Pin/Pin Pulled
6. Deploy Grenade
7. Grenade # Away
b. Ashore: [ref. b]
1. Throw [app. A, pg. A-4]
2. Clear, All Clear [ch. 4, pg. 4-8]
3. All Down [ch. 4, pg. 4-10]
___________________________________
.41 State the distance an average person can throw a grenade. [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-15]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
96
118
118 MK46 MOD 0 LIGHT MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS
CHANGES.
97
119
119 M240 (B/N) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS
References:
Guidelines
[b] SW360-AH-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, Machine Gun, 7.62MM, M240 Series
[c] SW010-AD-GTP-010, Technical Manual, Small Arms and Special Warfare Ammunition
[d] SW360-AH-OMP-010, Technical Manual Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual
(Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for M240 Series Machine Guns
[e] FM 3-22.68, Crew-Served Machine Guns, 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm
[f] SW300-BC-SAF-010, Clearing Live Ammunition from Guns
[g] MCWP 3-15.1, Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery
NOTE: THIS FUNDAMENTAL ALSO COVERS THE M240 SERIES MEDIUM MACHINE GUNS.
119 .1 Discuss the following M240 Medium Machine Gun Condition Codes. [ref. a, ch. 10,
pg. 10-9] {2, 3, 4}
a. Condition 1
b. Condition 2
c. Condition 3
d. Condition 4
___________________________________
.2 Discuss the following M240 Medium Machine Gun firing positions: [ref. g, ch. 3, 3-
27 thru 3-34] {2, 3, 4}
a. Flex Mount
b. Prone (Bipod/Tripod steadied) [ref. e, ch. 4, pg. 4-5 thru 4-8] {2, 3, 4}
c. Fighting (Bipod/Tripod steadied) [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 4-5 thru 4-8] {2, 3, 4}
d. Underarm [ref. e, ch. 5, pg. 5-35] {3, 4}
e. Hip [ref. e, ch. 5, pg. 5-36] {3, 4}
f. Tactical vehicle (HMMWV) [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 1-35] {3, 4}
g. Waterborne vessel/Security boat [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 1-35] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.3 Discuss the M240 Medium Machine Gun Bipod positioning and stowage: [ref. b,
ch. 2, pg. 0011 00-2 thru 00-3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
99
119 M240 (B/N) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
119 .4 Discuss sights and zeroing the M240 Medium Machine Gun. [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-
57 thru 3-61] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.5 Discuss the following M240 Medium Machine Gun specifications: {2, 3, 4}

d. Weapon Ammunition Capacity [ref. a, ch. 10, pg. 10-3]
f. Weight [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-15]
1. Area: [ref. a, ch. 10, pg. 10-3]
(a) Tripod [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-17]
(b) Bipod [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-17]
(c) Point: [ref. a, ch. 10, pg. 10-3]
2. Tripod [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-17]
3. Bipod [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-17]
4. Suppression [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-2]
l. Maximum extent of grazing fire obtainable over uniformly sloping terrain
[ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-2]
m. Height on tripod [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-2]
n. Rate of Fire:
1. Cyclic [ref. a, ch. 10, pg. 10-3]
2. Cyclic with Hydraulic Buffer [ref. a, ch. 10, pg. 10-3]
3. Sustained [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-16]
4. Rapid [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-16]
o. Safety [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0009 00-1]
___________________________________
.6 Discuss M240 Medium Machine Gun maintenance procedures: {2, 3, 4}

b. Cleaning/Inspection [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 0022 00-1 thru 00-27]
___________________________________
100
119 .7 State tracer burnout distance. [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-17] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 Discuss the following M240 Medium Machine Gun handling commands and

b. Make Ready [ref. a, ch. 10, pg. 10-8 thru 10-9]
c. Condition One Load [ref. a, ch. 10, pg. 10-9 thru 10-10]
d. Fire [ref. a, ch. 10, pg. 10-9 thru 10-10]
e. Cease Fire [ref. a, ch. 10, pg. 10-9 thru 10-10]
f. Unload [ref. a, ch. 10, pg. 10-9 thru 10-10]
g. Unload, Show Clear (Condition 1 and Condition 3) [ref. a, ch. 10, pg. 10-9 thru
10-11]
___________________________________
.9 Discuss the following M240 Medium Machine Gun malfunctions/stoppages: {2, 3, 4}
a. Immediate/Remedial Action [ref. a, ch. 10, pg. 10-6 thru 10-7]

b. Stuck Cartridge Case or Live Round [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0016 00-1 thru 00-4]
c. Runaway Machine Gun [ref. a, ch. 10, pg. 10-5 thru 10-6]
d. Failure to Fire [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 0019 00-2 thru 00-3, 00-14 thru 00-15]
e. Sluggish Operation [ref. a, ch. 10, pg. 10-5]
f. Failure to Chamber [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 0019 00-10 thru 00-13]
g. Failure to Feed [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 0019 00-4 thru 00-6]
h. Failure to Extract [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 0019 00-16 thru 00-17]
i. Failure to Eject [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 0019 00-17 thru 00-18]
k. Failure to Cock [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 0019 00-18 thru 00-20]
l. Failure to Lock [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-38]
n. Ruptured Case [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0017 00-1 thru 00-2]
___________________________________
.10 Discuss M240 Medium Machine Gun condition from issue to recovery. [ref. a,
ch. 10, pg. 10-9 thru 10-11] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
101
119 .11 Discuss M240 Medium Machine Gun barrel change requirements during sustained
and rapid fire. [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-16] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Discuss M240 Medium Machine Gun multiple gas settings as it relates to the
following terms: [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0008 00-1 thru 00-2] {2, 3, 4}
a. Standard Setting
b. Combat or Weather Settings
c. Hydraulic/Compression Buffer Model
d. Rounds per minute by Setting
e. Blank Firing Setting
___________________________________
.13 Discuss the application of lubricant and solvents to rubber/composite components.

[ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 0022 00-1] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.14 Discuss position (Clicks) and locking of barrel prior to firing. [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 0023
00-5] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.15 Discuss the adjustment of sights and the variant in front sights. [ref. b, ch. 4,
pg. 0026 00-1 thru 00-7] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 Discuss the purpose and installment of the discriminator. [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 0034 00-
8] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.17 Discuss the position the safety must be in with the bolt in the forward position.
[ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0009 00-1] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
102
119 .18 Discuss the position of first round and links during loading. [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0009
00-4] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.19 State requirements/restrictions when firing from HMMWV. [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 0032 00-
1] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.20 State hearing protection requirements for firing the M240 Medium Machine Gun
during training. [ref. b, Preface, pg. c] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.21 Discuss the following terms as they relate to the clearing of live ammunition from the
M240 Medium Machine Gun: {2, 3, 4}
a. General Requirements [ref. f, ch. 2, pg. 2-2]

b. Hot Gun/Cold Gun [ref. f, ch. 2, pg. 2-2 thru 2-3]
c. Immediate Action for Misfire [ref. f, ch. 2, pg. 2-2]
___________________________________
.22 State gaging and barrel tagging requirements upon receipt of the M240 Medium
Machine Gun. [ref. d, ch. 3, pg. 0008 00-1] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.23 Discuss barrel disposition if the primary or spare are damaged. [ref. d, ch. 3,
pg. 0008 00-4] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.24 State the possible outcomes of the bolt not being forward during disassembly.
[ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-11] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
103
119 .25 State the loaded condition and bolt position during tactical situations and normal
training. [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-29] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.26 State the wait time for immediate/remedial action on the M240 Medium Machine
Gun during combat. [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-39] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.27 Discuss jammed cocking handle procedures. [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-40 thru 3-41]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.28 State how the BFA should be checked during firing. [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-8 thru 3-9]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.29 State the safety procedures changing a hot barrel [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0016 00-2]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.30 Discuss exchanging parts or assemblies from one weapon to another. [ref. b,
Preface, pg. a] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
104
120
120 M60 (SERIES) MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS
CHANGES.
105
121
121 M-2 .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS
References:
Guidelines
[b] SW361-AB-MMO-010, Operator’s Manual, Machine Guns, Caliber .50; M2, Heavy
Barrel
[c] TM 9-1005-314-12&P, Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual (Including
Repair Parts and Special Tools List), Blank Firing Attachment (BFA) M19 for CAL. .50
M2 Heavy Barrel Machine Gun
[d] SW300-BC-SAF-010, Clearing Live Ammunition from Guns
[e] FM 23-65, Browning Machine Gun Caliber .50 HB, M2
[f] TM 9-l 005-203-l 2&P, Recoil Amplifier M3
[g] SW300-AC-OPI-010, Users Manual for Gun Mount, MK 95 MOD 0 with Machine Gun,
Caliber .50 M2, Heavy Barrel and Gun Mount, MK 95 MOD 1 with Machine Gun,
Caliber .50 M2, Heavy Barrel
[h] MCWP 3-15.1, Machine Guns and Machine Gunnery
121 .1 Discuss the following M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Condition Codes. [ref. a,
ch. 11, pg. 11-8] {2, 3, 4}
a. Condition 1
b. Condition 2
c. Condition 3
d. Condition 4
___________________________________
.2 State hot gun procedures for the M2HB. [ref. d, ch. 2, pg. 2-3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.3 State cover position when bolt is held rearward. [ref. b, Preface, pg. g] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.4 Discuss Field Zeroing the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun. [ref. e, ch. 5, pg. 5-
38] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
107
121 M-2 .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
121 .5 Discuss the following M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun specifications: {2, 3, 4}

d. Life Expectancy [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-3]
e. Weight [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-3]
f. Overall Length [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-3]
g. Barrel Length [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-3]
h. Muzzle Velocity [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-3]
i. Maximum Range [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-3]
j. Maximum Effective Range [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-3]
k. Area: [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 1-7]
l. Point: [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 1-7]
m. Rate of Fire:
1. Cyclic [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-5]
2. Single [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-3]
3. Slow [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-3]
4. Dual Mount [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-1]
5. Rapid [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-3]
n. Safety [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-3]
___________________________________
.6 Discuss the following M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun handling commands and
procedures: {1, 2, 3, 4}

b. Make Ready [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-9
c. Fire [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-9]
d. Cease Fire [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-9]
___________________________________
.7 State the weapon action when bolt latch release and trigger are both held down on
the flex M2. [ref. b, Preface, pg. a] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 State tracer burnout (meter trace) distance. [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 1-18] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
108
121 .9 Discuss the following M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun stoppages. {2, 3, 4}
a. Immediate Action (Hot and Cold Weapon) [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-7]
b. Stuck/Ruptured Cartridge Case or Live Round [ref. c, sect. 2, pg. 2-32 thru
2-35]
c. Failure to Fire [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-6]
d. Sluggish Operation [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-5]
e. Failure to Chamber [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-5]
f. Double Feed [ref. c, sect. 3, pg. 3-3 and 3-5]
g. Failure to Feed [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-6]
h. Failure to Extract [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-6]
i. Failure to Eject [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-6]
j. Failure to Cock [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-5]
k. Failure to Lock [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-5]
l. Failure to Unlock [ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-7]
m. Cookoff [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0009 00-5]
n. Misfire [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0009 00-4]
o. Casehead separation [ref. e, ch. 4, pg. 4-3, 4-4]
___________________________________
.10 Discuss M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun maintenance procedures: {2, 3, 4}
b. Cleaning/Inspection [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 0025 00-1 thru 0032 00-7]
___________________________________
.11 Discuss zeroing the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun with NV Device. [ref. e,
ch. 5, pg. 5-40] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Discuss M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun condition from issue to recovery.
[ref. a, ch. 11, pg. 11-10] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.13 State the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Bolt Latch position during single shot
and automatic modes. [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
109
121 .14 Discuss discriminator use in conjunction with the M3 Amplifier during utilization of
Short Range Training Ammunition. [ref. f, Preface, pg. c] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.15 State ammunition allowed for use with the M3 Amplifier and possible outcomes from
use of unauthorized ammunition. [ref. f, Preface, pg. c; ch. 4, pg. 4-1 thru 4-3]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 State safe distance personnel must be from MG muzzle during use of M2 Short
Range Training Ammunition. [ref. f, Preface, pg. d] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.17 Discuss M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Range Card use. [ref. a, ch. 11,
pg. 11-10] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.18 State when headspace and timing should be checked and adjusted. [ref. b, Preface,
pg. a] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.19 State headspace and timing requirement periodicity when using the M3 Recoil
Amplifier. [ref. f, Preface, pg. d] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.20 State hearing protection requirement when firing the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine
Gun including training. [ref. f, Preface, pg. d; ref. c, ch. Preface] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.21 State ventilation requirements when firing the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun
with M3 from an Enclosure. [ref. f, Preface, pg. e] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
110
121 .22 State cartridge guide installation requirements when using the BFA. [ref. c,
ch. Preface] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.23 State minimum and maximum degrees Fahrenheit the weapon should be fired in.
[ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 2-3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.24 Discuss weapons installment for correct charging when using MK 95 dual mount.
[ref. g, ch. 2, pg. 2-4] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.25 Discuss ammunition links for right and left handed feeds when using MK 95 dual
mount. [ref. g, ch. 2, pg. 2-5] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.26 State positioning of feed chutes when using MK 95 dual mount. [ref. g, ch. 3,
pg. 3-8] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.27 State the possible effects of early and late timing on the M2. [ref. g, ch. 5, pg. 5-3]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.28 State the possible effects improper head space. [ref. h, ch. 2, pg. 4-26] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.29 Discuss M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun headspace and timing procedures.
[ref. g, ch. 7, pg. 7-1 thru 7-4] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
111
121 .30 Discuss the following terms as they relate to the clearing of live ammunition from the
M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun: {2, 3, 4}
a. General Requirements [ref. d, ch. 2, pg. 2-3]

b. Hot Gun/Cold Gun [ref. d, ch. 2, pg. 2-3 thru 2-4]
c. Immediate Action for Misfire [ref. d, ch. 2, pg. 2-3]
d. Bolt Position:
1. Fully Closed [ref. d, ch. 2, pg. 2-4]
2. Partially Open [ref. d, ch. 2, pg. 2-3 thru 2-4]
___________________________________
.31 Discuss the following firing positions for the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun:
{2, 3, 4}
a. Prone [ref. e, ch. 5, pg. 5-3]

b. Sitting [ref. e, ch. 5, pg. 5-3 thru 5-4]
c. Standing [ref. e, ch. 5, pg. 5-4 thru 5-6]
___________________________________
.32 Discuss classes of fire in respect to the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun. [ref. e,
ch. 6, pg. 6-6 thru 6-7] {2, 3, 4}
a. Fixed
b. Traversing
c. Searching
d. Traversing and Searching
e. Swinging Traverse
f. Free gun
___________________________________
112
122
122 MK19 MOD 3 GRENADE MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS
References:
Guidelines
[b] SW 363-C3-MMM-010, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Machine Gun, 40MM,
MK19, MOD 3
[c] SW300-BC-SAF-010, Clearing Live Ammunition from Guns
[d] FM 3-22.27, MK 19, 40-MM Grenade Machine Gun, Mod 3
122 .1 Discuss the following MK19 Mod 3 Grenade Machine Gun Condition Codes. [ref. a,
ch. 12, pg. 12-10] {2, 3, 4}
a. Condition 1
b. Condition 2
c. Condition 3
d. Condition 4
___________________________________
.2 Discuss the following MK19 Mod 3 Grenade Machine Gun firing positions: [ref. d,
ch. 4, pg. 4-1 thru 4-3] {2, 3, 4}
a. Sitting
b. Standing
c. Kneeling
___________________________________
.3 Discuss the following terms in relation to MK19 Mod 3 Grenade Machine Gun
ammunition: [ref. b, Preface, pgs. a and g] {2, 3, 4}
a. Handling/Approaching a DUD
b. Catching Dropped/Ejected Live Round
___________________________________
.4 Discuss tightening of the flash suppressor [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
113
122 MK19 MOD 3 GRENADE MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
122 .5 Discuss the following MK19 Mod 3 Grenade Machine Gun specifications: {2, 3, 4}

d. Weapon Ammunition Capacity [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-3]
j. Maximum Range [ref. d, ch. 1, pg. 1-7]
k. Maximum Effective Range
1. Area: [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-3]
2. Point: [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-3]
l. Rate of Fire:
1. Cyclic [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-3]
2. Sustained [ref. d, ch. 1, pg. 1-7]
3. Rapid [ref. d, ch. 1, pg. 1-7]
m. Safety [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-3]
___________________________________
.6 Discuss the following MK19 Mod 3 Grenade Machine Gun handling commands and

c. Fire [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-11]
d. Cease Fire [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-11]
___________________________________
.7 State aperature setting when rear sight is returned to down and locked. [ref. b, ch. 2,
pg. 0005 00-23] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 State the purpose of the battle sight. [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-23] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
114
122 .9 Discuss Field Zeroing the MK19 Mod 3 Grenade Machine Gun. [ref. d, ch. 4,
pg. 4-23 thru 4-24] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 Discuss the preferred method for checking for bore obstruction and use of the
obstruction detector. [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 0014 00-14] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.11 Discuss the following MK19 Mod 3 Grenade Machine Gun stoppages. {2, 3, 4}
a. Immediate Action [ref. d, app. c, pg. c-1 thru c-4]

b. Runaway Machine Gun [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-6]
c. Sluggish Operation/Erratic Fire [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-7]
d. Bolt Jammed [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-3 thru 12-5]
e. Bore Obstruction [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-5]
f. Gun Fires to Soon [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-6]
g. Short Recoil [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-6 thru 12-7]
h. Top Will Not Close [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-8]
i. Misfire [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-8 thru 12-9]
j. Bad Ammunition [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-9]
k. Ammunition Feeder Jam [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-9]
l. Bad Firing Pin [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-9]
___________________________________
.12 Discuss MK19 Mod 3 Grenade Machine Gun maintenance procedures: {2, 3, 4}

b. Cleaning/Inspection [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 0012 00-1 thru 00-35]
___________________________________
.13 State the required ammunition links for use with MK19 Mod 3 Grenade Machine
Gun. [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 0014 00-4] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
115
122 .14 Discuss MK19 Mod 3 Grenade Machine Gun condition from issue to recovery.
[ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-12] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.15 State distance non-essential personnel and ammunition must be rear of the MK19
Mod 3 Grenade Machine Gun. [ref. b, Preface, pg. b] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 Discuss bolt jam and the top cover being open on the MK19 Mod 3 Grenade
Machine Gun. [ref. b, Preface, pg. b] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.17 State bolt position before removing backplate pin assembly. [ref. b, Preface, pg. d]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.18 Discuss use of bayonet for round/case removal. [ref. b, Preface, pg. d] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.19 Discuss firing from Enclosures during training. [ref. b, Preface, pg. d] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.20 State lifting requirements for M548 Ammunition Container and the MK19 Mod 3
Grenade Machine Gun. [ref. b, Preface, pg. d] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.21 Discuss the clearing of live ammunition from the MK19 Mod 3 Grenade Machine
Gun. [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 2-22 thru 2-24] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
116
122 .22 Discuss personnel PPE requirements and safe firing distance when firing the MK19
Mod 3 Grenade Machine Gun: [ref. b, Preface, pg. a ] {2, 3, 4}
a. Firing HE
b. Within 20 Meters of firing area
c. Wearing of sleeves and gloves
___________________________________
.23 Discuss breaking of the ammo belt during runaway gun. [ref. b, Preface, pg. e]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.24 State minimum target distance when firing HE rounds during training and combat
and associated fragmentation distance. [ref. b, Preface, pg. e] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.25 State requirements/restrictions when firing from HMMWV. [ref. b, Preface, pg. f]
{3, 4}
___________________________________
.26 State authorized lubricants for the MK19 Mod 3 Grenade Machine Gun. [ref. b,
Preface, pg. h] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.27 State the position of the charging handles in order for weapon to fire. [ref. a, ch. 12,
pg. 12-8] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.28 Discuss use of combat clearing procedures during peacetime/training. [ref. a, ch. 12,
pg. 12-9] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
117
122 .29 Discuss the process for use of cycled ammunition. [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-9] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.30 State the three danger signals when firing HE/TP ammunition. [ref. a, ch. 12, pg. 12-
7] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
118
123
123 MK38 MOD 1 25MM MACHINE GUN FUNDAMENTALS
CHANGES.
119
124
124 MK 44 MOD 0/1, GUN WEAPON SYSTEM FUNDAMENTALS
CHANGES.
121
125
125 40MM SALUTING MOUNT FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] SW363-AO-MMO-010, Technical Manual, 40mm Saluting Mount MK 11 MODS 0-2
125 .1 Discuss the following 40MM Saluting Mount specifications:

b. Weapon Ammunition Capacity [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-3]
c. Weight [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-9]
d. Train Angle [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-9]
e. Elevation Angle [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-9]
f. Overall Height [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-9]
g. Working Circle Radius [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]
h. Safety Plug [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]
___________________________________
.2 Discuss the following 40MM Saluting Mount terms and procedures:
a. Cast Loose [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1]

b. Training the Mount [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1]
c. Loading [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-2]
___________________________________
.3 Discuss the following 40MM Saluting Mount handling commands and operations:
a. Standby [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-3]

b. Fire [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-3 and 2-4]
c. Cease Fire [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-3]
d. Secure [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-5]
___________________________________
.4 Discuss the 40MM Saluting Mount misfire procedures. [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-4]
___________________________________
123
125 40MM SALUTING MOUNT FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
125 .5 State the position for personnel firing the 40MM Saluting Mount and distance
personnel must be away from muzzle. [ref. a, Preface, pg. vii]
___________________________________
.6 State the hearing and eye protection required when firing the 40MM Saluting Mount.
[ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1]
___________________________________
.7 Discuss non-operating personnel when firing the 40MM Saluting Mount. [ref. a,
ch. 2, pg. 2-1]
___________________________________
.8 Discuss saluting round handling safety. [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1]
___________________________________
.9 State blowback dangers when firing the 40MM Saluting Mount. [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1]
___________________________________
.10 State restriction of firing alongside another vessel or inhabited area. [ref. a, ch. 2,
pg. 2-5]
___________________________________
.11 State the requirement for checking the safety plug. [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-5]
___________________________________
124
126
126 M107 LONG RANGE SNIPER RIFLE FUNDAMENTALS
References:
126 .1 Discuss the following M107 Service Rifle stoppages and clearing procedures. [ref. b,
ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-1 thru 0005 00-3/4] {3, 4}
a. Failure to Feed
b. Failure to Chamber
c. Failure to Cock
d. Failure to Lock or Unlock
e. Failure to Fire
f. Failure to Extract
g. Failure to Eject
h. Very Hard Recoil
___________________________________
.2 Discuss the following M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle specifications: {3, 4}
a. Caliber [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-1]

b. Mechanism Type [ref. , ch. 5, pg. 5-3]
c. Magazine Type [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-1]
d. Magazine and Weapon Ammunition Capacity [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-1]
e. Weight [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-4]
f. Overall Length [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-4]
g. Barrel Length [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-4]
h. Muzzle Velocity [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-5/6]
i. Maximum Range [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-5/6]
j. Maximum Effective Range [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-5/6]
k. Safeties:
1. Manual Thumb-Lever [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-4]
___________________________________
125
126 M107 LONG RANGE SNIPER RIFLE (CONT’D)
126 .3 Discuss the following M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle handling commands and
procedures: {3, 4}
a. Load [ref. [ref. c, ch.2, pg. 0005 00-4 thru 0005 00-7]
b. Make Ready [ref. a] [ref. c, ch.2, pg. 0005 00-8 thru 0005 00-9
c. Load and Make Ready [ref. a] [ref. c, ch.2, pg. 0005 00-4 thru 0005 00-9
d. Unload [ref. a] [ref. c, ch.2, pg. 0005 00-10 thru 0005 00-11
___________________________________
.4 Discuss M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle maintenance procedures: {3, 4}
a. Disassembly [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 0015 00-2]

b. Cleaning/Inspection [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 0018 00-13 thru 00-18, 0012 00-1 thru
00-7/8]
c. Assembly [ref. c, ch. 3, pg. 3-42 thru 3-52]
d. Function Check [ref. c, ch. 3, pg. 3-52]
___________________________________
.5 Discuss M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle magazine loading procedures. [ref. b ch. 2,
pg. 0005 00-2 thru 0005 00-3] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.6 Discuss M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle Emergency procedures immediate action.
[ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-2 thru 0005 00-3] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.7 Discuss the danger you have to be aware of when working on the buffer and buffer
springs the [ref. c, ch. warnings, pg. a] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 Discuss The Position of the Bolt After you fire the last round for the M107 Long
Range Sniper Rifle [ref. c, ch. warnings, pg. a] {3, 4}
___________________________________
126
126 .9 Discuss During Disassembly What You Have to look out for concerning the spring
loaded cam. [ref. c; ch. warning, pg. b] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 Discuss Can the M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle be fired with one of the pins
missing (mid lock pin or rear lock pin). [ref. c, ch. warning, pg. b] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.11 Discuss Can the M107 Long Range Sniper be fired without a muzzle brake [ref. c,
ch. warning, pg. c] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Discuss Why the Hook and Bar must be mated Properly upon reassemble. [ref. b,
ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-2 thru 0005 00-3] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.13 Discuss What is the impact of leaving solvents or bore cleaner in contact with the
impact barrel bumpers. [ref. c, ch. warnings, pg. d] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.14 Discuss Why When Removing the bolt carrier from the lower receiver you must
ensure it is fully forward. [ref. c, ch. warning, pg. d] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.15 Discuss Zeroing the iron sights. [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0006 00-2 thru 0006 00-3] {3, 4}
___________________________________
127
126 .16 Discuss M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle Day Light Scope [ref. c ch. 2, pg. 0006 00-
4 thru 0006 00-19/20] {3, 4}
a. Live Fire Zero

b. Eye Relief
c. Parallax
d. Focusing the Reticle
e. Windage and Elevation
f. Level Adjustment
g. Estimating Range
___________________________________
128
127
127 DESIGNATED MARKSMAN/OBSERVER FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] MCWP 3-15.3, Sniping
127.1 Discuss Scope Adjustments. [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-4 thru 2-6] {3, 4}
a. Focus check
b. Focus the Eyepiece
c. Parallax
d. Parallax Adjustment
e. Reticle
f. Eye Relief
g. Elevation and Windage
_________________________________
.2 Discuss Observation Aids. [ref. f, ch. 2, pg. 2-10 thru 2-14 {3, 4}
a. M49 Observation Telescope

b. M115 Tri Pod
c. Binoculars
_________________________________
.3 Discuss Quartering the Target. [ref. f, ch. 3, pg. 3-3] {3, 4}
_________________________________
.4 Discuss shadow effect and how it throws off your shot. [ref. f, ch. 3, pg. 3-4] {3, 4}
_________________________________
.5 Discuss some advantages of using telescopic sights. [ref. f, ch. 3, pg. 3-4] {3, 4}
_________________________________
129
127 DESIGNATED MARKSMAN/OBSERVER FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
127 .6 Discuss the effect that canting has on your shot. [ref. f, ch. 3, pg. 3-4] {3, 4}
_________________________________
.7 Discuss some of the bad habits that can develop from improper trigger control.
[ref. f, ch. 3, pg. 3-5] {3, 4}
_________________________________
.8 Discuss what calling the shot does for you as a marksman. [ref. f, ch. 3, pg. 3-6]
{3, 4}
_________________________________
.9 Discuss The Hawkins Position. [ref. f, ch. 3, pg. 3-11] {3, 4}
_________________________________
.10 Discuss. What is position that a observer should take. [ref. f, ch. 3, pg. 3-13] {3, 4}
_________________________________
.11 Discuss Principals of Zeroing. [ref. f, ch. 3, pg. 3-14] {3, 4}
_________________________________
.12 Discuss Holds and Leads. [ref. f, ch. 3, pg. 3-20 thru 3-21] {3, 4}
_________________________________
.13 Discuss Detection and Selection. [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-1 thru 4-4] {3, 4}
_________________________________
130
127 DESIGNATED MARKSMAN/OBSERVER FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
127 .14 Discuss Searching. [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-2] {3, 4}
_________________________________
.15 Discuss Indexing Targets. [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-2] {3, 4}
_________________________________
.16 Discuss How to make a good range estimation. [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-7] {3, 4}
_________________________________
.17 Discuss What are the limitations on range estimation. [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-8] {3, 4}
_________________________________
.18 Discuss The Making and use of Range Cards. [ref. f, ch. 5, pg. 5-1 thru 5-11] {3, 4}
_________________________________
131
128
128 CLEARING BARREL SUPERVISOR FUNDAMENTALS
References:
Guidelines
NOTE: SUPERVISOR MUST BE PQS QUALIFIED ON THE WEAPON REQUIRING THEIR CLEARING
SUPERVISION.
128 .1 State the most prevalent factor in accidents involving firearms. [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1- 1]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.2 State the general weapon condition codes and associated actions of the person
being supervised. [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.3 State the standard weapon handling commands and associated actions of the
person being supervised. [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-3] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.4 State the sole purpose of a clearing barrel. [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.5 State the weapon operations performed in a clearing barrel. [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-14]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.6 State where the clearing barrel procedures are posted. [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-14]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
132
128 CLEARING BARREL SUPERVISOR FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
128 .7 State the requirements of the supervisor in regards to each clearing barrel
command. [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 State the requirement of the supervisor in monitoring of the clearing barrel process.
[ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.9 State what procedures have to be accomplished on the clearing barrel prior to it’s
use. [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-14] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
133
129
129 LINE COACH FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] OPNAVINST 3591.1E, Small Arms Training and Qualification

[b] FM 3-22.27, MK 19, 40-MM Grenade Machine Gun, Mod 3
[c] MCWP 3-15.1, Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery
[d] FM 3-22.9, Rifle Marksmanship, M16A1, M16A2/3, M16A4, and M4 Carbine
NOTE: LINE COACH MUST BE PQS QUALIFIED ON ALL WEAPONS COACHED.
129 .1 State when the student must receive a marksmanship, safety, and range regulation
instruction. [ref. a, pg. 2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.2 State who must deliver the training instruction. [ref. a, pg. 2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.3 State what items must be covered in the pre-qualification training. [ref. a, pg. 2]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.4 State the maximum time between pre-qualification training and qualification. [ref. a,
pg. 2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.5 State the skills student must able to demonstrate prior to live fire. [ref. a, pg. 2]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.6 State the acceptability of previous qualification. [ref. a, pg. 3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
134
129 LINE COACH FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
129 .7 State the Duties of a Line Coach. [ref. a, pg. 6] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 State the qualification requirements for a Line Coach. [ref. a, pg. 6] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.9 State who can designate a Line Coach and how they are designated. [ref. a, pg. 6]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 State the requirements to perform as a Small Arms Instructor. [ref. a, pg. 7]
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.11 State sustainment training requirement for a Small Arms Instructor and procedures
for lapse in sustainment. [ref. a, pg. 7] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 State student to line coach ratio for the following: [ref. a, pg. 7] {2, 3, 4}
a. Requalification
b. New Shooter
c. Low Light Course
d. Practical
___________________________________
.13 State when the RSO may perform as a Line Coach. [ref. a, pg. 8] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.14 State who is responsible for safe range operations. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 1] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
135
129 .15 State who has the final authority to decide whether a student is permitted to
participate in live fire. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 1] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 State the topics covered in a range orientation brief. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.17 State the following range safety rules: [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 3 thru 6] {2, 3, 4}
a. General
b. Pistol
c. Rifle
d. Machine Gun
e. grenade
f. shotgun
g. grenade launcher
___________________________________
.18 State the marking and procedures for Ready Line. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 6 thru 7]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.19 State the procedures for the Day/Night Firing Line. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 7] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.20 State the difference between Saved Round and an Alibi. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 8]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.21 Discuss Line Coach duties during malfunctions, stoppages and remedial action.
[ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 7 thru 9] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
136
129 .22 State who gives firing commands. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 9] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.23 State student actions if they do not understand commands during all phases of
instruction. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 10] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.24 State when student shall be removed for safety violations and for what violations.
[ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 10] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.25 Discuss the range premishap plan. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 10 thru 11] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.26 Discuss Training Time Out. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 11 thru 12] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.27 Discuss when simunition, simulators, lead-free, or frangible ammunition may be

used for qualification. [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 5; encl. 3, pg. 4; encl. 4, pg. 3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.28 Discuss the following as it relates to pistol qualification: {2, 3, 4}
a. Basic Handgun Course:

1. Description [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 5]
2. Course of Fire [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 5 thru 7]
3. Target and Scoring [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 7 thru 8]
b. Navy Handgun Qualification Course:
137
129 .28 c. Handgun Low-light Course:
1. Description [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 11 thru 12]
2. Flashlight Technique [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 12]
3. Special Instructions [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 12]
5. Target and Scoring [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 13]
d. Handgun Practical Weapons Course: {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Purpose [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 13 thru 14]
3. Target Engagement [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 14]
4. Firing Stations [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 15]
5. Barricades [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 15]
8. Mobile Range Procedures [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 17 thru 20]
___________________________________
.29 Discuss the following as it relates to rifle qualification: {2, 3, 4}
a. Rifle Qualification Course:

1. Description [ref. a, encl. 3, pg. 4 thru 5]
b. Rifle Low-light Course:
___________________________________
.30 Discuss the following as it relates to shotgun qualification: {2, 3, 4}
a. Shotgun Qualification Course:

1. Purpose [ref. a, encl. 4, pg. 3 thru 4]
3. Targets [ref. a, encl. 4, pg. 4]
4. Firing Stations [ref. a, encl. 4, pg. 4]
6. Scoring [ref. a, encl. 4, pg. 6]
___________________________________
138
129 .31 Discuss the following as it relates to light and medium machine gun qualification:
{2, 3, 4}
a. Weapons covered in qualification [ref. a, encl. 5, pg. 1]
b. MG Qualification Course Bipod:
2. Course of Fire and Targets [ref. a, encl. 5, pg. 2 thru 4]
c. MG Qualification Course Tripod/T&E Mechanism:
2. Course of Fire and Targets [ref. a, encl. 5, pg. 5 thru 6]
___________________________________
.32 Discuss the following duties of a Line Coach. (Instructor-Trainer): [ref. d, ch. 1,
pg. 1-7] {2, 3, 4}
a. Marksmanship mastering
b. Confronting shooter problems/fears
c. Shooter errors
d. Observing firer
e. Questioning firer
f. Shot Group Analysis
___________________________________
.33 Discuss the four phases of trainer certification: [ref. d, ch. 1, pg. 1-7 thru 1-9]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.34 Discuss the following terms in relation to peer coaching [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-10 thru
4-11] {2, 3, 4}
a. Benefits
b. Duties
c. Checklists
d. Position
___________________________________
.35 Discuss training devices and exercises [ref. d, app. a, pg. a-1 thru a-11] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
139
129 .36 Discuss shot group analysis and downrange feedback [ref. d, ch. 5, pg. 5-1 thru 5-
14] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.37 State range prescreening questions. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 6] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.38 State medical personnel requirements during live fire range operations. [ref. a, encl.
1, pg. 10] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.39 State machine gun student to line coach ratio. [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 2-56] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.40 State machine gun coach assignment and duties. [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-7] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
140
130
130 RANGE SETUP AND INSTRUCTION FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] FW 370-AF-OMP-010, Operator and General Support, Maintenance Manual (Including

Basic Issue Items and Repair Parts List), Small Arms Targets and Target Material
[b] SW370-AH-11N-010, Shipboard Small Arms Ranges
[c] OPNAVINST 3591.1E, Small Arms Training and Qualification
[d] FM 3-19.12, Protective Services
[e] FM 23-65, Browning Machine Gun Caliber .50 HB, M2
[f] FM 3-22.27, MK 19, 40-MM Grenade Machine Gun, Mod 3
[g] FM 3-22.31, 40MM, Grenade Launcher, M203
[h] FM 3-22.68, Crew-Served Machine Guns, 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm
[i] FM 3-22.9, Rifle Marksmanship, M16A1, M16A2/3, M16A4, and M4 Carbine
[j] NTRP 3-07.2.2, Force Protection Weapons Handling Standard Procedures and
Guidelines
[k] FM 3-23.35, Combat Training with Pistols, M9 and M11
[l] MCRP 3-01A, Marine Corps Rifle Marksmanship Manual
[m] DA-PAM 385-63, Range Safety
[n] FM 3-23.30, Grenades and Pyrotechnic Signals
[o] NTTP 3-07.3.2, Tactical Employment of Non-lethal Weapons
130 .1 Discuss selection and usage of targets and target materials as it relates to the
following terms: [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-2] {2, 3, 4}
a. Pasteboard Targets
b. Paper Targets
c. Plastic Targets (Polyethylene)
d. Repair Centers
e. Target Pasters
f. Target Spotter Disks and Target Spotter Spindles
___________________________________
.2 Discuss the following range major items: [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 2 - 3] {2, 3, 4}
a. Red Signal Flag (Signal Beacon for night shooting)

b. White Signal Flag
c. Red Signal Pennant
d. Target Holding Bullet Trap
e. Fabricated Major Items
1. Target Marker
2. Sliding Combination Target Frame
3. M1913 M Standing Silhouette Target Assembly
___________________________________
141
130 RANGE SETUP AND INSTRUCTION FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
130 .3 Discuss the following range upkeep terms: [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-1 thru 3- 2] {2, 3, 4}
a. Inspection procedures
b. Preventative maintenance
c. Lubrication
d. Repair:
1. Cloth components
2. Wooden components
3. Cords and Rope components
e. Final Inspection
f. Material storage
___________________________________
.4 Discuss the location and use of matrixes for afloat ranges. [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 3; ch. 4,
pg. 13 thru 28] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.5 Discuss the setup and design of afloat range barriers. [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 6; and table
1] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.6 Discuss the setup, design, and use of afloat range targets. [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 29 thru
49] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.7 Discuss the items required in a shipboard range certification letter. [ref. b, app. a,
pg. a-1 thru a-2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 Discuss M2 MG training strategy. [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 1-1 thru 1-5] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
142
130 .9 State how to identify the following targets and the courses of fire they are utilized
for: [ref. c, encl. 6, pg. 1 thru 9]
a. Transition Target (Transtar) II({2, 3, 4}
b. B-21{1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Transtar I {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. “E” Silhouette {1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Rifle “A” Target {1, 2, 3, 4}
f. 25 Meter Zeroing Target M16A2{2, 3, 4}
g. Rifle “A” Target Reduced 25 {1, 2, 3, 4}
h. Rifle “A” Target Reduced 15{1, 2, 3, 4}
i. “E” Silhouette Reduced {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 State MP5 training requirements for protective services as it relates to the following
terms: [ref. d, app. c, pg. c-8 thru c-17] {2, 3, 4}
a. Rounds fired monthly
b. Qualification periodicity and components
c. Procedures and elements of the MP5 Qualification Course
d. MP5 Range Instructions
___________________________________
.11 Discuss M2 MG training terms: [ref. e, ch. 5, pg. 5-1 thru 5-35]
a. Planning {2, 3, 4}
b. Objectives {2, 3, 4}
c. Commanders responsibilities {2, 3, 4}
d. Phases of training {2, 3, 4}
e. Sustainment training {2, 3, 4}
f. Remedial training {2, 3, 4}
g. Dry-fire training {2, 3, 4}
h. Crew members and equipment {2, 3, 4}
i. Crew Exercises {2, 3, 4}
j. MG Fundamentals Skills Test {2, 3, 4}
k. Ten Meter Firing Exercise {2, 3, 4}
l. Transition Day Firing Exercise {2, 3, 4}
m. NBC Firing {2, 3, 4}
n. Night Firing Exercise {2, 3, 4}
o. Advanced Gunnery {2, 3, 4}
p. Tracking and Leading Exercise {2, 3, 4}
q. Mounted Firing Exercise {2, 3, 4}
r. Mounted NBC Firing Exercise {2, 3, 4}
s. Predetermined Firing Exercise {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
143
130 .12 State the elements and procedure for correct fire commands. [ref. e, ch. 5, pg. 5-
18 thru 5-22] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.13 Discuss terms associated with the MG Train the Trainer Program: [ref. e, ch. 7,
pg. 7-1 thru 7-3] {2, 3, 4}
a. Concept
b. Certification
c. Recertification
___________________________________
.14 State the duties and responsibilities of a MG trainer. [ref. e, ch. 7, pg. 7-3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.15 Discuss fabrication of a MG sighting Bar. [ref. e, app. b, pg. b-6 thru b-7] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 Discuss use of short range training ammunition. [ref. e, app. b, pg. b-7 thru b-8]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.17 Discuss the layouts, conduct of firing exercises, qualification standard, and
documentation of the following MG ranges: [ref. e, app. c, pg. c-31 thru c- 34]
{2, 3, 4}
a. Multipurpose Machine Gun Transition Range

b. Multipurpose Range Complex.
___________________________________
144
130 RANGE AND INSTRUCTION FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
130 .18 Discuss the following MK19 Mod 3 MG training exercises and material: [ref. f, ch. 4,
pg. 4-7 thru 4-20] {2, 3, 4}
a. Sighting and aiming exercise

1. Sighting Bar
2. Target Board
b. Sight setting exercise
c. Laying exercise
d. Manipulation exercise
e. Range determination exercise
f. Range card exercise
___________________________________
.19 Discuss the layouts, conduct of firing exercises, qualification standard, and
documentation of the following MK19 Mod 3 MG ranges: [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-20 thru
4-33] {2, 3, 4}
a. Multipurpose Gunnery Range for the 40-mm Grenade Machine Gun

b. Multipurpose Machine Gun Range.
___________________________________
.20 Discuss the following MK19 Mod 3 MG training terms: [ref. f, ch. 6, pg. 6-1 thru 6-3]
{2, 3, 4}
a. Presentation
b. Mechanical Training
c. Crew Drills
d. Marksmanship
___________________________________
.21 Discuss the following MK19 Mod 3 MG training strategy terms: [ref. f, app. a, pg. a-
1 thru a-2] {2, 3, 4}
a. Components
b. Initial training
c. Sustainment training
___________________________________
145
130 .22 Discuss the following MK19 Mod 3 MG tests and procedures for their delivery: [ref. f,
app. d, pg. d-1 thru d-30] {2, 3, 4}
a. Diagnostic Gunnery Test
b. Intermediate Gunnery Test
c. Gunnery Skills Test
___________________________________
.23 Discuss the following MK19 Mod 3 MG annual gunnery training program elements:
[ref. f, app. e, pg. e-1 thru e-4] {2, 3, 4}
a. Live fire exercises
b. Gunnery exercises
c. Fighting Forces Active Component
d. Supporting Forces Active Component
e. Fighting Forces Reserve Component
___________________________________
.24 Discuss the following MK19 Mod 3 MG crew drill terms [ref. f, app. h, pg. h-1 thru h-
19]
a. Equipment and drill area {1, 2, 3, 4}
b. Crew drill formation {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Equipment inspection {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Placing MK19 into action {1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Taking MK19 out of action {1, 2, 3, 4}
f. Transporting the MK19 tripod mounted {2, 3, 4}
g. Dismounting the MK19{1, 2, 3, 4}
h. Remounting the MK19{1, 2, 3, 4}
i. Engage targets with MK19{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.25 Discuss the following MK19 Mod 3 MG gunnery exercises: [ref. f, app. i, pg. i-1 thru
i-12]
a. Individual Gunnery:
1. Instructional Fire Exercise {2, 3, 4}
2. Dismounted Range Card Exercise {2, 3, 4}
3. Mounted Combat Exercise {2, 3, 4}
4. Night Fire Exercise {2, 3, 4}
b. Collective Gunnery
___________________________________
146
130 .27 Discuss the following Grenade Launcher training strategy terms: [ref. g, ch. 1, pg. 1-
1 thru 1-3] {2, 3, 4}
a. Institutional training
b. Unit training
c. Initial and Sustainment training
d. Combat conditions
___________________________________
.28 State the Grenade Launcher firing commands. [ref. g, ch. 5, pg. 20 thru 21] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.29 Discuss the following Grenade Launcher dry fire exercises. [ref. g, ch. 5, pg. 20 thru
21] {2, 3, 4}
a. Loading and unloading exercise

b. Immediate action exercise
c. Aiming exercise
d. Sight setting and sight changing exercise
e. Dry-fire proficiency (Performance) exam
f. Remedial training
___________________________________
.30 Discuss Grenade Launcher training terms: [ref. g, ch. 5, pg. 5-20 thru 5-36] {2, 3, 4}
a. Range layout
b. Description of range and targets
c. Basic Gunnery
d. Qualification standards
e. Day record fire and qualification standard
f. Mounting of NV
g. Night record fire and qualification standard
c. Aiming exercise
d. Sight setting and sight changing exercise
e. Dry-fire proficiency (Performance) exam
f. Remedial training
___________________________________
147
130 .31 State the Grenade Launcher methods of fire control. [ref. g, ch. 6, pg. 6-10 thru 6-
11] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.32 Discuss terms associated with the 40MM Grenade Launcher Train the Trainer Program:
[ref. g, ch. 7, pg. 7-1 thru 7-3] {2, 3, 4}
a. Organization
b. Objectives
c. METL
d. Trainer Assessment
e. Assistant Trainers and Coaches
f. Command Benefits
g. Program Phases:
1. Phase I Preliminary marksmanship
2. Phase II Basic gunnery
h. Trainer certification {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Training base
2. Certification outline
___________________________________
.33 Discuss Grenade Launcher unit training program elements: [ref. g, app. b, pg. b-1 thru b-3]
{2, 3, 4}
a. Introduction
b. Preliminary marksmanship instruction and dry fire
c. Practice qualification.
d. Day record firing (includes NBC record firing)
e. Night record firing
___________________________________
.34 Discuss Grenade Launcher proficiency examination procedures and documentation.

[ref. g, app. c, pg. c-1 thru c-5] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
148
130 .35 Discuss the following CSW MG (5.56-mm and 7.62-mm) training terms: [ref. h,
ch. 4, pg. 4-1 thru 4-4] {2, 3, 4}
a. Introduction
b. Objectives
c. Training phases:
1. Preliminary gunnery
2. Basic gunnery
3. Advanced gunnery
d. Training strategy
e. Combat conditions
___________________________________
.36 Discuss the following CSW MG (5.56-mm and 7.62-mm) dry fire exercises. [ref. h,
ch. 4, pg. 4-17 thru 4-20] {2, 3, 4}
a. Ammunition {1, 2, 3, 4}
b. Loading and Unloading Exercises {2, 3, 4}
c. Immediate Action and Remedial Action Exercise {2, 3, 4}
d. Operational Exercise {2, 3, 4}
e. Sight Setting and Sight Change Exercises {2, 3, 4}
f. Practice {2, 3, 4}
g. Traversing and Searching Exercise {2, 3, 4}
h. T&E Manipulation Exercise {1, 2, 3, 4}
i. Dry-Fire Proficiency (Performance) Examination {2, 3, 4}
j. Remedial Training {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.37 Discuss the following CSW MG (5.56-mm and 7.62-mm) Multipurpose Machine Gun
range terms: [ref. h, ch. 4, pg. 4-20 thru 4-24] {2, 3, 4}
a. Layout
b. Basic Machine gun target
1. Point target
2. Area target
3. Grid square overlay
c. Target analysis
___________________________________
149
130 .38 Discuss the following CSW MG (5.56-mm and 7.62-mm) crew drill terms [ref. h,
ch. 4, pg. 24 thru 34]
a. Preparation {2, 3, 4}
b. Crew equipment {2, 3, 4}
c. Formation (Bipod or Tripod) {2, 3, 4}
d. Cross training procedure {2, 3, 4}
e. Inspection for bipod fire {2, 3, 4}
f. Placement into action (Bipod) {2, 3, 4}
g. Procedures for changing the barrel (Bipod) {2, 3, 4}
h. Removal from action (Bipod) {2, 3, 4}
i. Inspection for tripod fire {2, 3, 4}
j. Placement into action (Tripod) {2, 3, 4}
k. Procedures for changing the barrel (Tripod) {2, 3, 4}
l. Removal from action (Tripod) {2, 3, 4}
m. Prone position {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.39 Discuss the following CSW MG (5.56-mm and 7.62-mm) range procedures: [ref. h,
ch. 4, pg. 34 thru 54]
a. Zero {2, 3, 4}
b. Field zero {2, 3, 4}
c. 10-meter firing {2, 3, 4}
d. 10-meter conduct of fire {2, 3, 4}
e. 10-meter firing qualification {2, 3, 4}
f. Transition fire {2, 3, 4}
g. Transition conduct of fire (Bipod) {2, 3, 4}
h. Transition fire limited visibility {2, 3, 4}
i. NV Zero {2, 3, 4}
j. Qualification standards {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.40 Discuss the following CSW MG advanced gunnery terms: [ref. h, ch. 5, pg. 4-20 thru
4-24]
a. Objectives {2, 3, 4}
b. Organization {2, 3, 4}
c. Ammunition {2, 3, 4}
d. Firing sequence {1, 2, 3, 4}
e. Alternate firing positions and exercises {2, 3, 4}
f. Movement, speed, and alignment {2, 3, 4}
g. Reloading {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
150
130 .41 Discuss terms associated with the CSW MG Train the Trainer Program: [ref. h,
ch. 6, pg. 1 thru 12]
a. METL {2, 3, 4}
b. Trainer Assessment {2, 3, 4}
c. Assistant Trainers and Coaches {2, 3, 4}
d. Program Phases: {2, 3, 4}
1. Preliminary gunnery {2, 3, 4}
2. Basic gunnery {2, 3, 4}
3. Advanced gunnery {2, 3, 4}
e. Training tasks {2, 3, 4}
f. Trainer certification program {2, 3, 4}
1. Training base {2, 3, 4}
2. Certification outline {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.42 Discuss CSW MG unit training program elements: [ref. h, app. a, pg. a-1 thru b-3]
{2, 3, 4}
a. Focus
b. Structure
c. Periods:
1. Period 1-Introduction
2. Period 2-Preliminary Marksmanship Training and Dry Fire
3. Period 3-Proficiency (Performance) Examination
4. Period 4-10-Meter Zero Practice and Qualification
5. Period 5-Transition Range, Field Zero, and Practice Fire
6. Period 6-Transition Range Qualification Fire
7. Period 7-Night Zero, Instructional Fire, and Night Qualification Fire
d. Hours
e. Ammunition
___________________________________
.43 Discuss CSW MG proficiency examination procedures and documentation. [ref. h,

app. b, pg. b-1 thru b-7] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
151
130 .44 Discuss CSW MG training aids, devices, and procedures: [ref. h, app. f, pg. f-1 thru
b-3] {2, 3, 4}
a. Devices and exercises
b. First sighting and aiming exercise
c. Second sighting and aiming exercise
d. Third sighting and aiming exercise
e. MG T&E manipulation drills
f. Traverse and search. exercise
g. Engagement skills trainer (Navy – Fire Arms Simulators)
___________________________________
.45 Discuss CSW MG NV, target illuminator, telescope, and thermal sight training
strategies. [ref. h, app. g, pg. g-12 thru g-56] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.46 Discuss the following rifle training terms: [ref. i, ch. 1, pg. 1-1 thru 1-6] {2, 3, 4}
a. Training overview
b. Objectives
c. Training strategy
1. Initial training
2. Sustainment training
d. Training phases
1. PHASE I - Basic Rifle Marksmanship (BRM) Preliminary Rifle Instruction
2. PHASE II - BRM Downrange Feedback Range Firing
3. PHASE III - BRM Field Firing on Train-Fire Ranges
4. PHASE IV - Advanced Rifle Marksmanship
5. PHASE V - Advanced Optics, Lasers, and Iron Sights
e. Marksmanship training strategy
1. METL
2. Training assessment
3. Basic program implementation
___________________________________
.47 Discuss terms associated with the rifle Train the Trainer Program: [ref. i, ch. 1,
pg. 1-6 thru 1-9] {2, 3, 4}
a. Duties
b. Trainer certification program
___________________________________
152
130 .48 Discuss rifle unit training program elements: [ref. i, ch. 1, pg. 1-9 thru 1-13] {2, 3, 4}
a. Qualification training
b. Live fire exercises
c. Commanders evaluation guide
___________________________________
.49 Discuss rifle fire training procedure: [ref. i, ch. 6, pg. 6-5 thru 6-15] {2, 3, 4}
a. Field fire
b. Record qualification
c. Practice record fire standards
d. Record fire
e. Alternate qualification courses
___________________________________
.50 Discuss rifle combat fire terms: [ref. i, ch. 7, pg. 7-7 thru 7-47]
a. Rapid semiautomatic Techniques
1. Rapid fire training
(a) Dry fire and live fire exercises {2, 3, 4}
b. Automatic or burst fire Techniques
1. Automatic or burst fire training {2, 3, 4}
c. Suppressive fire Techniques {1, 2, 3, 4}
d. Quick fire Techniques {2, 3, 4}
e. NBC firing {2, 3, 4}
1. MOPP equipment fire training {2, 3, 4}
(a) Dry fire and live fire exercises {2, 3, 4}
(b) Alternate fire exercise {2, 3, 4}
(c) NBC downrange feedback {2, 3, 4}
f. Night fire training
1. Unassisted training
(a) Target detection {2, 3, 4}
(b) Artificial illumination {2, 3, 4}
(c) Dry fire and live fire exercises {2, 3, 4}
(d) Dry fire and live fire exercises with artificial illumination {2, 3, 4}
g. Moving target engagement {3, 4}
1. Fundamentals {3, 4}
2. Single lead rule {3, 4}
3. Live fire exercise {3, 4}
4. Techniques {3, 4}
h. Short range marksmanship
1. Conduct of training {2, 3, 4}
2. Fundamentals {2, 3, 4}
3. Preliminary marksmanship instruction {2, 3, 4}
153
130 .50 h. 3. (a) PHASE I, Reflexive fire training {2, 3, 4}
(b) PHASE II, Target Discrimination Training {2, 3, 4}
(c) PHASE III, Short range marksmanship qualification {2, 3, 4}
(d) PHASE IV, Shotgun and automatic firing familiarization {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.51 Discuss rifle designated marksman training. [ref. i, ch. 7, pg. 7-47 thru 7-59] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.52 Discuss the use and purpose of LOMAH. [ref. i, app. a, pg. a-11] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.53 Discuss rifle combat-advanced optics, laser, and iron sight training terms and
procedures: [ref. i, ch. 8, pg. 8-1 thru 8-23]
a. Training strategies and qualification standards {2, 3, 4}

b. Borelight {2, 3, 4}
c. Backup iron sight {2, 3, 4}
d. M68 Close Combat Optic {2, 3, 4}
e. AN/PAS-13 (V2), (V3), Thermal Weapons Sight {2, 3, 4}
f. AN/PAQ-4B/C and AN/PEQ-2A Infrared Aiming Lasers {2, 3, 4}
g. AN/PVS-4 Night Vision Device {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.54 Discuss rifle training aids, devices, and procedures: [ref. i, app. a, pg. a-1 thru 12]
a. Resources:
1. Classifications {2, 3, 4}
2. Training Devices and Exercises {2, 3, 4}
(a) Dominant Eye Training {2, 3, 4}
(b) M15A1 aiming card {2, 3, 4}
(c) Riddle Sighting Device {2, 3, 4}
(d) M16 Sighting Device {2, 3, 4}
(e) Blank Firing Attachment (BFA), M15A2/M23 {2, 3, 4}
(f) Target-Box Exercise {2, 3, 4}
(g) Rifle holding devices {2, 3, 4}
(h) Target-box paddle (DVC-T-7-86) {2, 3, 4}
(j) Dime (Washer) Exercise {2, 3, 4}
154
130 .54 a. 2. (k) Device and aid selection {2, 3, 4}
(m) Short range training ammunition {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.55 Discuss the use and purpose of rifle scorecards. [ref. i, app. b, pg. b-1 thru b-7]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.56 Discuss rifle laser trainers marksmanship training systems. [ref. i, app. c, pg. c-
1 thru c-10] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.57 Discuss the contents and use of range procedures and operations checklists. [ref. i,
app. e, pg. e-1 thru e-9] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.58 Discuss the use and purpose of simunition. [ref. j, ch. 15, pg. 15-1 thru 15-7] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.59 Discuss pistol training aids and coaching terms and procedures: [ref. k, ch. 2, pg. 2-
23 thru 2-32] {2, 3, 4}
a. Coaching
b. Calling the shot
c. Slow fire exercise
d. Instructional practice and record qualification firing
___________________________________
.60 Discuss the use and contents of a rifle data book. [ref. l, app. a, pg. a-1 thru a-6]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
155
130 .61 Discuss the use and requirements of the following targets: [ref. m, ch. 5, pg. 21 thru
22] {3, 4}
a. Moving targets
b. Airborne and ground targets
c. Waterborne targets
d. Radio controlled targets
e. Aerial targets
f. Ballistic aerial targets
___________________________________
.62 Discuss range laser safety. [ref. m, ch. 18, pg. 159 thru 160] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.63 Discuss firing conditions for the following items: [ref. m] {2, 3, 4}
a. Small arms [ch. 6, pg. 21 thru 25]

b. Shotguns [ch. 6, pg. 25]
c. SDZs (For your commands weapons) [app. c]
d. Blank ammunition [ch. 6, pg. 27]
e. Recreational ranges [ch. 6, pg. 27]
f. Grenades and Grenade Launchers [ch. 7, pg. 27 thru 33]
g. Chemical Agents and Smokes [ch. 16, pg. 142 thru 144]
___________________________________
.64 .12 Discuss grenade training terms: [ref. n, ch. 4, pg. 4-1 thru 4-15]
a. Objectives
b. Training courses:
1. Distance and accuracy {2, 3, 4}
2. Bunker complex {2, 3, 4}
3. Grenade Identification {2, 3, 4}
4. Hand Grenade Qualification Course {2, 3, 4}
5. Mock Bay Training {2, 3, 4}
6. Live Bay Training {2, 3, 4}
7. Confidence Course {2, 3, 4}
c. Collective Training {2, 3, 4}
d. Situational Training Exercise {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
156
130 .65 Discuss the contents and use of grenade range operations checklists. [ref. n, app. a,
pg. a-1 thru a-5] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.66 Discuss grenade range construction and modification. [ref. n, app. c, pg. c-1 thru c-
2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.67 Discuss NLW training terms: [ref. o, ch. iv, pg. iv-1 thru iv-3] {2, 3, 4}
a. Concepts and requirements

b. Instructor training
c. NLW topics for deployers
d. Leader training
e. Unit training
f. Disclaimer
___________________________________
.68 Discuss unit NLW training schedules and firing tables. [ref. o, app. d, pg. d-1 thru d-
14] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.69 State the contents of the Navy NLW Capability set. [ref. o, app. e, pg. e-4 thru e-5]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
157
131
131 RANGE SAFETY OFFICER FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] OPNAVINST 3591.1E, Small Arms Training and Qualification

[b] DA-PAM 385-63, Range Safety
[c] USMC Range Safety Pocket Guide
[d] AFI 36-2226, Combat Arms Program
[e] TC 23-13, Crew Served Weapon Night Vision Sight
[f] FM 23-65, Browning Machine Gun Caliber .50 HB, M2
[g] FM 3-22.31, 40MM, Grenade Launcher, M203
[h] FM 3-22.9, Rifle Marksmanship, M16A1, M16A2/3, M16A4, and M4 Carbine
[i] FM 3-23.30, Grenades and Pyrotechnic Signals
[j] SW370-AH-11N-010, Shipboard Small Arms Ranges
NOTE: RANGE SAFETY OFFICER MUST BE INSTRUCTOR QUALIFIED ON ALL WEAPONS HE/SHE
SUPERVISES DURING RANGE OPERATIONS AND QUALIFICATIONS.
131 .1 State who and how an RSO is appointed. [ref. a, pg. 5] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.2 State what training the RSO must have prior to performing duties. [ref. a, pg. 7]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.3 State what primary task the RSO is assigned with. [ref. a, pg. 8] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.4 State what documents an RSO must have on sight prior to commencement of

training. [ref. a, pg. 8] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
158
131 RANGE SAFETY OFFICER FUNDAMENTALS (CONT’D)
131 .5 State purpose of the OPNAV 3591/1 and who must endorse the document. [ref. a,
pg. 8] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.6 State what training the RSO must ensure shooters have prior to live fire. [ref. a,
encl. 1, pg. 1] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.7 Discuss live ammunition in an classroom environment and mixing of live and dummy
ammunition. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 1] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 State when a range orientation brief is performed. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.9 Discuss RSO responsibility on aspects of range safety. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 9]

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 Discuss RSO procedures if he determines a shooter is incapable of performing

remedial actions. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 9] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.11 Discuss and state the components of the pre-mishap plan. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 10
and 11] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Discuss RSO responsibility during TTO. [ref. a, encl. 1, pg. 11 and 12] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
159
131 .13 State if it is permissible for the RSO to direct shooters not to perform their own
weapon remedial actions. [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 4] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.14 State range ammunition requirement. [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 4] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.15 State what action the RSO should have shooters perform prior to practical fire
course in an indoor range. [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 17] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 State the following sustainment criteria for weapons qualification:
a. Pistol [ref. a, encl. 2, pg. 1 thru 2, 4] {2, 3, 4}

b. Rifle [ref. a, encl. 3, pg. 1, 3 thru 4] {2, 3, 4}
c. Shotgun [ref. a, encl. 4, pg. 1, 3] {2, 3, 4}
d. Light MG [ref. a, encl. 5, pg. 1] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.17 State how deviations to range procedures are requested/routed. [ref. b, ch.1, pg. 2]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.18 State the length deviations are valid. [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.19 State what areas deviations will not be applied to. [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
160
131 .20 State rules concerning alcohol and drug utilization and range training. [ref. b, ch. 1,
pg. 2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.21 State the periodicity the RCO and Safety Manager perform range and training
complex inspections. [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.22 State the RCO duties and responsibilities. [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 3 thru 4] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.23 State who may be appointed RSO for the following weapon systems: [ref. b, ch. 1,
pg. 4 thru 5]
a. Practice hand grenades {2, 3, 4}

b. Subcaliber training devices {2, 3, 4}
c. Laser devices {2, 3, 4}
d. Firing devices {2, 3, 4}
e. Simulators {2, 3, 4}
f. Small arms {2, 3, 4}
g. Machine guns {2, 3, 4}
h. Live grenades {2, 3, 4}
i. Grenade launchers {2, 3, 4}
j. Grenade machine guns {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.24 State the requirement for RSO to certify on range utilized. [ref. b, ch.1, pg. 6]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.25 State the items the RSO must ensure compliance with prior to granting permission
to fire. [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 6] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
161
131 .26 State the command the RSO must issue during any unsafe condition. [ref. b, ch. 1,
pg. 6] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.27 State the requirement of the RSO in reporting accidents/incidents. [ref. b, ch. 1,
pg. 6] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.28 State the requirement of the RSO as it pertains to physical presence. [ref. b, ch. 1,
pg. 6] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.29 State what the RSO must verify upon firing completion. [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 6] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.30 State the RSO duties as they pertain to use of laser equipment and the LRSO.
[ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 6] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.31 Discuss range safety certification program. [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 7] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.32 Discuss safety requirements for indoor ranges. [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 11 thru 13] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.33 Discuss policing of the range and training complex. [ref. b, ch. 3, pg. 16 thru 17]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
162
131.34 Discuss the following in relation to range use:
a. Restriction of access to range impact areas [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 8] {2, 3, 4}
b. Posting warning signs and markers [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 8 thru 9] {2, 3, 4}
c. Controlling other range usage [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 9] {2, 3, 4}
d. Coordination of airspace [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 9 thru 11] {2, 3, 4}
e. Coordination of navigable waterways [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 11] {2, 3, 4}
f. Special firing instruction [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 20] {2, 3, 4}
g. Warning signs and signals [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 20] {2, 3, 4}
h. Safety requirements for arial pyrotechnics [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 21] {2, 3, 4}
i. Firing ground vehicle status designation [ref. b, ch. 12, pg. 96 thru 97]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.35 Discuss the following in relation to firing at moving targets: {2, 3, 4}

a. General requirements [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 21]
b. Ground targets [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 21]
c. Waterborne targets [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 21 thru 22]
___________________________________
.36 Discuss the following in relation to small arms firing:

a. Hearing Hazard Zone [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 24] {2, 3, 4}
b. Eye Protection [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 24] {2, 3, 4}
c. Overhead Fire [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 24 thru 25] {2, 3, 4}
d. Flanking Fire [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 25] {2, 3, 4}
e. Shotgun Ranges [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 25] {2, 3, 4}
f. SDZ [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 27] {2, 3, 4}
1. Ground Targets [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 26] {2, 3, 4}
g. Blank Ammunition [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 27] {2, 3, 4}
h. Recreational Ranges [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 27] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.37 Discuss the following in relation to grenade Launcher and grenade MG firing:
a. General Firing Conditions [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 29] {2, 3, 4}
b. Precautions for M79/M203 Launchers [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 29] {2, 3, 4}
c. Precautions for MK19 Mod 3 [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 29 thru 30] {2, 3, 4}
d. SDZ:
1. M79/M203 Launchers [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 30 thru 31] {2, 3, 4}
2. MK19 Mod 3 [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 31 thru 33] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
163
131 .38 Discuss the following in relation to chemical agents firing: [ref. b, ch. 16,
pg. 142 thru 143] {2, 3, 4}
a. Lethal/Incapacitating Agents
b. RCAs in training and supervision
c. Conditions for RCA use
d. Personnel readiness evaluation
e. Protective Gear and MOPP
f. Water
g. Unprotected Personnel
h. Heat stress
i. Wildlife
j. Employment Conditions
___________________________________
.39 Discuss the following in relation to smoke firing: [ref. b, ch. 16, pg. 143] {2, 3, 4}
a. Protective Gear
b. Clothing
c. HC and TA smoke
d. FS and FM smoke
e. Public displays, demonstrations, or ceremonies
___________________________________
.40 Discuss range laser utilization. [ref. b, ch.18, pg. 159 thru 160] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.41 Discuss batwing SDZs and zone design. [ref. b, app. b and c, pg. 172 thru 192]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.42 Discuss the use of the range pocket guide. [ref. c, pg. 1] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.43 Discuss the RSO responsibility in security and safeguarding of weapons and
ammunition. [ref. d, ch. 1, pg. 12] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
164
131 .44 Discuss the range safety and operation during CSW NV training at night. [ref. e,
ch. 6, pg. 33 thru 38] {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.45 Discuss the following general range safety rules: [ref. f, app. a, pg. a-1 thru a-3]
{2, 3, 4}
a. Bravo Flag (Red)

b. Firing Limits
c. Firing Lanes
d. Weapons not in use
e. Smoking
f. Muzzle obstruction
g. Before Firing
h. After Firing
i. During Firing
j. Darkness
___________________________________
.46 Discuss trainer and shooter responsibilities when firing grenade Launchers on the
range. [ref. g, app. d, pg. d-1 thru d-3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.47 Discuss ammunition issuing and positioning on the range. [ref. h, app. d, pg. d-
2 thru d-3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.48 Discuss the use of range operation Checklists. [ref. h, app. e, pg. e-4 thru e-9]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.49 State sea range location with use of Range Matrix. [ref. j, ch. 2, pg. 3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
165
131 .50 Discuss sea state in reference to at sea ranges. [ref. j, ch. 2, pg. 6] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.51 Discuss the use of range operation Checklists terms during live grenade training:
[ref. i, app. a, pg. a-1 thru a-5]
a. Becoming an Expert {2, 3, 4}

b. Determine Requirements {2, 3, 4}
c. Equipment {2, 3, 4}
d. Occupy, Set-up Range, and Inspect {2, 3, 4}
e. Prepare for Training {2, 3, 4}
f. Conduct Initial Training {2, 3, 4}
g. Inspect Grenades {2, 3, 4}
h. Movement to Live Training Area {2, 3, 4}
i. Precautions {2, 3, 4}
j. Issuance of Live Grenades {2, 3, 4}
k. Throwing {2, 3, 4}
l. Orders {2, 3, 4}
m. Completing training {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.52 Discuss surface danger zones in reference to at sea ranges. [ref. s, ch. 2, pg. 6]
{3, 4}
___________________________________
.53 Discuss FOD in reference to at sea ranges. [ref. j, ch. 2, pg. 8] {3, 4}
___________________________________
.54 Discuss shipboard ranges ammunition limitations. [ref. j, ch. 2, pg. 8] {1 & 2}
___________________________________
166
132
132 WARNING SHOTS FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] OPNAVINST 5530.14D, Navy Physical Security and Law Enforcement

[b] NTTP 3-07.2.1, Antiterrorism/Force Protection
[c] FM 3-22.68, Crew-Served Machine Guns, 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm
[d] FM23-65, Browning Machine Gun Caliber .50 HB M2
[e] DA-PAM 385-63, Range Safety
132 .1 Describe the purpose of warning shots: [ref. a, pg. 13-4; ref. b, app. E, pg. E-1]
___________________________________
.2 State the 6 conditions that must be meet to utilize warning shots for Navy and naval
service vessels within territorial seas and internal waters of the United States.
[ref. b, app. E, pg. E-1]
___________________________________
.3 State the weapons authorized for use to fire warning shots: [ref. b, app. E, pg. E-1,
E-2]
___________________________________
.4 Describe the criteria used to determine clear fields of fire when firing warning shots:
[ref. b, app. E, pg. E-2]
___________________________________
.5 Describe when warning shots may be appropriately employed. [ref. b, app. E,

pg. E-2]
___________________________________
6 Describe the optimum ammunition load out for warning shots. [ref. b, app. E,
pg. E-2]
___________________________________
167
132 WARNING SHOTS (CONT’D)
132 .7 Describe the optimal firing rate for warning shot employment: [ref. b, app. E, pg. E-2]
___________________________________
.8 Describe warning shot offset techniques. [ref. b, app. E, pg. E-2]
___________________________________
(Signature and Date
.9 Describe the following terms:
a. Aim [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-5]

b. Offset [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-11]
c. Depress [ref. d, ch. 6, pg. 6-18]
___________________________________
.10 Describe the effects of gun mount limitations (i.e. depression angles and cutouts) on
field of fire and the employment of warning shots: [ref. b, app. E, pg. E-2]
___________________________________
(Signature and Date
.11 Identify the factors in determining proper warning shot placement, to include speed
of own ship/platform and target, offset requirements and depression angles. [ref. b,
app. E, pg. E-3]
___________________________________
.12 Describe the employment of warning shots under the following conditions. [ref. b,
app. E, pg. E-2]
a. Night
b. Low Visibility
c. Night Vision Device Utilization
d. High Freeboard
___________________________________
.13 Describe the hazards of ricochets and skipping rounds: [ref. e, Glossary. Sect. II,
pg. 202]
___________________________________
168
200 INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS
200.1 BASIC BUILDING BLOCKS

In this section, the equipment is broken down into smaller, more comprehensible,
functional systems as basic building blocks in the learning process. Each system is
written to reflect specific watchstation requirements by identifying the equipment most
relevant to one or more designated watchstanders. The less complex systems may
be identified and covered quickly or relegated to a lower priority to permit greater
emphasis on more significant or complex systems.
200.2 COMPONENTS AND COMPONENT PARTS

For learning purposes each system is disassembled into two levels. Systems have
components and components have parts. Do not expect to see every item which
appears on a parts list to be in the PQS. Only those items which must be understood
for operation/maintenance are listed. Normally a number of very broad (overview)
systems are disassembled into their components or parts with the big picture as the
learning goal. Items listed as components in such a system may then be analyzed as
separate systems and broken down into components and parts. Example: the turbo
generators may be listed as a component of the Ship’s Service Electrical Distribution
system and then later detailed as an individual system for closer study.
200.3 FORMAT
Each system is organized within the following format:
• It lists the References to be used for study and asks you to explain the function
of each system.
• It asks for the static facts of what or where the components and component
parts are in relation to the system.
• It directs attention to the dynamics of how the component and component parts
operate to make the system function.
• It specifies the parameters that must be immediately recalled.
• t requires study of the relationship between the system being studied and other
systems or areas.

The systems you must complete are listed in the Prerequisites section of each
watchstation. When you have mastered one or more systems, contact your Qualifier.
The Qualifier will give you an oral examination on each system and, if satisfied you
have sufficient knowledge of the system, will sign the appropriate system line items.
You will be expected to demonstrate through oral or written examination a thorough
understanding of each system required for your watchstation.
169
201
201 M9 SERVICE PISTOL SYSTEM
WEAPONS, PISTOLS.
171
202
202 M11 SERVICE PISTOL SYSTEM
WEAPONS, PISTOLS.
172
203
203 .38 CALIBER REVOLVER SYSTEM
WEAPONS, PISTOLS.
173
204
204 AN/M8 PYROTECHNIC PISTOL SYSTEM
WEAPONS, PISTOLS.
174
205
205 M500 SHOTGUN SYSTEM
References:
[a] SW370-BB-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, Shotgun, 12 Gauge Mossberg 500A1

[b] NTRP 3-07.2.2, Force Protection Weapons Handling Standard Procedures and
Guidelines
[c] TM 9-1005-338-13&P, Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual,
Mossberg 12-Gauge Shotgun, Model 500
[e] SW370-AQ-MMO-010 Maintenance Manual Naval Special Warfare Shotgun 12 Gauge
Mossberg 500A1
NOTE: REFER TO NOTES, CAUTIONS, AND WARNINGS AS STATED IN MRCS.
205.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND COMPONENT PARTS
Referring to a standard print of this system or the actual equipment, identify the
following system components and component parts and discuss the designated
items for each:
A. What is its function?

B. Where is it located?
Questions
205.1.1 M500 Shotgun [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 1-1] {2, 3, 4} A
.2 M500 Shotgun components: [Component Locations: ref. c, ch. 35 thru 46]
a. Stock Group [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-3] AB

1. Buttplate [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-3] AB
2. Stock [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-2] AB
b. Receiver Group [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-4] AB
1. Trigger [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] AB
2. Bolt [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] AB
3. Ejection port [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] AB
4. Loading port [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] AB
5. Bolt lock [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] AB
6. Alignment grooves [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] AB
7. Fore end [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 1-1] AB
8. Magazine tube [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] AB
c. Barrel Group [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-3] AB
1. Front sight [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] AB
2. Barrel [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] AB
3. Muzzle [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] AB
4. Magazine cap [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] AB
175
205 M500 SHOTGUN SYSTEM (CONT’D)
Questions
205.1 .2 d. Trigger Group [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 4-5] AB
1. Trigger [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-5] AB
2. Trigger guard [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] AB
3. Action lock lever [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-4] AB
4. Disconnector [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-5] AB
5. Sear [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-5] AB
6. Hammer [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-5] AB
7. Main spring [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 4-5] AB
___________________________________
205.2 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
205.2.1 Describe and explain the cycle of operation of the M500 Shotgun. [ref. a, ch. 1,
pg. 1-16 thru 1-18] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
205.3 PARAMETERS/OPERATING LIMITS – None to be discussed.
205.4 SYSTEM INTERFACE
205.4.1 Describe the following rounds authorized for use in the M500 Shotgun to include
operation: [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-9 thru 4-19] {2, 3, 4}
a. Cartridge, 12 Gauge Shotgun, 00 Buckshot, (M19, XM192, Paper Case)

b. Cartridge, 12 Gauge Shotgun, Door Breaching, Mk 246 Mod 0
c. Cartridge, 12 Gauge Bean Bag, Non-Lethal
d. Cartridge, 12 Gauge, Launching, For Grenade, Non-Lethal
e. Cartridge, 12 Gauge, Rubber, Fin Stabilized, Non-Lethal
g. AY04 Unambiguous Warning Device
h. tools for cleaning weapon [ref. E, ch. 3, pg., 17]
___________________________________
205.5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
205.5.1 Discuss special safety precautions associated with M500 shotgun ammunition.
[ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-3, fig 4-3] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
176
205 M500 SHOTGUN SYSTEM (CONT’D)
205.5 .2 Discuss M500 shotgun Safety button. [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 4-4, fig 4-5] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
177
206
206 MP5 (SERIES) SUBMACHINE GUN SYSTEM
CHANGE-1 NOTE: THIS SYSTEM DELETED IN CHANGE-1. SEE SUMMARY OF
CHANGES.
178
207
207 M14 SERIES RIFLE SYSTEM
References:
[a] TM 9-1005-223-12P, Operator and Organizational Maintenance Repair Parts and

Special Tool USTS for Rifle, 7.62-MM, M14 (National Match) and Rifle, 7.62MM,
M14(M)
Guidelines
[c] TM 9-1005-223-20, Organizational Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and
Special Tools Lists, Rifle, 7.62-MM, M14, W/ E Rifle, 7.62-MM, M14A1, W/E and
Bipod, Rifle, M2
[d] TM 9-1005-223-34, Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual
Including Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists, Rifle, 7.62-MM, M14, W/ E Rifle, 7.62-
MM, M14A1, W/E and Bipod, Rifle, M2
[e] NAVEDTRA 14324, Gunner’s Mate
[f] SW010-AD-GTP-010, Technical Manual, Small Arms and Special Warfare Ammunition
[g] TM 02648C-10/1, Operator’s Manual, Rifle, 7.62MM, M14 Designated Marksman Rifle
(DMR) W/E
items for each:

Questions
207.1.1 M14 Service Rifle [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-1] {2, 3, 4} A
.2 M14 Service Rifle components: [Component Locations: ref. a, section iv]
a. Magazine Cartridge [ref. d, ch. 3, pg. 11] AB

1. Tube [ref. d, ch. 3, pg. 11] AB
2. Base [ref. d, ch. 3, pg. 11] AB
3. Spring [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-18] AB
4. Follower [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-18] AB
b. Firing Mechanism [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 11] AB
1. Trigger and Sear Assembly [ref. g, ch. 2, pg. 3-18] AB
2. Hammer [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-10] AB
3. Safety [ref. g, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-2] AB
4. Trigger Guard [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-4] AB
179
207 M14 SERIES RIFLE SYSTEM (CONT’D)
Questions
207.1 .2 b. 5. Magazine Latch [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-4] AB
6. Small Arms Safety Catch (Bolt Catch) [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-5] AB
c. Gun Shoulder Stock Assembly [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-5] AB
1. Buttstock Swivel [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-4] AB
2. Buttplate Assembly w/ Shoulder Rest [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-4] AB
3. Gun Shoulder Stock [ref. d, ch. 5, pg. 15] AB
d. Operating Rod and Connector Group [ref. d, ch. 6, pg. 17] AB
1. Connector Assembly [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-5] AB
2. Operating Rod Guide [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-5] AB
3. Operating Rod Spring [][ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-5] AB
e. Bolt Assembly [ref. d, ch. 7, pg. 19] AB
f. Barrel and Receiver Group [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 21] AB
1. Windage Knob [ref. g, ch. 2, pg. 2-3] AB
2. Flash Suppressor [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-5] AB
3. Gas Cylinder [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-5] AB
4. Gas Cylinder plug [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-5] AB
5. Spindle Valve [ref. g, ch. 2, pg. 2-4] AB
6. Barrel [ref. d, ch. 8, pg. 21] AB
7. Rear/Aperature Sight [ref. g, ch. 2, pg. 2-3] AB
8. Selector [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-5] AB
9. Front Sight [ref. b, ch. 5, pg. 5-5] AB
g. Handguard Assembly [ref. d, ch. 5, pg. 15] AB
___________________________________
207.2.1 Describe and explain the cycle of operation of the M14 Rifle. [ref. d, ch. 6, pg. 17]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
207.3 PARAMETERS/OPERATING LIMITS
207.3.1 Describe procedures for operation of the M14 Rifle under unusual conditions. [ref. g,
ch. 4, pg. 4-6 thru 4-11] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
180
207.4.1 Describe the following accessories authorized for use in changing the M14 rifle
configuration to include operation, maintenance, and assembly/disassembly:
a. M12 Blank Firing Attachment and M3 Breech Shield: {2, 3, 4}

1. Description [ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 7]
2. Operation [ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 7]
3. Maintenance [ref. c, ch. 3, pg. 23]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. c, ch. 3, pg. 23]
b. M5 Winter Trigger Kit: {2, 3, 4}
c. M6 Bayonet Knife and M8A1 Scabbard: {2, 3, 4}
d. M2 Bipod: {1, 2, 3, 4}
2. Operation [ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 25]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 25]
e. MK 87 MOD 1 Line Throwing Rifle Adapter Kit: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-24 thru 3-27]
2. Operation [ref. e, ch. 3, pg. 3-24 thru 3-27]
3. Maintenance [ref. e, ch. 3, 3-28]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. e, ch.3, pg. 3-24 thru 3-27]
f. Cartridge, 7.62 Millimeter, NATO, Ball, M80 [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-44]
g. Cartridge, 7.62 Millimeter, NATO, Tracer, M62 [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-48]
h. Cartridge, 7.62 Millimeter, NATO, Dummy, M63 & M172 [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4- 49
and 4-50]
i. Cartridge, 7.62 Millimeter, NATO, Match/Special Ball, M118 [ref. f, ch. 4,
pg. 4-44]
j. Cartridge, 7.62 Millimeter, NATO, Special Ball, Long Range, M118 [ref. f,
ch. 4, pg. 4-44]
k. Cartridge, 7.62 Millimeter, Grenade, Rifle, NATO, M64 [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-44]
l. Cartridge, 7.62 Millimeter, NATO, Blank, M82 [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-44]
m. M2 Aiming Device {1, 2, 3, 4}
n. M15 Rifle Training Sighting [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 7] {2, 3, 4}
o. Sight telescopic rifle {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. g, ch. 2, pg. 2-6]
2. Operation [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-23 thru 3-28]
3. Maintenance [ref. g, ch. 4, 4-21 thru 4-22]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-51 thru 52 and 3-28 thru 29]
p. Sling [ref. c , ch. 2, pg. 39]
181
207.4.1 q. Bipod 1A2-BRM
2. Operation [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-23 thru 3-28]
3. Maintenance [ref. g, ch. 4, 4-21 thru 4-22]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-51 thru 52 and 3-28 thru 29]
r. Tools for cleaning weapon [ref. d, ch. Appendix b, pg. 49, 51thru 55]
s. M76 Grenade Launcher [ref. d, ch. 10, pg. 27]
t. M15 Grenade sight [ref. d, ch. 10, pg.28]
___________________________________
207.5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS – None to be discussed.
182
208
208 M16 (SERIES) SERVICE RIFLE SYSTEM
References:
[a] SW 370-BUJ-OPl-010, Operator Manual, for Rifle, 5.66 MM, M16A2 W/E; Rifle, 5.56
MM, M16A3; Rifle, 5.56 MM, M16A4; Carbine, 5.56 MM, M4 W/E; Carbine, 5.56 MM,
M4A1
Guidelines
[c] SW370-BU-MMI-010, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair
Parts and Special Tools Lists, for Rifle, 5.66 MM, M16A2 W/E; Rifle, 5.56 MM,
M16A3;Rifle, 5.56 MM, M16A4; Carbine, 5.56 MM, M4 W/E; Carbine, 5.56 MM, M4A1
[d] SW370-A3-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, for Carbine, 5.56MM MK 18 MOD 0
[e] FM 3-22.9, Rifle Marksmanship, M16A1, M16A2/3, M16A4, and M4 Carbine
[f] SW010-AD-GTP-010, Technical Manual, Small Arms and Special Warfare Ammunition
[g] TM 11-5855-308-12&P, Technical Manual, Operator’s and Unit maintenance Manual
(Including Repair Parts List), Target Pointer Illuminator/Aiming Light (TPIAL), AN/PEQ-
2A
[h] TM 11-5855-213-10, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Night Vision Sight,
[i] TM 11-5855-301-12&P, Technical Manual, Operator’s and Unit maintenance Manual
(Including Repair Parts List), Target Pointer Illuminator/Aiming Light (TPIAL), AN/PAQ-
4B
[j] TM 11-5855-262-10-2, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Night Vision Goggle,
AN/PVS-7B
[k] TM 11-5855-306-10, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Monocular Night Vision
Device, AN/PVS-14
[l] TM 11-5855-312-10, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Sight Thermal, AN/PAS-
13B
[m] TM 9-1240-413-12, Operator and Unit Maintenance Manual, including Repair Parts
and Special Tools List for, M68 Sight, Reflex, w/ Quick Release Mount and Sight
Mount
[n] TM 9-1005-237-23&P, Operator and Unit Maintenance Manual, including Repair Parts
and Special Tools List for, Bayonet-Knife, M6 & M7, w/ Bayonet-Knife, Scabbard, M10;
M9 Multipurpose Bayonet System
[o] TM 9-6920-746-12&P, Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual (Including
Repair Parts and Special Tools List), M2 Practice Bolt for Plastic Ammunition
NOTE: THIS SYSTEM ALSO COVERS THE 727, M4, AND MK18 CARBINES.
183
208 M16 (SERIES) SERVICE RIFLE SYSTEM (CONT’D)
items for each:

Questions
208.1.1 M16/M4/MK18 Service Rifle [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-1] {2, 3, 4} A
.2 M16/M4/MK18 Service Rifle components: [Component Locations: ref. c, section V;

ref. d, ch. 3 and 40]
a. Upper Receiver and Barrel Assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-1] AB
1. Handguard (M16/M4)/Rail Interface system (MK18) AB
[ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-5]
2. Compensator [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-4] AB
3. Front Sight Assembly [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-2] AB
4. Slip Ring [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-4] AB
5. Charging Handle [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-2] AB
6. Forward Assist Assembly [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-2] AB
7. Ejection Port and Cover [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-2] AB
8. Rear Sight Assembly [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-2] AB
9. Sung/Sling Swivel (M16/M4) [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-4] AB
10. Bayonet Lug/Stud [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-2] AB
11. Barrel [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-1] AB
12. Vertical grip (MK18) [ref. d, ch. 1, pg. 1-9] AB
b. Carrying Handle (M16)/Carrying Handle Assembly (M4/MK18)
[ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-4] AB
c. Lower Receiver and Buttstock Assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-1] AB
1. Trigger [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-2] AB
2. Trigger Guard [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-5] AB
3. Magazine Catch [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-2] AB
4. Pistol Grip [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-5] AB
5. Takedown Pin [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-5] AB
6. Receiver Pivot Pin [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-5] AB
7. Selector Lever [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-4] AB
8. Bolt Catch [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-4] AB
9. Butt stock (M16)/Collapsible buttstock (M4/MK18)
[ref. a, ch. , pg. 0005 00-4] AB
10. Lock/release lever (M4/MK18) [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0013 00-11] AB
11. Buffer Assembly [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-6] AB
184
Questions
208.1.1 d. Magazine Group Assembly/Cartridge Assembly
[ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-1] AB
e. Bolt Carrier Assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-1] AB
f. Sling (Sung)[ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-1] AB
g. Back-up iron sights (MK18) [ref. d, ch. 1, pg. 1-8] AB
h. Sling (Sung) mounts (MK18) [ref. d, ch. 1, pg. 1-10] AB
___________________________________
208.2.1 Describe and explain the cycle of operation of M16/M4/MK18 Service Rifle. [ref. a,
ch. 1, pg. 0004(00-0 thru 00-1/2)] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
208.3.1 Describe procedures for operation of the M16/M4/MK18 Service Rifle under unusual
conditions. [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0009 (00-1thr 00-10); ref. d, ch. 2, pg. 2-45 thru 2- 53]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
208.4.1 Describe the following accessories authorized for use in changing the
M16/M4/MK18 Service Rifle configuration to include operation, maintenance and
assembly:
a. Enhanced Combat Optical Sight-Navy (ECOS-N) (MK18): {2, 3, 4}

1. Description [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-13 thru 4-15]
2. Operation [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-19 thru 4-23]
3. Maintenance [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-23 thru 4-24]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-15 thru 4-18]
b. Visible Bright Light (VBL) II (MK18) {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-24 thru 4-26]
2. Operation [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-28]
3. Maintenance [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-28 thru 4-30]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-27]
185
208.4.1 c. M15A2 Blank Firing Adapter (M16) M23 Blank Firing Adapter (MK18/M4)
[ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 0007 00-1 thru 00-2] {2, 3, 4}
d. Top Sling (Sung) Adapter Kit [ref. a, ch. 4, 0020 00-1 thru 00-7] {2, 3, 4}
e. M7 Bayonet-Knife W/ Scabbard and M9 Multipurpose Bayonet System
[ref. o, ch. 1, pg. 1-1] {2, 3, 4}
f. M4 Adapter Rail Covers (M4/M5) [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 0018 00-1 thru 0019 00- 4]
{2, 3, 4}
g. Locking Plate (M16/M4) [ref. a ch. app b, pg. 0025 00-5] {1, 2, 3, 4}
h. Rail Grabber/Picatinny Rail Grabber [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 2-12 thru 2-14] {2, 3, 4}
i. Backup Iron Sight [ref. d, ch. 1 and 2, pg. 1-8, 2-25 thru 2-33] {2, 3, 4}
j. M68, Close Combat Optic (AIMPOINT): {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. n, ch. 1, pg. 0001 00-2, 0002 00-1 thru 00-5]
2. Operation [ref. n, ch. 1 and 2, pg. 0003 00-1 thru 00-2, 0004 00-1, 0005
00-9 thru 0006 00-3]
3. Maintenance [ref. n, ch. 4, pg. 0009 00-1 thru 0011 00-2]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. n, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-1 thru 00-8]
k. AN/PVS-14, Monocular Night Vision Device: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. l, ch. 1, pg. 1-1, 1-9 thru 1-21]
2. Operation [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-5, 2-57 thru 2-72]
3. Maintenance [ref. l, ch. 2 and 3, pg. 2-6 thru 2-34, 3-1 thru 3-10]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-35 thru 2-56]
l. AN/PAQ-4B/C, Infrared Aiming Light: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. j, ch. 1, pg. 1-1, 1-9 thru 1-14]
2. Operation [ref. j, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-4, 2-18 thru 2-22, 2-54 thru 2-58, 2-
61 thru 2-73, 2-85 thru 2-85]
3. Maintenance [ref. j, ch. 2 and 3, pg. 2-12 thru 2-17, 3-1 thru 3-10]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. j, ch. 2 and 4, pg. 2-5 thru 2-8, 2-23 thru 2-
38, 4-15 thru 4-22]
m. AN/PVS-7 (Series) Goggles: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. k, ch. 1, pg. 1-1, 1-6 thru 1-12]
2. Operation [ref. k, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-11, 2-26 thru 2-39]
3. Maintenance [ref. k, ch. 2 and 3, pg. 2-12 thru 2-25, 3-1 thru 3-10]
n. AN/PEQ-2A, Target Pointer/Illuminator/Aiming Light: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. g, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-3]
2. Operation [ref. g, ch. 4 and 5, pg. 4-1 thru 5-16]
3. Maintenance [ref. g, ch. 6, pg. 6-1]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. g, ch. 2 thru 3, pg. 2-4, 3-16 thru 3-27]
o. AN/PAS-13B (V2), Medium Thermal Weapon Sight: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. m, ch. 1, pg. 1-3, 1-7 thru 1-17]
2. Operation [ref. m, ch. 2, pg. 2-5 thru 2-40, 2-89 thru 2-100, 2-117 thru 2-
124, 2-129 thru 2-130]
3. Maintenance [ref. m, ch. 2 and 3, pg. 2-43 thru 2-58, 3-1 thru 3-6]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. m, ch. 2, pg. 2-59 thru 2-70, 2-124 thru 2-
128]
186
208.4.1 p. AN/PVS-4, Night Vision Sight: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. i, ch. 1, pg. 1-1, 1-6 thru 1-14]
2. Operation [ref. i, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-6, 2-34 thru 2-36, 2-54 thru 2-57, 2-
64 thru 2-69, 2-73 thru 2-76]
3. Maintenance [ref. i, ch. 2 and 3, pg. 2-7 thru 2-13, 3-1 thru 3-8]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. i, ch. 2, pg. 2-16 thru 2-33, 2-38 thru 2-44]
q. Borelight [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 2-25 thru 2-26] {2, 3, 4}
1. Description
2. Operation
3. Maintenance [ref. i, ch. 3 and 3, pg. 3.11] {2, 3, 4}
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. h, ch. 3, pg. 3.7,3.8] {2, 3, 4}
u. Cartridge, 5.56 Millimeter, Ball, M855 [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-33]
v. Cartridge, 5.56 Millimeter, Ball, M193 [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-39]
w. Cartridge, 5.56 Millimeter, Tracer, M856 [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-33 thru 4-39]
x. Cartridge, 5.56 Millimeter, Tracer, M196 [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-39 thru 4-40]
y. Cartridge, 5.56 Millimeter, Blank, M200 [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-40]
z. Cartridge, 5.56 Millimeter, Grenade, Rifle, M195 [ref. f, ch. 4, pg. 4-40]
aa. Tools for cleaning weapon [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 2-1/ref. e, ch. 5, pg. 0037 00-
5 thru 0037 00-12]]
___________________________________
187
209
209 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER SYSTEM
References:
[a] SW 370-AE-MMI-010, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair
Parts and Special Tools List for Launcher, Grenade, 40MM, M203 W/E; Launcher,
Grenade, 40MM, M203A1 W/E; Launcher, Grenade, 40MM, M203A2 W/E
Guidelines
[c] SW370-AE-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, for Launcher, Grenade, 40MM, M203;
Launcher, Grenade, 40MM, M203A1
items for each:

Questions
209.1.1 M203 Grenade Launcher. [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 7-1] {2, 3, 4} A
.2 M203 Grenade Launcher components: [Component Locations: ref. a, app c]
a. Barrel Assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-4] AB

1. Barrel Latch. [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0006 00-1] AB
2. Quick Release Adapter (M4) [ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-1] AB
3. Mounting Bracket [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-18.1] AB
b. Receiver Assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-4] AB
1. Trigger [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0007 00-1] AB
2. Safety [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0007 00-1] AB
3. Cartridge Ejector [ref. b, ch. 7, pg. 7-5] AB
4. Firing Pin [ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-1] AB
c. Hand guard [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-4] AB
d. Leaf sight [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-1/2] AB
1. Windage adjustment screw [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-1/2] AB
2. Elevation adjustment screw [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-1/2] AB
3. Rail grabber assembly AB
188
209 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER SYSTEM (CONT’D)
Questions
209.1 .2 e. Quadrant sight [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-4] AB
1. Latch [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-1/2] AB
2. Front sight post [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-1/2] AB
3. Retainer [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-1/2] AB
4. Rear aperture [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-1/2] AB
5. Range assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-4] AB
f. tools for cleaning [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 2-1,] AB
___________________________________
209.2.1 Describe and explain the cycle of operation of the M203 Grenade Launcher. [ref. c,
ch. 1, pg. 0003-00-1 thru 0003-00-2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
209.3.1 Describe procedures for operation of the M203 Grenade Launcher under unusual
conditions. [ref. c ch. 2, pg. 0016-00-1 thru 0017-00-1/2] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
209.4.1 Describe the following rounds authorized for use in the M203 Grenade Launcher:
[ref. d] {2, 3, 4}
a. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, Parachute, B504 Green Star, B505 Red Star [ch. 5,
pg. 5-6 thru 5-7]
b. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, B506 Red Smoke, B508 Green Smoke, B509 Yellow
Smoke [ch. 5, pg. 5-7 thru 5-8]
c. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, B519 Practice [ch. 5, pg. 5-8]
d. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, B534 Multiple Projectile, B535 White Star, B536
White Star Cluster [ch. 5, pg. 5-6 thru 5-9]
e. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, B546 High Explosive Dual Purpose [ch. 5, pg. 5-
10 thru 5-11]
f. Cartridge, 40mm, Tactical, CS, B567 & BA05 CS [ch. 5, pg. 5-11, 5-16 thru 5-
17]
g. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, High Explosive, B568 and B569 [ch. 5, pg. 5-11 thru
5-13]
h. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, Practice, B577 [ch. 5, pg. 5-13]
i. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, Foam Rubber Baton, Non-Lethal BA07 [ch. 5, pg. 5-
17]
189
209 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER SYSTEM (CONT’D)
209.4.1 j. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, Rubber Ball, Non-Lethal BA08
[ch. 5, pg. 5-17 thru 5-18]
k. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, Wooden Baton, Non-Lethal BA09
[ch. 5, pg. 5-18]
l. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, Dummy M 922
[ch. 5, pg. 5-6]
m. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, parachute White star M583, M583A1
[ch. 5, pg. 5-6 thru5-7]
___________________________________
209.5.1 Discuss special safety precautions associated with the M203 Grenade Launcher
and ammunition. [ref. d, ch. 5, pg. 5-6; ref. c, pg. a thru d] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
190
210
210 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER SYSTEM
CHANGES.
191
211
211 GRENADE SYSTEM
References:
Guidelines
[b] FM 3-23.30, Grenades and Pyrotechnic Signals
[c] OP 3833, Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Grenades
[e] TM 43-0001-29, Technical Manual, Army Ammunition Data Sheets, for, Grenades
items for each:

Questions
211.1.1 Hand Grenade:
a. MK 67 fragmentation Hand Grenade [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-6 ]

{3, 4} AB
1. Body [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-6 ] ABC
2. Filler [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-6 ] ABC
3. Fuze [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-6 ] ABC
4. Safety Clip [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-6 ] ABC
b. MK 3A2 Grenade Hand Offensive
[ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-1 thru 13-2] {2} AB
1. Body [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-2] ABC
2. Filler [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-2] ABC
3. Fuze (M206A2) [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-2] ABC
4. Safety Clip [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-4] ABC
5. Striker [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-4] ABC
6. Striker Spring [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-4] ABC
7. Safety Lever [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-4] ABC
8. Safety Pin with Pull Ring [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-4] ABC
c. MK 12 Grenade Inert [ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-27] {2, 3, 4} AB
1. Body [ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-27 ABC
2. Safety Clip [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-4] ABC
3. Safety Lever [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-4] ABC
4. Safety Pin with Pull Ring [ref. a, ch. 13, pg. 13-4] ABC
193
211 GRENADE SYSTEM (CONT’D)
Questions
211.1.1 d. Charge Diversionary, Mk 141 Mod 0 (DWBS
[ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-9 thru 9-10] {3, 4} AB
1. Body [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-13] ABC
2. Filler [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-13] ABC
3. Fuze [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-13] ABC
4. M42 Primer [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-13] ABC
5. First Fire Mixture [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-13] ABC
6. T1/T2 Delay Columns [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-13] ABC
7. Ignition Charge [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-13] ABC
8. Safety Pin Assembly [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-13] ABC
9. Pyrotechnic Output Charge [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-13] ABC
10. Safety Release Lever [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-13] ABC
11. Separation Charge [ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-13] ABC
12. Striker [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-13] ABC
13. O-Ring [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-11] ABC
e. Grenade, Hand, Riot Control, CS, M7A2 And M7A3
[ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-14 thru 9-16] {2} AB
2. Filler (CS Capsule) [ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-16] ABC
3. Fuze (M201A1) [ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-16] ABC
5. Safety Lever [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-16] ABC
6. Safety Pin with Pull Ring [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-16] ABC
7. Tape [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-16] ABC
8. First Fire Mixture [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-16] ABC
9. Burning Mixture [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-16] ABC
f. Grenade, Riot Control, CS1, ABC-M25A2
[ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-16 thru 9-17] {2} AB
2. Filler (CS) [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-16] ABC
3. Filling Plug [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-17] ABC
4. Arming Sleeve [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-17] ABC
5. Firing Pin Closure Plug [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-17] ABC
6. Firing Spring Slider Assembly [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-17] ABC
7. Arming Pin [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-17] ABC
8. Firing Pin [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-17] ABC
g. Grenade, Hand, Riot Control, CS, XM 47E3, w/Fuze
[ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-17 thru 9-18] {2} AB
2. Filler (CS) [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-17] ABC
4. Safety Latch [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-18] ABC
5. Handle [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-18] ABC
6. Safety Cotter Pin [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-18] ABC
7. Exhaust Port Seal Pull Tab [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-18] ABC
194
Questions
211.1.1. g. 8. Pull Ring [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-18] ABC
h. Grenade, Rubber Ball, Non-lethal, GG04
[ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-39 thru 9-40] (2) AB
2. Filler (0.25 Rubber Ball) [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-40] ABC
i. 3. Fuze (M201A1) [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-40] ABC
5. Striker Spring [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-40] ABC
8. Black Powder Separation Charge [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-40] ABC
9. Pressed Powder Delay [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-40] ABC
10. Bursting Charge [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-40] ABC
j. Grenade, Practice, Non-Lethal, GG05
[ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-40 thru 9-41] {2, 3, 4} AB
2. Filler (0.25 Rubber Ball) [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-41] ABC
3. Fuze (M201A1) [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-41] ABC
4. Safety Clip [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-41] ABC
7. Striker Spring [ref. d, ch. 9, p 9-41] ABC
k. Grenade, M84 Stun, (GG09)
[ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 2-61 thru 2-62] {3, 4} AB
1. Body [ref. e, ch. 2, p 2-61] ABC
2. Stun Charge [ref. e, ch. 2, p 2-61] ABC
3. Fuze Body and Adapter [ref. e, ch. 2, p 2-61] ABC
4. Primary Safety Pin [ref. e, ch. e, p 2-62] ABC
5. Circular Primary Pull Ring [ref. e, ch. 2, p 2-62] ABC
6. Secondary Safety Pin [ref. e, ch. 2, p 2-62] ABC
7. Triangular Secondary Pull Ring [ref. e, ch. 2, p 2-62] ABC
8. Safety Lever [ref. e, ch. 2, p 2-62] ABC
9. Charge Holder [ref. e, ch. 2, p 2-61] ABC
10. Cap Plug [ref. e, ch. 2, p 2-61] ABC
l. Fuze, Hand grenade M201A1/M206A2
[ref. d, ch. 9, pg. 9-28 thru 9-30] {2, 3, 4} AB
1. Striker [ref. d ch. 9, pg. 9-28,9-29] ABC
2. Striker Spring [ref. d ch. 9, pg. 9-28,9-29] ABC
3. Safety Lever [ref. d ch. 9, pg. 9-28,9-29] ABC
4. Safety Pin with Pull Ring [ref. d ch. 9, pg. 9-28,9-29] ABC
5. Time Delay Element [ref. d ch. 9, pg. 9-28,9-29] ABC
6. Primer [ref. d ch. 9, pg. 9-28,9-29] ABC
7. Ignition Mixture/Bursting Charge [ref. d ch. 9, pg. 9-28,9-29] ABC
195
Questions
211.1.1. l. 8. Safety clip [ref. d ch. 9, pg. 9-28,9-29] ABC
.
___________________________________
211.2.1 Describe and explain operation of grenades. [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-1 thru 1-18] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
201.3.1 What is the casualty radius of a hand offensive grenade? [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 1-6]
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
211.5.1 What safety precautions must be observed when handling hand offensive
grenades? [ref. a, ch. 3, 13-3 thru 13-6; ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 1-13 thru 1-15] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
196
212
212 MK46 MOD 0 LIGHT MACHINE GUN SYSTEM
CHANGES.
197
213
213 M240 (B/N) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN SYSTEM
References:
[a] SW360-AH-OMP-010, Technical Manual Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual
[b] SW360-AH-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, Machine Gun, 7.62MM, M240 Series
[d] NTRP 3-07.2.2, Force Protection Weapons Handling Standard Procedures and
Guidelines
[e] TM 9-1005-245-13&P, Technical Manual, Operator’s Unit, and Direct Support
Maintenance Manual with Repair Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL) for Machine
Gun Mounts and Combinations for Tactical/Armored Vehicles and Ground Mounting
[f] TM 9-1240-415-13&P Technical Manual Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual
(Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Telescope, Straight: M145
[g] TM 11-5855-308-12&P, Technical Manual, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual
(Including Repair Parts List), Target Pointer Illuminator/Aiming Light (TPIAL), AN/PEQ-
2A
[h] TM 11-5855-213-10, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Night Vision Sight,
[i] SW361-AK-MMM-010, Technical Manual, Maintenance Manual, Small Arms Machine
Gun Mount, MK 93 Mod 2
[j] SW360-AJ-MMM-010, Technical Manual, Maintenance Manual, Small Arms Machine
[k] SW300-AQ-MMO-010, Technical Manual, Maintenance Manual, Small Arms Machine
[l] TM 11-5855-312-10, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Sight Thermal, AN/PAS-
13B
[m] CVL Manual, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Carbine Visible Laser, AN/PEQ-5
NOTE: THIS SYSTEM MAY BE UTILIZED FOR OTHER M240 SERIES WEAPONS WITH PQS MANAGER
MODIFICATION.
items for each:

199
213 M240 (B/N) MEDIUM MACHINEGUN SYSTEM (CONT’D)
Questions
213.1.1 M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun [ref. d, ch. 10, pg. 10-1] {2, 3, 4} A
.2 M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun: [Component Locations: ref. a]
a. Barrel Assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-3] AB

b. Cover Assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-3] AB
c. Feed Tray [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-4] AB
d. Buffer Assembly/Buffer and Spade Grip Assembly/Buttstock
and Buffer Assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-3] AB
e. Driving Spring Rod Assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-3] AB
f. Bolt and Operating Rod Assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-3] AB
g. Trigger Housing Assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-3] AB
h. Receiver assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0007 00-4] AB
___________________________________
213.2.1 Describe and explain the cycle of operation of the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine
Gun. [ref. d, ch. 10, pg. 10-5] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
213.3.1 Describe procedures for operation of the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun under
unusual conditions. [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0008 00-1] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
213.4.1 Describe the following accessories authorized for use in changing the M240 (B/N)
Medium Machine Gun configuration to include operation, maintenance, and
assembly:
a. M122A1 Tripod: {2, 3, 4}

1. Description [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 2-1]
2. Operation [ref. e, ch. 1 and 2, pg. 1-6, 2-19 thru 2-21]
3. Maintenance [ref. e, ch. 2, 3, and 6, pg. 2-2 thru 2-6, 3-1 thru 3-3,
6-1, 6-3 thru 6-5, 6-9, 6-14, 6-20]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 6-1, 6-2]
200
213.4.1 b. M192 Lightweight Tripod: {2, 3, 4}
6-1, 6-3 thru 6-5, 6-9, 6-14, 6-20]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. b, ch. 4, 0031 01-1]
c. M6 Machine Gun Pedestal Mount, M197 Machine Gun Mount and
Ammunition Adapter Assembly: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 0032 00-1; ref. e, ch. 1, 1-11 thru 1-12]
3. Maintenance [ref. e, ch. 2, 3, 6, 15, and 16, pg. 2-2 thru 2-6, 3-1 thru 3-
3, 6-1, 6-3 thru 6-5, 6-9, 6-14, 6-20, 15-3, 16-3, 16-4.1 thru 16.4.2]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. b, ch. 4, 0032 00-2 thru 00-6; ref. e, ch. 2,
pg. 2-6 thru 2-8.1, 2-14 thru 2-18; ref. e, ch. 15 and 16, pg. 15-1 thru 15-
6, 16-1 thru 16-4.2]
d. MK 93 Mod 2 Small Arms Machine Gun Mount (need adapter for use):
{2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. i, ch. 1 and 2, pg. 1-1, 2-1 thru 2-6]
2. Operation [ref. i, ch. 2, pg. 2-8 thru 2-9]
3. Maintenance [ref. i, ch. 2, pg. 2-10]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. i, ch. 2, pg. 2-11 thru 2-14]
e. MK 97 Mod 0 Small Arms Machine Gun Mount: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. j, ch. 2, pg. 2-1]
2. Operation [ref. j, ch. 2, pg. 2-7]
3. Maintenance [ref. j, ch. 2, pg. 2-8]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. j, ch. 2, pg. 2-8 thru 2-9]
f. MK 99 Mod 1 Small Arms Machine Gun Mount: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. k, ch. 2, pg. 2-1]
2. Operation [ref. k, ch. 2, pg. 2-7]
3. Maintenance [ref. k, ch. 2, pg. 2-8]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. k, ch. 2, pg. 2-8 thru 2-9]
g. M24 Blank Firing Adapter/M21 Blank Firing Attachment and Discriminator:
{2, 3, 4}
1. Operation [ref. b, ch. 4, 0034 00-1, 00-4 thru 00-5]
2. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. b, ch. 4, 0034 00-1 thru 00-3, 00-8 thru 00-
18]
h. AN/PVS-4, Night Vision Sight: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. h, ch. 1, pg. 1-1, 1-6 thru 1-14]
2. Operation [ref. h, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-6, 2-34 thru 2-36, 2-54 thru 2-57,
2-64 thru 2-69, 2-73 thru 2-76]
3. Maintenance [ref. h, ch. 2 and 3, pg. 2-7 thru 2-13, 3-1 thru 3-8]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. h, ch. 2, pg. 2-16 thru 2-33, 2-38 thru 2-44]
i. Cartridge, 7.62 Millimeter, NATO, Ball, M80 [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-44]
j. Cartridge, 7.62 Millimeter, NATO, Tracer, M62 [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-48]
k. Cartridge, 7.62 Millimeter, NATO, Dummy, M63 [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-49]
l. Cartridge, 7.62 Millimeter, NATO, Blank, M82 [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-42 thru 4-
44]
201
213.4.1 m. Tools for cleaning weapon {1 & 2} [ref. b, ch. 6, pg. 0038 00-8 thru 0038 00-
18]
n. AN/PEQ-5, Carbine Visible Laser: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. m, ch. 1, pg. 3-6]
2. Operation [ref. m, ch. 1, pg. 9-21]
3. Maintenance [ref. m, ch. 1, pg. 23]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. p, ch. 1, pg. 7-8]
o. M145 Straight Telescope {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. f, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-1 thru 0003 00-2]
2. Operation [ref. f, ch. 2, pg. 00004 00-1 thru 00-5, 0006 00-1 thru 0007
00-4]
3. Maintenance [ref. f, ch. 3, pg. 0010 00-1 thru 00-2]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. f, ch. 3, pg. 0005 00-1 thru 00-15]
p. AN/PEQ-2A, Target Pointer/Illuminator/Aiming Light: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. g, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-3]
2. Operation [ref. g, ch. 4 and 5, pg. 4-1 thru 5-16]
3. Maintenance [ref. g, ch. 6, pg. 6-1]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. g, ch. 2 thru 3, pg. 2-4 thru 2-6, 3-22 thru 3-
23]
q. AN/PAS-13B, Thermal Sight: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. l, ch. 1, pg. 1-6 thru 1-17]
2. Operation [ref. l, ch. 2, 2-5 thru 2-13, 2-16 thru 2-17, 2-22 thru 2-23, 2-
40, 2-89 thru 2-94, 2-104 thru 2-110, 2-120 thru 2-129]
3. Maintenance [ref. l, ch. 2 and 3, pg. 2-45 thru 2-58, 3-1 thru 3-6]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. l, ch. 2, 2-59 thru 2-64, 2-87 thru 2-88]
___________________________________
202
214
214 M60 (SERIES) MACHINE GUN SYSTEM
CHANGES.
203
215
215 M2.50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN SYSTEM
References:
[a] SW 361-AC-MMM-010, Technical Manual Unit and Direct Support Maintenance

Manual (Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Machine Guns, Caliber .50;
M2, Heavy Barrel
[b] SW361-AB-MMO-010, Operator’s Manual, Machine Guns, Caliber .50; M2, Heavy
Barrel
[d] SW300-AC-OPI-010, Users Manual for Gun Mount, MK 95 MOD 0 with Machine Gun,
Caliber .50 M2, Heavy Barrel and Gun Mount, MK 95 MOD 1 with Machine Gun,
Caliber .50 M2, Heavy Barrel
[e] TM 9-1005-245-13&P, Technical Manual, Operator’s Unit, and Direct Support
[f] TM 9-1005-314-12&P, Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual (Including
Repair Parts and Special Tools List), Blank Firing Attachment (BFA) M19 for CAL. .50
M2 Heavy Barrel Machine Gun
[g] NTRP 3-07.2.2, Force Protection Weapons Handling Standard Procedures and
Guidelines
[h] TM 11-5855-214-10, Operator’s Manual, Night Vision Sight, Crew Served Weapon,
AN/TVS-5
[i] SW361-AK-MMM-010, Technical Manual, Maintenance Manual, Small Arms Machine
[j] SW361-AE-MMM-010/MK26, Technical Manual, Maintenance Manual, Small Arms
Machine Gun Mount, MK 26 Mods 15, 16, and 17
[k] SW363-D4-MMM-010/MK64, Technical Manual, Maintenance Manual, Small Arms
Machine Gun Mount, MK 64 Mods 4, 5, 6, 8, and 9
[l] SW361-AJ-MMM-010, Technical Manual, Maintenance Manual, Small Arms Machine
Gun Mount, MK 95 Mods 0 and 1
[m] SW215-BC-MMO-010, Technical Manual, Operator’s and Maintenance Manual, for
AN/PVS-20, Night Vision Crew Served Weapon Sight
[n] SW215-AL-MMO-010, Technical Manual, Operator’s and Maintenance Manual, for
AN/PVS-12, Night Vision Individual Served Weapon Sight
items for each:
205
215 M2.50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINEGUN SYSTEM (CONT’D)
Questions
215.1.1 M2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun [ref. h, ch. 11, pg. 11-1] {2, 3, 4} A
.2 M2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun: [ref. a, ch. 6]
a. Machine Gun Barrel [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-3] AB

b. Cover Assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-3] AB
c. Receiver Assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-3] AB
1. Front Sight [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-3] AB
d. Barrel Carrier Assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-3] AB
e. Barrel Extension Assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-3] AB
f. Retracting Slide Assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-3] AB
g. Breech and Bolt Assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-3] AB
h. Driving Spring Rod Assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-3] AB
i. Rear Sight Assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-3] AB
j. Buffer Assembly [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-3] AB
k. Backplate Assembly (FLEX/SOFT) [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-3] AB
1. Trigger [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-3] AB
___________________________________
215.2.1 Describe and explain the cycle of operation of the M2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine
Gun. [ref. h, ch. 11, pg. 11-4] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
215.3.1 Describe procedures for operation of the M2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun under
unusual conditions. [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0016 00-1 thru 00-7] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
206
215.4.1 Describe the following accessories authorized for use in changing the M2 .50
Caliber Heavy Machine Gun configuration to include operation, maintenance,
assembly, and use:
a. M19 Blank Firing Attachment: {2, 3, 4}

1. Maintenance [ref. f, ch. 2 and 3, pg. 2-2, 3-1]
2. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. f, ch. 2, pg. 2-3 thru 2-13]
b. AN/TVS-5 Night Vision Sight Crew Served Weapon: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. h, ch. 1, pg. 1-3 thru 1-5]
2. Operation [ref. h, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-9, 2-19, 2-27 thru 2-31,
2-32 thru 2-35]
3. Maintenance [ref. h, ch. 3, pg. 3-1 thru 3-14]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. h, ch. 2, 2-10 thru 2-12, 2-17 thru 2-19]
c. Flash Hider (Suppressor): {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-3]
2. Maintenance [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 0014 00-2]
3. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 0014 00-1 thru 00-2]
d. M3 Tripod Mount: {2, 3, 4}
2. Operation [ref. e, ch. 1 and 2, pg. 2-19 thru 2-21, 1-6.1, 1-7, 2-1,]
7-1 thru 7-3, 7-4, 7-9, 7-11, 7-13, 7-18, 7-23]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. e, ch. 2 and 7, pg. 2-11, 7-1 thru 7-23]
e. MK 93 MOD 0/1 Machine Gun Mount: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. i, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-7]
2. Operation [ref. i, ch. 2, pg. 2-8 thru 2-10]
3. Maintenance [ref. i, ch. 2, pg. 2-10]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. i, ch. 2, pg. 2-11 thru 2-14]
f. M66 Machine Gun Ring Mount: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. e, ch. 1 pg. 1-2, 1-4, 1-6.1, 1-7]
2. Operation [ref. e, ch. 1 and 2, 1-6.1, 2-1, 2-6, 2-19 thru 2-21]
8-2 thru 8-4, 8-7, 8-11]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. e, ch. 2 and 8, pg. 2-6, 2-11, 8-1 thru 8-11]
g. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Armor Piercing, M2 [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-67 thru 4-70]
h. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Armor Piercing Incendiary, M8 [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-70]
i. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Armor Piercing Incendiary, MK211 [ref. c, ch. 4,
pg. 4-74 thru 4-75]
j. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Ball, M2 [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-71]
k. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Ball, M33 [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-71]
l. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Incendiary, M1 [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-73]
m. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Incendiary, M23 [ref. c, ch. 11, pg. 11-10]
n. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Tracer, M1 [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-74]
o. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Tracer, M10 [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-73]
p. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Tracer, M17 [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-74]
q. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Blank, M1A1 [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-71 thru 4-72]
r. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Dummy, M2 [ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-72 thru 4-73]
207
215.4.1 s. Cartridge, .556 Millimeter, Short Range Training Ammunition, M862
[ref. c, ch. 4, pg. 4-40 thru 4-41]
t. M2 Practice Bolt for Plastic Ammunition: {2, 3, 4}
2. Maintenance [ref. g, ch. 2 and 3, pg. 2-1, 3-1 thru 3-2]
3. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. g, ch. 3, pg. 3-7 thru 3-14]
u. MK26 Small Arms Machine Gun Mount: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. k, ch. 2 pg. 2-1 thru 2-2]
2. Operation [ref. k, ch. 2, pg. 2-2 thru 2-3]
3. Maintenance [ref. k, ch. 2, pg. 2-3]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. k, ch. 2, 2-3 thru 2-19]
v. MK64 Small Arms Machine Gun Mount: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. l, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-1 thru 0003 00-17]
2. Operation [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-1]
3. Maintenance [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-1 thru 0018 00-2]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. l, ch. 2, pg. 2-6 thru 2-9]
w. MK95 Small Arms Machine Gun Mount: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. m, ch. 2 and 3, pg. 2-1 thru 2-6, 3-1 thru 3-6]
2. Operation [ref. m, ch. 2 and 3, pg. 2-7, 3-7]
3. Maintenance [ref. m, ch. 2, pg. 2-7, 3-7]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. m, ch. 2 and 3, 2-7 thru 2-10, 3-7 thru 3- 10]
x. AN/PVS-20 Night Vision Crew Served Weapon Sight: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. n, ch. 1 and 3]
2. Operation [ref. n, ch. 4]
3. Maintenance [ref. n, ch. 5]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. n, ch. 2]
y. AN/PVS-12 Night Vision Individual Weapon Sight: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. n, ch. 1 and 3]
2. Operation [ref. n, ch. 4]
3. Maintenance [ref. n, ch. 5]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. n, ch. 2]
z. 6650 .50 Cal Machine Gun Mount: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 1-3, 1-4, 1-9]
2. Operation [ref. e, ch., pg. 2-1]
3. Maintenance [ref. e, ch. 2, 3 and 11, pg. 2-2 thru 2-4, 3-1 thru 3-3,
11- 1, 11-5]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. e, ch. 2 and 11, pg. 2-6, 2-11,
2-13 thru 2- 14, 11-1 thru 11-8]
aa. Tools for cleaning the weapon [ref. a, ch. 6, pg. 004200-2]
__________________________________
208
216
216 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN SYSTEM
References:
[a] SW363-C3-MMM-020, Technical Manual, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance

Manual (Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Machine Gun, 40MM, MK19,
MOD 3
[b] SW 363-C3-MMM-010, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Machine Gun, 40MM,
MK19, MOD 3
[d] NTRP 3-07.2.2, Force Protection Weapons Handling Standard Procedures and
Guidelines
[e] SW363-D4-MMM-010, Technical Manual Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual
(Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for, Machine Gun Mounts, MK 64 Mod
4,5,6,8, and 9
[f] TM 9-1005-245-13&P, Technical Manual, Operator’s Unit, and Direct Support
[g] SW215-BC-MMO-010, Technical Manual, Operator’s and Maintenance Manual, for
AN/PVS-20, Night Vision Crew Served Weapon Sight
[h] TM 11-5855-214-10, Operator’s Manual, Night Vision Sight, Crew Served Weapon,
AN/TVS-5
[i] TM 11-5855-312-10, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Sight Thermal, AN/PAS-
13B
items for each:

209
216 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN SYSTEM (CONT’D)
Questions
216.1.1 MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun [ref. d, ch. 12, pg. 12-1]
{2, 3, 4} A
.2 MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun:

[Component Locations: ref. a, ch. 7]
a. Top Cover Assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-4] AB

b. Receiver Assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-4] AB
1. Barrel [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-1] AB
2. Flash Suppressor [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-2] AB
3. Charger Assemblies (LH/RH) [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-4] AB
4. Battlesight [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-23] AB
5. Front Sight Blade [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-2] AB
6. Rear Sight Assembly [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-4] AB
(a) Plunger [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-23] AB
(b) Sight Frame [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-23] AB
(c) Retainer Lock Nut [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-23] AB
(d) Aperture Carrier [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-23] AB
(e) Elevation Wheel [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-24] AB
(f) Windage Screw [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-24] AB
c. Feed Slide Assembly and Tray [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-4] AB
d. Sear Assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-4] AB
e. Bolt and Backplate Assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-6] AB
1. Control Grip Assembly [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-6] AB
(a) Trigger [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-7] AB
(b) Safe/Fire Switch (Thumb Safety) [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-6] AB
f. Feed Throat Assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-6] AB
___________________________________
216.2.1 Describe and explain the cycle of operation of the MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade
Machine Gun. [ref. d, ch. 12, pg. 12-4] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
216.3.1 Describe procedures for operation of the MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine
Gun under unusual conditions. [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 0006 00-1 thru 00-6] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
210
216.4.1 Describe the following accessories authorized for use in changing the MK19 MOD 3
40MM Grenade Machine Gun configuration to include operation, maintenance,
assembly, and use:
a. MK64 Small Arms Machine Gun Mount: {2, 3, 4}

1. Description [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-1 thru 0003 00-17]
2. Operation [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-1/2]
3. Maintenance [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 0005 00-1 thru 0018 00-2]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 0019 00-1thru 0038 00-1/2]
b. M3 Tripod: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. f, ch. 1, pg. 1-2]
2. Operation [ref. f, ch. 1 and 2, pg., 1-6.1, 1-7, 2-1, 2-19 thru 2-21]
3. Maintenance [ref. f, ch. 2, 3, and 7, pg. 2-2 thru 2-4, 3-1 thru 3-3,
7-1 thru 7-3, 7-4, 7-9, 7-11, 7-13, 7-18, 7-23]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. f, ch. 2 and 7, pg. 2-12 thru 2-13,
7-1 thru 7-23]
c. MK93 Mod 0/1 Machine Gun Mount, Empty Case Catch Bag Assembly and
HMMWV Ring Assembly: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. f, ch. 1, pg. 1-3]
2. Operation [ref. f, ch. 1 and 2, pg., 1-10 thru 1-11, 2-1, 2-19 thru 2-21]
3. Maintenance [ref. f, ch. 2, 3, and 14, pg. 2-2 thru 2-6, 3-1 thru 3-3,
14-2 thru 14-7, 14-9, 14-14]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. f, ch. 2 and 14, pg. 2-6, 2-12 thru 2-13,
14- 1 thru 14-16]
d. AN/TVS-5 Night Vision Sight Crew Served Weapon: {2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. h, ch. 1, pg. 1-3 thru 1-5]
2. Operation [ref. h, ch. 2, pg. 2-1 thru 2-9, 2-19, 2-27 thru 2-31,
2-32 thru 2-35]
3. Maintenance [ref. h, ch. 3, pg. 3-1 thru 3-14]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. h, ch. 2, 2-10 thru 2-12, 2-17 thru 2-19]
e. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, HE, M383 [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-16]
f. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, HE, M384 [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-13 thru 5-15]
g. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, Practice, M385 [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-15]
h. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, Practice, M918 [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-19 thru 5-20]
i. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, HEDP, M430 [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-15 thru 5-16]
j. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, Dummy, M922 [ref. c, ch. 5, pg. 5-6]
k. AN/PVS-20 Night Vision Crew Served Weapon Sight: {1, 2, 3, 4}
1. Description [ref. g, ch. 1 and 3]
2. Operation [ref. g, ch. 4]
3. Maintenance [ref. g, ch. 5]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. g, ch. 2]
211
216.4.1 m. AN/PAS-13B (V2), Medium Thermal Weapon Sight: {2, 3, 4}

1. Description [ref. i, ch. 1, pg. 1-3, 1-7 thru 1-17]
2. Operation [ref. i, ch. 2, pg. 2-5 thru 2-40, 2-89 thru 2-100,
2-117 thru 2- 124, 2-129 thru 2-130]
3. Maintenance [ref. i, ch. 2 and 3, pg. 2-43 thru 2-58, 3-1 thru 3-6]
4. Assembly/Disassembly [ref. i, ch. 2, pg. 2-59 thru 2-70,
2-124 thru 2- 128]
n. Tools for cleaning the weapon [ref. a, ch. 4, pg. 0039 00-1]
216.5.1 Discuss special safety precautions associated with the MK19 MOD 3 40MM
Grenade Machine Gun ammunition. [ref. b, ch. 1 and 4, pg. a thru g, 0014 00-1 thru
00-30] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
212
217
217 MK38 MOD 1 25MM MACHINE GUN SYSTEM
CHANGES.
213
218
218 MK 44 MOD 0/1 GUN WEAPON SYSTEM
CHANGES.
215
219
219 40MM SALUTING MOUNTS SYSTEM
References:
[a] SW363-AO-MMO-010, Technical Manual, 40mm Saluting Mount MK 11 MODS 0-2

[b] SW030-AA-MMO-010, Technical Manual, Navy Gun Ammunition, Description
Operation, and Maintenance
items for each:

Questions
219.1.1 40MM Saluting Mount [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-1] A
.2 40MM Saluting Mount components:
a. Stand [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-1] AB

b. Breech Housing [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-1] AB
c. Barrel [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-1] AB
d. Support Cradle [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-1] AB
e. Breechblock cover [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1] AB
f. Stop [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1] AB
g. Stop Lever [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1] AB
h. Operating Lever [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1] AB
i. Safety Plug [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-1] AB
j. Screw Clamp [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1] AB
k. Hexhead Bolt [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1] AB
l. Directional Selector Retaining Plate [ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-1] AB
___________________________________
217
219 40MM SALUTING MOUNTS SYSTEM (CONT’D)
219.2.1 Describe and explain the cycle of operation of the 40MM Saluting Mount.
[ref. a, ch. 2, pg. 2-3 thru 2-7]
___________________________________
.2 Describe and explain the special tools used for the 40MM Saluting Mount.
[ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-6, 3-7]
___________________________________
.3 Describe and explain the difference between the MK 11 mod 0, mod 1, and mod 2
for the 40MM Saluting Mount. [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-1]
___________________________________
.4 State how the 40MM ammo boxes use with the saluting mount.
[ref. a, ch. 3, pg. 3-4]
___________________________________
219.3 PARAMETERS/OPERATING LIMITS – None to be discussed.
219.4.1 Describe the Saluting Rounds Authorized for use in the 40MM Saluting Mount:
a. Cartridge, 40 millimeter, Blank Saluting Charge, DODIC B650 (200g.)

[ref. b, ch.3, pg. 3-15 thru 3-16]
b. Cartridge, 40 millimeter, Blank Saluting Charge, DODIC B550 (50g.)
[ref. b, ch.3, pg. 3-15 thru 3-16]
___________________________________
218
220
220 M107 LONG RANGE SNIPER RIFLE SYSTEM
References:
Guidelines
[b] TM 9-1005-239-23&P, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual M107 Long range
Sniper Rifle
[c] TM 9-1005-239-10 Long Range Sniper Rifle (LRSR) USMC Special Application
Scoped Rifle (SASR) CAL .50 M107
[e] Barrett Firearm Manufacturing, Inc. Operators Manual .50 cal Rifle M82A1
items for each:

Questions
220.1.1 M107 Long Ranged Sniper Rifle [ref. b, ch.1, Pg0002 001 thru A
0002 00-5/6] {3, 4}
.2 M107 Long Ranged Sniper Rifle components: [Component Locations:

[ref. b, ch.1, Pg0002 001 thru 0002 00-5/6] {3, 4}
a. Magazine Cartridge [ref. b, ch. 4, pg. 0022 00-2] AB

1. Tube AB
2. Base AB
3. Spring AB
4. Follower AB
b. Upper Receiver Assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-2] AB
1. Rail [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-2] AB
2. Front Sight [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-2] AB
3. Carrying Handle [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-2] AB
4. Muzzle Brake [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-2] AB
5. Rear Lock Pin [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 18] AB
6. Barrel Key [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 17] AB
7. Barrel Springs [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 17] AB
8. Impact Bumpers [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 12] AB
9. Bolt Latch [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 6] AB
219
220 M107 LONG RANGE SNIPER RIFLE SYSTEM (CONT’D)
Questions
220.1 .2 b. 10. Barrel [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-2] AB
c. Bolt Carrier Assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-2] AB
1. Bolt [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-2] AB
2. Firing Pin [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-2] AB
3. Extractor [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-2] AB
4. Ejector [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-2] AB
5. Cocking Lever [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 8] AB
6. Firing Pin Extension [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 7] AB
7. Bolt Spring [ref. e, ch. 4, pg. 39] AB
9. Accelerator [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 7] AB
8. Sear Spring [ref. e, ch. 4, pg. 39] AB
9. Sear [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 8] AB
10. Cam Pin [ref. e, ch. 4, pg. 39] AB
d. Lower Receiver Assembly [ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-2] AB
1. Detachable Bipod Assembly [ref. c, ch. 1, pg. 0002 00-2] AB
2. Buffer Assembly [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 5] AB
3. Mid Lock Pin [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 5] AB
4. Trigger [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-2 thru 0004 00-3/4] AB
5. Safety [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0004 00-2 thru 0004 00-3/4] A.B
6. Disconnector [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 8] AB
7. Transfer Bar [ref. e, ch. 1, pg. 7] AB
e. Scope [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0006 00-4] AB
___________________________________
220.2.1 Describe and explain the cycle of operation of the M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle.
[ref. b, ch. 1, pg. 0003 00-1 thru 00-2] {3, 4}
___________________________________
220.3.1 Describe procedures for operation of the M107Long Range Sniper Rifle under
unusual conditions. [ref. c, ch. 2, pg. 0007 00-2 thru 0007 00-3/4] {3, 4}
___________________________________
220
220.4.1 Describe the following rounds authorized for use in the M107 Long Range Sniper
Rifle to include operation: [ref. d] {3, 4}
a. Cartridge, .50 Caliber Armor Piercing M2 [ch. 4, pg. 4-67]

b. Cartridge, .50 Caliber Armor Piercing Incendiary M8 [ch. 4, pg. 4-70]
c. Cartridge, .50 Caliber Ball M33 [ch. 4, pg. 4-71]
d. Cartridge, .50 Caliber Armor Piercing Incendiary Mk 211 Mod0
[ch. 4, pg. 4-74]
e. Tools for cleaning the weapon [ref. b, ch. 6, pg.0021 00-8 to 0021 00-27
___________________________________
.2 Describe the following accessories authorized for use in changing the M14 rifle
configuration to include operation, maintenance, and assembly/disassembly: {3, 4}
a. Iron sights
b. Carrying Handle
c. Biopod
d. Monopod
e. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Armor Piercing Incendiary, M8 [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-70]
f. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Armor Piercing Incendiary, MK211 [ref. d, ch.
4, pg. 4-74 thru 4-75]
g. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Ball, M33 [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-71]
h. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Tracer, M17 [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-74]
i. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Blank, M1A1 [ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-71 thru 4-72]
j. Cartridge, .50 Caliber, Armor Piercing Incendiary Tracer M20
[ref. d, ch. 4, pg. 4-70 thru 4-71]
221
220.4 .2 k. Tools for cleaning weapon. [ref. c, ch. 6, pg. 002100-8 thru 002100-27
___________________________________
222
300 INTRODUCTION TO WATCHSTATIONS
300.1 INTRODUCTION
The Watchstation section of your PQS is where you get a chance to demonstrate to
your Qualifier that you can put the knowledge you have gained in the previous
sections to use. It allows you to practice the tasks required for your watchstation and
to handle abnormal conditions and emergencies. Before starting your assigned tasks,
you must complete the prerequisites that pertain to the performance of that particular
task. Satisfactory completion of all prerequisites is required prior to achievement of
final watchstation qualification.
300.2 FORMAT
Each watchstation in this section contains:
• A FINAL QUALIFICATION PAGE, which is used to obtain the required

signatures for approval and recording of Final Qualification.
• PREREQUISITES, which are items that must be certified completed before

you can begin qualification for a particular watchstation. Prerequisites may
include schools, watchstation qualifications from other PQS books, and
fundamentals, systems, or watchstation qualifications from this book. Prior to
signing off each prerequisite line item, the Qualifier must verify completion
from existing records. Record the date of actual completion, not the sign-off
date.
• WATCHSTATION Performance, which is the practical factors portion of your

qualification. The performance is broken down as follows:
Tasks (routine operating tasks that are performed frequently)

Infrequent Tasks
Abnormal Conditions
Emergencies
Training Watches
Examinations
If there are multiple watchstations, a QUALIFICATION PROGRESS SUMMARY will

appear at the end of the Standard.
223
300 INTRODUCTION TO WATCHSTATIONS (CONT’D)
300.3 OPERATING PROCEDURES

The PQS deliberately makes no attempt to specify the procedures to be used to
complete a task or control or correct a casualty. The only proper sources of this
information are the technical manuals, Engineering Operational Sequencing System
(EOSS), Naval Air Training and Operating Procedures Standardization (NATOPS) or
other policy-making documents prepared for a specific installation or a piece of
equipment. Additionally, the level of accuracy required of a trainee may vary from
school to school, ship to ship, and squadron to squadron based upon such factors as
mission requirements. Thus, proficiency may be confirmed only through
demonstrated performance at a level of competency sufficient to satisfy the
Commanding Officer.
300.4 DISCUSSION ITEMS

Though actual performance of evolutions is always preferable to observation or
discussion, some items listed in each watchstation may be too hazardous or time
consuming to perform or simulate. Therefore, you may be required to discuss such
items with your Qualifier.
300.5 NUMBERING
Each Final Qualification is assigned both a watchstation number and a NAVEDTRA
Final Qualification number. The NAVEDTRA number is to be used for recording
qualifications in service and training records.

After completing the required prerequisites applicable to a particular task, you may
perform the task under the supervision of a qualified watchstander. If you satisfactorily
perform the task and can explain each step, your Qualifier will sign you off for that
task. You may then be required to stand a watch or a number of watches to earn
qualification. There are two levels of supervision for this:
 Under Instruction: You will perform the duties and tasks of the watchstation under
the direct supervision of a qualified watchstander or supervisor. This is intended
to be a one-on-one training situation.
 Under qualified supervision: You will perform the duties and tasks of the
watchstation with minor guidance from a qualified watchstander or supervisor.
This is intended to allow you to develop proficiency in and operational
environment with minimal oversight or have a supervisor close at hand if needed.
After all line items have been completed, your Qualifier will verify Final
Qualification by signing and dating the Final Qualification pages.
224
FINAL QUALIFICATION NAVEDTRA 43466-D CH-1
301 M9 SERVICE PISTOL OPERATOR
CHANGE-1 NOTE: W ATCHSTATION MOVED TO NAVEDTRA 43466-1A, SECURITY FORCE

WEAPONS, PISTOLS.
225

WEAPONS, PISTOLS.
227
303 .38 CALIBER REVOLVER OPERATOR

WEAPONS, PISTOLS.
229
304 AN/M8 PYROTECHNIC PISTOL OPERATOR

WEAPONS, PISTOLS.
231
FINAL QUALIFICATION NAVEDTRA 43466-D
305 M500 SHOTGUN OPERATOR
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________
This page is to be used as a record of satisfactory completion of designated sections of the

Personnel Qualification Standard (PQS). Only specified supervisors may signify completion of
applicable sections either by written or oral examination, or by observation of performance. The
examination or checkout need not cover every item; however, a sufficient number should be
covered to demonstrate the examinee’s knowledge. Should supervisors give away their
signatures, unnecessary difficulties can be expected in future routine operations.
A copy of this completed page shall be kept in the individual’s training jacket.
The trainee has completed all PQS requirements for this watchstation. Recommend designation
as a qualified M500 SHOTGUN OPERATOR (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
RECOMMENDED________________________________________ DATE______________
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
Commanding Officer or Designated Representative
SERVICE RECORD ENTRY________________________________ DATE______________
233
WATCHSTATION 305
Estimated completion time: 4 Weeks.
NOTE: THE FOLLOWING WATCHSTATIONS, REGARDLESS OF QUALIFICATIONS ACHIEVED

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: M500 SHOTGUN OPERATOR.
NOTE: PRIOR TO BEGINNING THIS PQS, MEMBER MUST COMPLETE DOMESTIC VIOLENCE
QUESTIONNAIRE IAW TITLE 18 U.S. CODE 922, PAR. G, PAR. 9. COMPLETE
SECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY COMMANDS SECURITY BILL/PLAN. PERSONNEL
ASSIGNED TO AA&E DUTIES MUST BE SCREENED IAW OPNAVINST 5530.13B.
NOTE: THE EQUIPMENT TASKS IN THE WATCHSTATIONS, IF NOT UTILIZED BY CURRENT

COMMAND DO NOT REQUIRE COMPLETION FOR QUALIFICATION, UNLESS
REQUIRED BY POLICY
305.1 PREREQUISITES
FOR OPTIMUM TRAINING EFFECTIVENESS, THE FOLLOWING ITEMS SHOULD BE

COMPLETED PRIOR TO STARTING YOUR ASSIGNED TASKS BUT SHALL BE COMPLETED
PRIOR TO FINAL WATCHSTATION QUALIFICATION.
305.1.1 SCHOOLS: NONE.
.2 COURSES:
M500 Service Shotgun Weapons Safety Training Aid (CANS-M500-1.0) (REQUIRED)
Completed ___________________________________ 4% of Watchstation

(Qualifier and Date)
Unambiguous Warning Device(UWD) AY04 - Airburst Warning Munition

(CANSUWDAY04-1.0) (REQUIRED- IF UTILIZED)

.3 OTHER QUALIFICATIONS: NONE.
.4 PQS QUALIFICATIONS: NONE.
.5 WATCHSTATIONS FROM THIS PQS: NONE.
235
305 M500 SHOTGUN OPERATOR (CONT’D)
305.1 .6 FUNDAMENTALS FROM THIS PQS:
101 Safety

102 Weapon

103 Arms, Ammunition, and Explosives

104 Use of Force

111 M500 Shotgun

.7 SYSTEMS FROM THIS PQS:
205 M500 Shotgun

305.2 TASKS
For the tasks listed below:
A. What are the steps of this procedure?

B. What are the reasons for each step?
C. What control/coordination is required?
D. What means of communications are used?
E. What safety precautions must be observed?
F. What parameters/operating limits must be monitored?
G. Satisfactorily perform this task.
236
Questions
305.2 .1 Load, unload, and combat load the M500 Shotgun. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.2 Field strip the M500 Shotgun. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.3 Clean and lubricate the M500 Shotgun. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.4 Assemble and function check the M500 Shotgun. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.5 Dry fire the M500 Shotgun. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.6 Qualification fire the M500 Shotgun. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.7 Inspect and Donn/Doff range PPE. {2, 3, 4} ABCEFG
___________________________________
.8 Perform M500 Shotgun custody transfer procedures to ABCDEFG

and from an armory or arms locker. {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.9 Identify and inspect M500 Shotgun ammunition. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
237
Questions
305.2 .10 Demonstrate the following M500 Shotgun firing positions: {2, 3, 4} ABCEG
a. Shoulder
b. Hip
___________________________________
.11 Demonstrate the following M500 Shotgun transports: ABEG
a. Strong Side Sling Arms {2, 3, 4}

b. Weak side Sling Arms {2, 3, 4}
c. Cross Body Sling Arms {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Demonstrate the following M500 Shotgun carries: {2, 3, 4} ABEG
a. Alert
b. Ready
c. Tactical
___________________________________
.13 Demonstrate the following M500 Shotgun presentations: {2, 3, 4} ABCEG

b. Weak side Sling Arms
___________________________________
.14 Demonstrate the following M500 Shotgun grip technique. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
COMPLETED .2 AREA COMPRISES 49% OF WATCHSTATION.
305.3 INFREQUENT TASKS: NONE TO BE DISCUSSED.
238
305.4 ABNORMAL CONDITIONS
For the abnormal conditions listed below:
A. What indications and alarms are received?

B. What immediate action is required?
C. What are the probable causes?
D. What operating limitations are imposed?
E. What emergencies or malfunctions may occur if immediate action is not
taken?
F. How does this condition affect other operations/equipment/watchstations?
G. What follow-up action is required?
H. Satisfactorily perform or simulate the corrective/immediate action for this
abnormal condition.
Questions
305.4 .1 Improper assembly. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.2 Worn or broken parts. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.3 Improper loading. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.4 For the following stoppages: ABCDEFGH
a. Audible Pop/Reduced Recoil {2, 3, 4}

b. New Round on Elevator {2, 3, 4}
c. Out of Ammunition {2, 3, 4}
d. Double feed {2, 3, 4}
e. Failure to Extract {2, 3, 4}
f. Fore-end fails to pull to Rear {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
305.5 EMERGENCIES
For the emergencies listed below:
239
E. What other emergencies or malfunctions may occur if immediate action is not
taken?
F. How does this emergency affect other operations/equipment/watchstations?
H. Satisfactorily perform or simulate the immediate action for this emergency.
Questions
305.5 .1 Hangfire/Misfire. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
.2 Cookoff in barrel. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
.3 Negligent discharge. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
305.6 WATCHES – None.
305.7 EXAMINATIONS (OPTIONAL EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY TYCOM/ISIC, ETC.)
305.7 .1 EXAMINATIONS Pass a written examination
___________________________________
240
305.7 .2 EXAMINATIONS Pass an oral examination board
___________________________________
241
306 MP5 (SERIES) SUBMACHINE GUN OPERATOR
CHANGE-1 NOTE: THIS WATCHSTATION DELETED IN CHANGE-1. SEE SUMMARY OF CHANGES.
243
307 M14 SERIES RIFLE OPERATOR
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified M14 SERVICE RIFLE OPERATOR (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
245
WATCHSTATION 307
307 M14 SERIES RIFLE OPERATOR

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: M14 SERVICE RIFLE OPERATOR.

REQUIRED BY POLICY
307.1 PREREQUISITES

.2 COURSES:
M14 Service Rifle Weapons Safety Training Aid (CANSF-M14-1.0) (REQUIRED)

AFCESA - Introduction to Night Vision Devices (Required if utilizing NV) (Course

located at https://golearn.csd.disa.mil)

Warning Shot Training Disc Center for Security Forces, Aug 2003 (REQUIRED – if
providing water side security)

247
307 M14 SERIES RIFLE OPERATOR (CONT’D)
101 Safety

102 Weapon


104 Use of Force

105 Marksmanship

113 M14 Service Rifle

132 Warning Shots (as applicable)

207 M14 Service Rifle

248
307.2 TASKS

Questions
307.2 .1 Load and unload the M14 Service Rifle magazine. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.2 Field strip the M14 Service Rifle. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.3 Perform M14 Service Rifle press check. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.4 Clean and lubricate the M14 Service Rifle. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.5 Assemble and function check the M14 Service Rifle. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.6 Perform M14 Service Rifle zero, True zero and Battlesight ABEFG
zero procedures. {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
249
Questions
307.2 .7 Load and unload the M14 Service Rifle. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.8 Dry fire the M14 Service Rifle. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
9 Qualification fire the M14 Service Rifle. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
.11 Perform M14 Service Rifle custody transfer procedures to ABCDEFG

and from an armory or arms locker. {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Identify and inspect M14 Service Rifle ammunition. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.13 Demonstrate the following M14 Service Rifle firing position ABCEG
and variations with hasty and loop sling:
a. Prone {2, 3, 4}
b. Sitting {2, 3, 4}
c. Kneeling {2, 3, 4}
d. Standing {2, 3, 4}
e. Supported {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.14 Perform M14 Service Rifle low-light/darkness techniques. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
250
Questions
307.2 .15 Demonstrate the M14 Service Rifle grip. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.16 Set the M14 Service Rifle spindle valve. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.17 Demonstrate the following M14 Service Rifle firing techniques: ABCEG
a. Flash sight picture {2, 3, 4}

b. Quick-fire point shooting {3, 4}
c. Quick-fire sighting {3, 4}
d. Pie technique {3, 4}
e. Roll out {3, 4}
f. Pie/Roll out combined {3, 4}
g. Firing from cover {2, 3, 4}
h. Engagement of threats {2, 3, 4}
i. Marking of targets {2, 3, 4}
j. Target detection {2, 3, 4}
k. CBR shooting {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.18 Demonstrate the following M14 Service Rifle carries: {2, 3, 4} ABEG
a. Tactical
b. Ready
c. Alert
___________________________________
.19 Demonstrate the following M14 Service Rifle Engagement ABEG

techniques:
a. Two-shot (controlled pairs) {3, 4}

b. Slow fire {3, 4}
c. Multiple targets {2, 3, 4}
d. Moving targets {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
251
Questions
307.2 .19 Demonstrate the following M14 Service Rifle presentations: {2, 3, 4} ABCEG

___________________________________
.20 Fire the M14 Service Rifle in all modes. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
21 Demonstrate the following M14 Service Rifle transports: {2, 3, 4} ABEG

___________________________________
.22 Install/Assemble, disassemble, operate and perform maintenance on ABCEFG

the following the M14 Service Rifle equipment:
a. M12 Blank Firing Attachment and M3 Breech Shield {2, 3, 4}

b. M5 Winter Trigger Kit {2, 3, 4}
c. M6 Bayonet Knife and M8A1 Scabbard {3, 4}
d. M2 Bipod {1, 2, 3, 4}
e. M2 Aiming Device {2, 3, 4}
f. M15 Rifle Training Sighting {2, 3, 4}
g. Sight telescopic rifle {3, 4}
h. Line throwing kit {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
NOTE: IF WEAPONS OPERATOR IS REQUIRED TO CONDUCT WARNING SHOTS AS PART

OF HIS/HER DUTIES, COMPLETE FOLLOWING LINE ITEMS:
.23 Demonstrate the proper breakdown and setup of an ammunition

belt for warning shots employment: ABCEG
___________________________________
252
Questions
307.2 .24 Demonstrate, through live fire or use of simulator, the application
of warning shots from a pier ABCEFG
a. Normal Conditions
b. Low visibility
c. Darkness
d. Using Night Vision Device
___________________________________
.25 Demonstrate, through live fire or use of simulator, the application

of warning shots from a small boat (i.e. Security Boat) ABCEFG
b. Low visibility
c. Darkness
___________________________________

of warning shots from a ship ABCEFG
b. Low visibility
c. Darkness
e. High free board (if applicable)
___________________________________
253

taken?
abnormal condition. 307 M14 Series Rifle Operator (Cont’d)
Questions
___________________________________
___________________________________
.3 Improper loading {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.4 The following weapon stoppages: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
a. Bolt forward
b. Bolt Locked to Rear
c. Brass Chamber Obstruction
___________________________________
.5 Chemical light puncture. ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
254
307.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
Questions
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
255
___________________________________
.2 EXAMINATIONS Pass an oral examination board
___________________________________
256
308 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE OPERATOR
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified M16 (SERIES) RIFLE OPERATOR (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
257
WATCHSTATION 308
308 M16 (SERIES) SERVICE RIFLE OPERATOR

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: M16 (SERIES) SERVICE RIFLE
OPERATOR.

REQUIRED BY POLICY
308.1 PREREQUISITES

.2 COURSES:
M16A3 Service Rifle Weapons Safety Training Aid (CANS-M16WS-1.0) (REQUIRED)

AFCESA - Introduction to Night Vision Devices (REQUIRED IF UTILIZING NV) (Course


Warning Shot Training Disc Center for Security Forces, Aug 2003 (REQUIRED – if

259
308 M16 (SERIES) SERVICE RIFLE OPERATOR (CONT’D)
308.1 .5 WATCHSTATIONS FROM THIS PQS: NONE.
.6 FUNDAMENTALS FROM THIS PQS:
101 Safety

102 Weapon


104 Use of Force

105 Marksmanship

106 Night Vision

114 M16 (Series) Service Rifle


260
308.1 .7 SYSTEMS FROM THIS PQS:
208 M16 (Series) Service Rifle

308.2 TASKS

Questions
308.2 .1 Load and unload the M16 (Series) Service Rifle magazine. ABEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.2 Field strip the M16 (Series) Service Rifle. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.3 Perform M16 (Series) Service Rifle press check. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.4 Clean and lubricate the M16 (Series) Service Rifle. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.5 Assemble and function check the M16 (Series) Service Rifle. ABEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
261
Questions
308.2 .6 Perform M16 (Series) Service Rifle zero, True zero and ABEFG
Battlesight zero procedures. {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.7 Load and unload the M16 (Series) Service Rifle. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.8 Dry fire the M16 (Series) Service Rifle. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.9 Qualification fire the M16 (Series) Service Rifle. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
.11 Perform M16 (Series) Service Rifle custody transfer ABCDEFG

procedures to and from an armory or arms locker. {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Identify and inspect M16 (Series) Service Rifle ammunition. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.13 Demonstrate the following M16 (Series) Service Rifle firing position ABCEG
and variations with hasty and loop sling:
a. Prone {2, 3, 4}
e. Supported {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
262
Questions
308.2 .14 Perform M16 (Series) Service Rifle low-light/darkness and NV ABEG
techniques. {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.15 Demonstrate the M16 (Series) Service Rifle grip. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.16 Demonstrate the following M16 (Series) Service Rifle ABCEG

firing techniques:
a. Flash sight picture {2, 3, 4}
b. Quick-fire point shooting {3, 4}
c. Quick-fire sighting {3, 4}
d. Pie technique {3, 4}
e. Roll out {3, 4}
f. Pie/Roll out combined {3, 4}
g. Firing from cover {2, 3, 4}
h. Engagement of threats {2, 3, 4}
i. Marking of targets {2, 3, 4}
j. Target detection {2, 3, 4}
k. CBR shooting {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.17 Demonstrate the following M16 (Series) Service Rifle carries: {2, 3, 4} ABEG
a. Tactical
b. Ready
c. Alert
___________________________________
.18 Demonstrate the following M16 (Series) Service Rifle Engagement ABEG
techniques:
a. Two-shot (controlled pairs) {3, 4}
b. Slow fire {3, 4}
c. Multiple targets {2, 3, 4}
d. Moving targets {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
263
Questions
308.2 .19 Demonstrate the following M16 (Series) Service Rifle ABCEG
presentations: {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.20 Fire the M16 (Series) Service Rifle in all modes. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.21 Demonstrate the following M16 (Series) Service Rifle transports: ABEG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.22 Install/Assemble, disassemble, operate and perform ABCEFG

maintenance on the following the M16 (Series) Service Rifle:
a. Enhanced Combat Optical Sight-Navy (ECOS-N) (MK18) {2, 3, 4}
b. Visible Bright Light (VBL) II (MK18) {2, 3, 4}
c. M15A2 Blank Firing Adapter (M16) M23 Blank Firing Adapter (MK18/M4)
{2, 3, 4}
d. Top Sling (Sung) Adapter Kit {2, 3, 4}
e. M7 Bayonet-Knife W/ Scabbard and M9 Multipurpose Bayonet System
{2, 3, 4}
f. M4 Adapter Rail Covers (M4/M5) {2, 3, 4}
g. Locking Plate (M16/M4) {2, 3, 4}
h. Rail Grabber/Picatinny Rail Grabber {2, 3, 4}
i. Backup Iron Sight {2, 3, 4}
j. M68, Close Combat Optic (AIMPOINT): {2, 3, 4}
k. AN/PVS-14, Monocular Night Vision Device: {2, 3, 4}
l. AN/PAQ-4B/C, Infrared Aiming Light: {2, 3, 4}
m. AN/PVS-7 (Series) Goggles: {2, 3, 4}
n. AN/PEQ-2A, Target Pointer/Illuminator/Aiming Light: {2, 3, 4}
o. AN/PAS-13B (V2), Medium Thermal Weapon Sight {2, 3, 4}
p. AN/PVS-4, Night Vision Sight: {2, 3, 4}
q. Borelight [ref. e, ch. 2, pg. 2-25 thru 2-26] {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
264
Questions
308.2 .23 Fire the M16 (Series) Service Rifle using NV, Laser optics, ABEG
and thermal imagers {3, 4}
___________________________________

.24 Demonstrate the proper breakdown and setup of an ammunition

Magazine for warning shots employment: ABCEG
___________________________________
.25 Demonstrate, through live fire or use of simulator, the

application of warning shots from a pier ABCEFG
b. Low visibility
c. Darkness
___________________________________

application of warning shots from a small boat (i.e. Security Boat) ABCEFG
b. Low visibility
c. Darkness
___________________________________

application of warning shots from a ship ABCEFG
b. Low visibility
c. Darkness
___________________________________
265
308.3 INFREQUENT TASKS – NONE TO BE DISDUSSED.

taken?
abnormal condition.
Questions
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.4 Damaged or ruptured lithium/mercury battery. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.5 Damaged NV optics or reflective coating. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
266
Questions
308.4 .6 The following weapon stoppages: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
a. Bolt forward
e. Failure to of round to fire
f. Failure to Unlock
g. Failure to Extract
h. Failure to Eject
i. Failure to Cock
j. Failure to Feed
k. Failure to Chamber
l. Failure to Lock
___________________________________
308.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
H. Satisfactorily perform or simulate the immediate action for this emergency?
Questions
___________________________________
___________________________________
267
Questions
308.5 .3 Negligent discharge. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
268
309 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER OPERATOR
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER OPERATOR (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
269
WATCHSTATION 309

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER
OPERATOR.

REQUIRED BY POLICY
309.1 PREREQUISITES

.2 COURSES: NONE.
101 Safety

102 Weapon

271
309 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER OPERATOR (CONT’D)
309.1.6 103 Arms, Ammunition, and Explosives

104 Use of Force

105 Marksmanship

115 M203 Grenade Launcher

209 M203 Grenade Launcher

309.2 TASKS

Questions
309.2 .1 Field strip the M203 Grenade Launcher. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
272
Questions
309.2.2 Clean and lubricate the M203 Grenade Launcher. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.3 Assemble and function check the M203 Grenade Launcher. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.4 Load and unload the M203 Grenade Launcher. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.5 Dry fire the M203 Grenade Launcher. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.6 Qualification fire the M203 Grenade Launcher {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG

using the following types of rounds:
a. Star Parachute
b. Non-lethal (Baton, Rubber Ball, CS)
c. Smoke
d. HE
___________________________________
___________________________________
.8 Perform M203 Grenade Launcher custody transfer ABCDEFG

___________________________________
.9 Identify and inspect M203 Grenade Launcher ammunition. ABEG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
273
Questions
309.2 .11 Demonstrate the following M203 Grenade Launcher ABCEG
firing position:
a. Prone {2, 3, 4}
b. Sitting (Crossed-ankle and Cross-legged) {2, 3, 4}
e. Squatting {2, 3, 4}
f. Fighting {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Demonstrate the following M203 Grenade Launcher ABCEG

firing and engagement techniques:
a. CBR shooting {2, 3, 4}

b. Range estimation procedures {2, 3, 4}
c. For the following types of targets: {2, 3, 4}
1. Point {2, 3, 4}
2. Area {2, 3, 4}
3. Linear {2, 3, 4}
4. Deep {2, 3, 4}
5. Linear with depth {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
309.3 INFREQUENT TASKS: NONE.

taken?
abnormal condition.
274
Questions
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.4 Weapon stoppages. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
Completed .4 area comprises 10% of watchstation.
309.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
Questions
___________________________________
___________________________________
275
Questions
309.5 .4 Dud round.({2, 3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
276
277
311 GRENADIER
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified GRENADIER (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
279
WATCHSTATION 311
311 GRENADIER
Estimated completion time: 4 Weeks

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: GRENADIER.

REQUIRED BY POLICY
311.1 PREREQUISITES

.2 COURSES: NONE.
101 Safety


104 Use of Force

117 Grenade

281
311 GRENADIER (CONT’D)
211 Grenade

311.2 TASKS

Questions
311.2 .1 Demonstrate grenade gripping procedure. ABCEG
___________________________________
.2 Demonstrate the following grenade throwing positions: ABCEFG
a. Standing {3, 4}
b. Prone-to-Standing {3, 4}
c. Kneeling {3, 4}
d. Prone-to- Kneeling {3, 4}
e. Pull and Drop {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.3 Demonstrate storing of grenade in vest/pouch or deployment container. A B C E F G

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.4 Employ grenade from vest/pouch or deployment container. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
282
311 GRENADIER (CONT’D))
311.2 .5 Assemble/disassemble the M69 practice grenade and fuze. {2, 3, 4} ABCEFG
___________________________________
.6 Unpackage and package grenade from stowage container. ABCEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.7 Employ inert grenade. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
.9 Perform grenade custody transfer procedures to and ABCDEFG

from an armory, arms locker, or magazine. {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 Identify and inspect grenades and fuzes. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.11 Perform maintenance and lubrication on grenades. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.12 Qualify with assigned grenades. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
311.3 INFREQUENT TASKS
For the infrequent tasks listed below:
283
E. What is the alarm set point?
F. What parameters must be monitored?
G. How are the monitored parameters changed by this infrequent task?
H. What conditions require this infrequent task?
I. Satisfactorily perform or simulate this infrequent task.
Questions
311.3 .1 Donn/Doff chemical protective mask for CS grenade use. ABCDFHI
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.2 Perform chemical grenade personnel decontamination ABCDFHI

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________

taken?
abnormal condition.
284
Questions
311.4 .1 CS grenade misfire. {2, 3, 4} ABCEFGH
___________________________________
.2 Riot grenade Hangfire. {2, 3, 4} ABCEFGH
___________________________________
311.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
Questions
311.5 .1 Accidentally dropped live grenades afloat and ashore. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.2 Accidental dropped live grenade in throwing pit. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
311.6 WATCHES: None.
285
___________________________________
___________________________________
286
312 MK46 MOD 0 LIGHT MACHINE GUN/M249 SQUAD

AUTOMATIC WEAPON (SAW) OPERATOR
287
313 M240 (B/N) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN OPERATOR
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified M240 (B/N) MEDIUM MACHINEGUN OPERATOR (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
289
WATCHSTATION 313
313 M240 (B/N) MEDIUM MACHINEGUN OPERATOR

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: M240 (B/N) MEDIUM
MACHINEGUN OPERATOR.
NOTE: PERSONNEL ASSIGNED TO AA&E DUTIES MUST BE SCREENED IAW OPNAVINST
5530.13B.
REQUIRED BY POLICY.
313.1 PREREQUISITES

.2 COURSES:


Warning Shot Training Disc Center for Security Forces, Aug 2003 (Required - if

101 Safety

291
313 M240 (B/N) MEDIUM MACHINEGUN OPERATOR (CONT’D)
313.1 .6 102 Weapon


104 Use of Force

105 Marksmanship

106 Night Vision

119 M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun


213 M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun

292
313.2 TASKS

Questions
313.2 .1 Load and unload the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun. ABEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.2 Field strip the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.3 Clean and lubricate the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun. ABEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.4 Assemble and function check the M240 (B/N) Medium

Machine Gun. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.5 Perform M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun zero procedures. ABEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.6 Qualification fire the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
293
Questions
313.2 .7 Inspect and Donn/Doff range PPE. {2, 3, 4} ABCEFG
___________________________________
.8 Perform M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun custody transfer

procedures to and from an armory or arms locker. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.9 Identify and inspect M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun ammunition. ABEG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 Set M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun gas settings. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.11 Demonstrate the following M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun

firing positions: ABCEG
a. Shoulder, Offhand({2, 3, 4}
b. Prone (Bipod/Tripod steadied) {2, 3, 4}
c. Fighting (Bipod/Tripod steadied) {2, 3, 4}
d. Underarm {3, 4}
e. Hip {3, 4}
f. Tactical vehicle (HMMWV) {3, 4}
g. Waterborne vessel/Security boat {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Perform M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun low-light/darkness and

NV techniques including bipod/tripod and mount firing. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.13 Demonstrate the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun grip. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
294
Questions
313.2 .14 Demonstrate the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun CBRN firing
techniques including bipod/tripod and mount firing. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.15 Demonstrate the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun techniques: ABEG
a. Target tracking {2, 3, 4}
b. Engagement of targets at unknown distance {2, 3, 4}
c. Aerial engagement {2, 3, 4}
d. Traverse and search {2, 3, 4}
e. Direct lay {2, 3, 4}
f. Application of fire {2, 3, 4}
g. Fire adjustment {2, 3, 4}
h. Movement, speed and alignment {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 Mount and unmount the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun from: ABEG
a. Tripod {2, 3, 4}
b. Bipod {2, 3, 4}
b. CSW Mount:
1. M6 MG Pedestal and M197 MG Mount (HMMWV) {3, 4}
2. MK 93 Mod 2 MG Mount {2, 3, 4}
3. MK 97 Mod 0 MG Mount {2, 3, 4}
4. MK 99 Mod 1 MG Mount {2, 3, 4}
3. MK 105 MG Mount {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.17 Demonstrate the following M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun

engagement techniques: ABEG
a. Multiple targets {2, 3, 4}
b. Moving targets {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.18 Demonstrate the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun BFA firing check. ABEG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
295
Questions
313.2 .19 Demonstrate the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun barrel/hot
barrel change, tagging, and disposition procedures. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.20 Enter appropriate data into MG Log Book. {2, 3, 4} ABDG
___________________________________
.21 Perform M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun barrel gauging and
head space. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.22 Install/Assemble, disassemble, operate and perform maintenance on

the following the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun: ABCEFG
a. M145 Straight Telescope {2, 3, 4}

b. AN/PVS-4, Night Vision Sight {2, 3, 4}
c. AN/PEQ-5, Carbine Visible Laser {2, 3, 4}
d. AN/PEQ-2A, Target Pointer/Illuminator/Aiming Light {2, 3, 4}
e. AN/PAQ-4B/C, Infrared Aiming Light: {2, 3, 4}
f. M24 Blank Firing Adapter/M21 Blank Firing Adapter and Discriminator
{2, 3, 4}
g. AN/PAS-13B, Thermal Sight {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.23 Fire the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun using NV, Laser optics,
and thermal imagers. {3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
___________________________________
296
Questions
313.2.25 Demonstrate the proper breakdown and setup of an
ammunition belt for warning shots employment. ABCEG
___________________________________

application of warning shots from a pier: ABCEFG
b. Low visibility
c. Darkness
___________________________________
.27 Demonstrate, through live fire or use of simulator, the application of

warning shots from a small boat (i.e. Security Boat) A
b. Low visibility
c. Darkness
___________________________________
.28 Demonstrate, through live fire or use of simulator, the application of

warning shots from a ship A
b. Low visibility
c. Darkness
___________________________________
297

Questions
313.3 .1 Demonstrate the M240 (B/N) Medium Machine Gun jammed
cocking handle procedure. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________

taken?
abnormal condition.
Questions
___________________________________
___________________________________
298
Questions
313.4 .3 Improper loading {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.4 Exchanged or improper weapon parts {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
a. Stuck Cartridge Case or Live Round

b. Runaway machine gun
c. Failure to Fire
d. Sluggish Operation
e. Failure to Chamber
f. Double Feed
g. Failure to Feed
h. Failure to Extract
i. Failure to Eject
k. Failure to Cock
l. Failure to Lock
m. Ruptured Case
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.8 Perform combat clearing procedures. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
299
313.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
Questions
___________________________________
.2 Cookoff in barrel after gun malfunction. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
300
313.7 .2 EXAMINATIONS Pass an oral examination board
___________________________________
301
314 M60 (SERIES) MACHINEGUN OPERATOR
303
315 M-2 .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN OPERATOR
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified M-2 .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINEGUN OPERATOR (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
305
WATCHSTATION 315
315 M-2 .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINEGUN OPERATOR

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: M-2 .50 CALIBER HEAVY
MACHINEGUN OPERATOR.

5530.13B.

REQUIRED BY POLICY
315.1 PREREQUISITES

.2 COURSES:


Warning Shot Training Disc Center for Security Forces, Aug 2003 (Required – if

307
315 M-2 .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINEGUN OPERATOR (CONT’D)
101 Safety

102 Weapon


104 Use of Force

105 Marksmanship

106 Night Vision

121 M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun


308
215 M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun

315.2 TASKS

Questions
315.2 .1 Load and unload the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun. ABEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.2 Field strip the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.3 Clean and lubricate the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun. ABEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.4 Assemble and function check the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy

___________________________________
.5 Perform M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun zero procedures. ABEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
309
Questions
315.2 .6 Qualification fire the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
___________________________________
.8 Perform M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun custody transfer ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.9 Identify and inspect M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun ammunition. ABEG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 Demonstrate the following M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun
firing positions: ABCEG
a. Prone {2, 3, 4}
c. Standing {2, 3, 4}
d. Tactical vehicle (HMMWV) {3, 4}
e. Waterborne vessel/Security boat {3, 4}
___________________________________
.11 Perform M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun low-light/darkness and
NV techniques including bipod/tripod and mount firing. {3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.12 Complete an MG Range Card. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
310
Questions
315.2 .13 Demonstrate the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun CBRN firing
techniques including bipod/tripod and mount firing. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.14 Demonstrate the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun techniques: ABEG
___________________________________
.15 Mount and unmount M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun from: ABEG
a. Tripod {2, 3, 4}
b. Bipod {2, 3, 4}
b. CSW Mount:
1. MK26 MG Mount {2, 3, 4}
2. M66 MG Mount Ring (HMMWV) {3, 4}
3. MK 95 MG Mount {2, 3, 4}
4. MK 64 MG Mount {2, 3, 4}
5. MK 93 Mod 0/1 MG Mount {2, 3, 4}
6. 6650 .50 Caliber MG Mount {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 Demonstrate the following M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun
engagement techniques: ABEG

___________________________________
.17 Demonstrate the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun BFA firing
check. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
311
Questions
315.2 .18 Demonstrate the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun barrel/hot
barrel change. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.19 Fire the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun in all rates of fire. ABEG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.20 Perform M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun headspace and
timing procedures. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.21 Install/Assemble, disassemble, operate and perform maintenance on

the following the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun: ABCEFG
a. AN/PVS-12, Individual weapon NV Sight {2, 3, 4}

b. M19 Blank Firing Adapter {2, 3, 4}
c. Flash Hider {2, 3, 4}
d. M3 Amplifier and Discriminator {2, 3, 4}
e. AN/PVS-20, Crew Served Weapon NV Sight {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.22 Fire the M-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun using NV, Laser
optics, and thermal imagers. {3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
___________________________________

312
Questions
315.2 .24 Demonstrate the proper breakdown and setup of an ammunition
belt for warning shots employment: ABCEG
___________________________________

of warning shots from a pier ABCEFG
b. Low visibility
c. Darkness
___________________________________

of warning shots from a small boat (i.e. Security Boat) ABCEFG
b. Low visibility
c. Darkness
___________________________________

of warning shots from a ship ABCEFG
b. Low visibility
c. Darkness
___________________________________
313

taken?
abnormal condition.
Questions
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
314
Questions
315.4 .7 The following weapon stoppages: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
a. Stuck/Ruptured Cartridge Case or Live

b. Failure to Fire
c. Sluggish Operation
d. Failure to Chamber
e. Double Feed
f. Failure to Feed
g. Failure to Extract
h. Failure to Eject
i. Failure to Cock
j. Failure to Lock
k. Failure to Unlock
___________________________________
___________________________________
COMPLETED .4 AREA COMPRISES 2% OF WATCHSTATION
315.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
Questions
___________________________________
___________________________________
315
Questions
315.5 .3 Negligent discharge. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
.4 Runaway Gun. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
316
316 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN

OPERATOR
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN OPERATOR (NAVEDTRA
43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
317
WATCHSTATION 316
316 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN OPERATOR

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE
MACHINE GUN OPERATOR.

5530.13B.

REQUIRED BY POLICY
316.1 PREREQUISITES

.2 COURSES:

Completed _________________________________9% of Watchstation

101 Safety

319
316 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN OPERATOR (CONT’D)
316.1 .6 102 Weapon


104 Use of Force

105 Marksmanship

106 Night Vision

122 MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun

216 MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun

316.2 TASKS

320
Questions
316.2 .1 Load and unload the MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine
Gun. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.2 Field strip the MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun. ABEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.3 Clean and lubricate the MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun ABEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.4 Assemble and function check the MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade

___________________________________
.5 Perform MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun zero

and sighting procedures. {2, 3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.6 Qualification fire the MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.7 Inspect and /Doff range PPE. {2, 3, 4} ABCEFG
___________________________________
321
Questions
316.2 .8 Perform MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun custody
transfer procedures to and from an armory or arms locker. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.9 Identify and inspect MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun

ammunition. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.10 Demonstrate the following MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade

Machine Gun firing positions: ABCEG
a. Kneeling {2, 3, 4}
c. Standing {2, 3, 4}
d. Tactical vehicle (HMMWV) {3, 4}
e. Waterborne vessel/Security boat {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.11 Perform MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun low-

light/darkness and NV techniques including bipod/tripod and mount firing.
{2, 3, 4} A B E G
___________________________________
.12 Complete a MG Range Card. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.13 Demonstrate the MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun

CBRN firing techniques including bipod/tripod and mount firing. ABEG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
322
Questions
316.2 .14 Demonstrate the MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine
Gun techniques: ABEG
___________________________________
.15 Mount and unmount MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun
from: ABEG
a. Tripod {2, 3, 4}
b. CSW Mount: {2, 3, 4}
1. MK 64 MG Mount {2, 3, 4}
2. MK 93 Mod 0/1 MG Mount {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 Demonstrate the following MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine

Gun engagement techniques: ABEG
___________________________________
.17 Demonstrate the MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun

flash suppressor tightening. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.18 Install/Assemble, disassemble, operate and perform maintenance

on the following the MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun: ABCEFG
a. AN/TVS-5, Crew Served Weapon NV Sight {2, 3, 4}
b. AN/PAS-13B (V2), Medium Thermal Weapon Sight {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. AN/PVS-20, Crew Served Weapon NV Sight {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
323
Questions
316.2 .19 Fire the MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun using
NV, Laser optics, and thermal imagers. {2, 3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
___________________________________

taken?
abnormal condition.
Questions
___________________________________
___________________________________
324
Questions
316.4 .3 Improper loading {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
___________________________________

a. Sluggish Operation/Erratic Fire
b. Bolt Jammed
c. Bore Obstruction
d. Gun Fires to Soon
e. Short Recoil
f. Top Will Not Close
g. Bad Ammunition
h. Ammunition Feeder Jam
i. Bad Firing Pin
___________________________________
.6 Damaged or ruptured lithium/mercury battery. {1, 2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.7 Damaged NV optics or reflective coating. {1, 2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
___________________________________
316.5 EMERGENCIES

325
taken?
Questions
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.4 Runaway Gun. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
.4 Dud/Dropped live rounds. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
326
___________________________________
___________________________________
327
317 MK38 MOD 1 25MM MACHINE GUN OPERATOR
329
318 MK44 MOD 0/1 GUN WEAPON SYSTEM

OPERATOR
331
319 DESIGNATED MARKSMAN/OBSERVER
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified DESIGNATED MARKSMAN/OBSERVER (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
333
WATCHSTATION 319
319 DESIGNATED MARKSMAN OBSERVER

COMMAND DO NOT REQUIRE COMPLETION FOR QUALIFICATION UNLESS REQUIRED
BY POLICY
319.1 PREREQUISITES

319.1 .1 SCHOOLS: NONE.
.2 COURSES: NONE.
101 Safety

335
319 DESIGNATED MARKSMAN OBSERVER (CONT’D)
319.1.6 103 Arms, Ammunition, and Explosives

104 Use of Force

105 Marksmanship

127 Designated Marksman Observer

319.2 TASKS

Questions
319.2 .1 Adjust rifle scope . {3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.2 Set up M49 observation telescope . {3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.3 Use M49 or binoculars to estimate range. {3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
336
Questions
319.2 .4 Make a range card. {3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.5 Perform as a observer in a team. {3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.6 Perform as a marksman. {3, 4} A B EFG
___________________________________
.7 Perform calling your shots during practice fire . {3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.8 Perform rifle zero procedures. {3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.9 Perform designated marksman observer qualification fire. ABCDEFG

{3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 Inspect and Donn/Doff range PPE. {3, 4} ABCEFG
___________________________________
.11 Perform custody transfer procedures to ABCDEFG

and from an armory or arms locker. {3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Identify and inspect rifle ammunition. {3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
337
Questions
319.2 .13 Demonstrate the following firing position ABCEG
and variations with hasty and loop sling: {3, 4}
a. Prone
b. Sitting
c. Kneeling
d. Standing
e. Supported
f. Hawkins
___________________________________
.14 Demonstrate the following rifle firing techniques: {3, 4} ABCEG
a. Flash sight picture

b. Quick-fire point shooting
c. Quick-fire sighting
d. Pie technique
e. Roll out
f. Pie/Roll out combined
g. Firing from cover
h. Engagement of threats
i. Marking of targets
j. Target detection
k. CBR shooting
___________________________________
.15 Perform low-light/darkness techniques. {3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.16 Demonstrate Rifle grip. {3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
338
Questions
319.2 .17 Demonstrate the following Rifle presentations: {3, 4} ABCEG

___________________________________
.18 Demonstrate the following Rifle transports: {3, 4} ABEG

___________________________________

taken?
abnormal condition.
319.4 .1 Improper assembly. {3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
339
Questions
319.4 .2 Worn or broken parts. {3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.3 Improper loading {3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
319.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
Questions
319.5 .1 Hangfire/Misfire. {3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
.2 Team member injured. {3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
.3 Negligent discharge. {3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
340
319.6 WATCHES
319.6 .1 STAND THE FOLLOWING WATCHES UNDER INSTRUCTION:
Designated Marksman Observer (3 times)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
319.6.2 STAND THE FOLLOWING WATCHES UNDER QUALIFIED SUPERVISION:
Designated Marksman Observer (3 times)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
341
320 40MM SALUTING MOUNT OPERATOR
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified 40MM SALUTING MOUNT OPERATOR (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
343
WATCHSTATION 320

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: 40MM SALUTING MOUNT
OPERATOR

5530.13B.

REQUIRED BY POLICY
320.1 PREREQUISITES


:
101 Safety


125 40MM Saluting Mount

345
320 40MM SALUTING MOUNT OPERATOR (CONT’D)
320.1.6 SYSTEMS FROM THIS PQS:
219 40MM Saluting Mount

320.2 TASKS

Questions
320.2 .1 Load and unload the 40MM Saluting Mount. ABEFG
___________________________________
.2 Assemble 40MM Saluting Mount. ABEFG
___________________________________
.3 Disassemble 40MM Saluting Mount. ABEFG
___________________________________
.4 Clean and lubricate the 40MM Saluting Mount. ABEFG
___________________________________
.5 Familiarization fire the 40MM Saluting Mount. ABEFG
___________________________________
346
Questions
320.2 .6 Inspect and Donn/Doff PPE. ABCEFG
___________________________________
.7 Perform 40MM Saluting Mount ammunition custody transfer

procedures to and from issuing point. ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.8 Identify and inspect 40MM Saluting Mount ammunition. ABEG
___________________________________
.9 Inspect and install 40MM Saluting Mount safety plug. ABEG
___________________________________
320.3 INFREQUENT TASKS – None to be discussed.

taken?
abnormal condition.
347
Questions
320.4 .1 Cast loose. ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.2 Improper assembly. ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.3 Worn or broken parts. ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.4 Improper loading ABCDEFG
___________________________________
320.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
Questions
320.5 .1 Hangfire/Misfire. ABCDEGH
___________________________________
COMPLETED .6 AREA COMPRISES *% OF WATCHSTATION.
348
___________________________________
___________________________________
349
321 M107 LONG RANGE SNIPER RIFLE OPERATOR
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified M107 LONG RANGE SNIPER RIFLE OPERATOR (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
351
WATCHSTATION 321
321 M107 LONG RANGE SNIPER RIFLE

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: M107 LONG RANGE SNIPER
RIFLE OPERATOR.

COMMAND DO NOT REQUIRE COMPLETION FOR QUALIFICATION UNLESS REQUIRED
BY POLICY
321.1 PREREQUISITES

.2 COURSES: NONE.
101 Safety

102 Weapon


353
321.1 .6 104 Use of Force

105 Marksmanship

126 M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle

220 M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle

321.2 TASKS

Questions
321.2 .1 Load and unload the M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle magazine.
{3, 4} A B E F G
___________________________________
.2 Field strip the M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle. {3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
354
Questions
321.2 .3 Perform M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle press check. {3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.4 Clean and lubricate the M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle. {3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.5 Assemble and function check the M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle. ABEFG
{3, 4}
___________________________________
.6 Perform M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle zero, True zero and
Battlesight zero procedures. {3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.7 Load and unload the M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle. {3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.8 Dry fire the M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle. {3, 4} ABEFG
___________________________________
.9 Qualification fire the M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle. {3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.10 Inspect and Donn/Doff range PPE. {3, 4} ABCEFG
___________________________________
.11 Perform M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle custody transfer procedures A B C D E F G
to and from an armory or arms locker. {3, 4}
___________________________________
355
Questions
321.2 .12 Identify and inspect M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle ammo. {3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
.13 Demonstrate the following M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle firing position A B C E G
and variations with hasty and loop sling: {3, 4}
a. Prone
b. Sitting
c. Supported
___________________________________
.14 Demonstrate the following M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle techniques: ABCEG
{3, 4}
a. Flash sight picture

b. Quick-fire point shooting
c. Quick-fire sighting
d. Pie technique
e. Roll out
f. Pie/Roll out combined
g. Firing from cover
h. Engagement of threats
i. Marking of targets
j. Target detection
k. CBR shooting
___________________________________
.15 Perform M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle low-light/darkness techniques. ABEG
{3, 4}
___________________________________
.16 Demonstrate the M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle grip. {3, 4} ABEG
___________________________________
356
Questions
321.2 .17 Demonstrate the following M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle carries: {3, 4} ABEG
a. Tactical
b. Ready
c. Alert
___________________________________
.18 Demonstrate the following M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle engagement ABEG
techniques: {3, 4}
a. Two-shot (controlled pairs)

b. Slow fire
c. Multiple targets
d. Moving targets
___________________________________
.19 Demonstrate the following M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle presentations: A B C E G
{3, 4}

___________________________________
.20 Demonstrate the following M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle transports: ABEG
{3, 4}

___________________________________
357
Questions
321.2 .21 Install/Assemble, disassemble, operate and perform maintenance on ABCEFG
the following the M107 Long Range Sniper Rifle equipment: {3, 4}
a. Sight telescopic rifle
___________________________________

taken?
abnormal condition.
Questions
321.4 .1 Improper assembly. {3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.2 Worn or broken parts. {3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.3 Improper loading {3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
358
Questions
321.4 .4 The following weapon stoppages: {3, 4} ABCDEFGH
a. Bolt forward
___________________________________
321.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
Questions
321.5 .1 Hangfire/Misfire. {3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
.2 Cookoff in barrel. {3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
.3 Negligent discharge. {3, 4} ABCDEGH
___________________________________
359
___________________________________
___________________________________
360
322 CLEARING BARREL SUPERVISOR
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified CLEARING BARREL SUPERVISOR (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
361
WATCHSTATION 321

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: CLEARING BARREL SUPERVISOR

REQUIRED BY POLICY
322.1 PREREQUISITES

322.1.1 SCHOOLS: None.
.2 COURSES: NONE.
.4 PQS QUALIFICATIONS: NOTE: THE CLEARING BARREL SUPERVISOR MUST BE

QUALIFIED WITH THE WEAPON BEING SUPERVISED
M9 Service Pistol Operator (NAVEDTRA 43466-1A), 301



MK25 Pistol Operator (NAVEDTRA 43466-1A), 304

363
322 CLEARING BARREL SUPERVISOR (CONT’D)
322.1 .4 .38 Caliber Revolver Operator (NAVEDTRA 43466-1A), 305

.5 WATCHSTATIONS FROM THIS PQS: NOTE: THE CLEARING BARREL SUPERVISOR

MUST BE QUALIFIED WITH THE WEAPON BEING
SUPERVISED
305 M500 Shotgun Operator

306 MP5 (Series) Submachine Gun Operator

307 M14 Service Rifle Operator

308 M16 (Series) Rifle Operator

128 Clearing Barrel Supervisor

.7 SYSTEMS FROM THIS PQS: NONE.
322.2 TASKS

364
Questions
322.2 .1 Supervise the loading of the M9 Using clearing barrel
procedures. (3 times) ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
Questions
322.2.2 Supervise making ready the M9 Using clearing barrel procedures.
(3 times) ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.3 Supervise the unloading of the M9 Using Clearing Barrel ABCDEFG

procedures. (3 times)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
365
322.2 .4 Supervise showing clear the M9 Using Clearing Barrel procedures.
(3 times) ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.5 Supervise the loading of the M11 Using clearing barrel procedures.

(3 times) ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
Questions
322.2 .6 Supervise making ready the M11 Using clearing barrel ABCDEFG
procedures.(3 times)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
366
322.2 .7 Supervise the unloading of the M11 Using Clearing Barrel ABCDEFG
procedures.(3 times)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.8 Supervise showing clear the M11 Using Clearing Barrel ABCDEFG

___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.9 Supervise the loading of the M14 Using clearing barrel ABCDEFG

___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
367
Questions
322.2 .10 Supervise making ready the M14 Using clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.11 Supervise the unloading of the M14 Using Clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.12 Supervise showing clear the M14 Using Clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
368
Questions
322.2 .13 Supervise the loading of the MP-5 Using clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.14 Supervise making ready the MP-5 Using clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.15 Supervise the unloading of the MP-5 Using Clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
369
Questions
322.2 .16 Supervise showing clear the MP-5 Using Clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.17 Supervise the loading of the M16 Using clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.18 Supervise making ready the M16 Using clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
370
Questions
322.2 .19 Supervise the unloading of the M16 Using Clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.20 Supervise showing clear the M16 Using Clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.21 Supervise the loading of the Model 500 Using clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
371
Questions
322.2 .22 Supervise making ready the Model 500 Using clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.23 Supervise the unloading of the Model 500 Using Clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.24 Supervise showing clear the Model 500 Using Clearing barrel ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
372
Questions
322.2 .25 Inspect the clearing barrel for the following: ABEFG
a. Proper mounting/location
b. Material Condition/cleanliness
c. Correct posted procedures
___________________________________
Questions
322.2.26 Inspect the area behind and around the clearing barrel. ABEFG
___________________________________
.27 Account for shooter rounds prior to loading/after unloading. ABCDEFG
___________________________________

Questions
322.3 .1 Complete negligent discharge report/message. ABCDHI
___________________________________
.2 Perform negligent discharge procedures. ABCDHI
___________________________________
373
322.4 ABNORMAL CONDITIONS – None to be discussed.
322.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
Questions
322.5 .1 Personnel casualty. ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
322.6 WATCHES
Clearing Barrel Supervisor (3 times)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
374
322.6 .2 STAND THE FOLLOWING WATCHES UNDER QUALIFIED SUPERVISION:
Clearing Barrel Supervisor (3 times)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
375
323 DUTY ARMORER
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified DUTY ARMORER (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
377
WATCHSTATION 323
323 DUTY ARMORER

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: DUTY ARMORER.

REQUIRED BY POLICY
323.1 PREREQUISITES

.2 COURSES: NONE.
.5 WATCHSTATIONS FROM THIS PQS:
322 Clearing Barrel Supervisor

.6 FUNDAMENTALS FROM THIS PQS: NONE.
323.2 TASKS

379
323 DUTY ARMORER (CONT’D)
Questions
323.2 .1 Issue weapons, ammunition, and equipment using SOPs: ABCEFG
a. 1149 Issuing procedures

b. Maintain 1149 Log
c. Close out an 1149
___________________________________
.2 Break out and issue grenades. ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.3 Break out and issue flares/chemical lights. ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.4 Verify personnel qualification/authorization to carry. ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.5 Receive, inspect, and inventory all returning weapons, ammunition,

and equipment:
a. Weapons ABCDEFG
b Equipment ABCDEFG
c. Ammunition ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.6 Conduct daily inventory of small arms/ammunition. ABCDEFG
___________________________________
380
323.2 .7 Conduct monthly inventory of small arms. ABCDEFG
___________________________________
Questions
.8 Inspect magazine/RSL. ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.9 Maintain visitor log. ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.10 Maintain Key Custody logs. ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.11 Operate and log use of the IDS Systems. ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.2 AREA COMPRISES 20% OF WATCHSTATION.

Questions
323.3 .1 Inspect grenades/rounds prior to returning to the magazine. ABCDEFGHI
___________________________________
381
323.3 .2 Inventory grenades/rounds and seal container. ABCDEFGHI
___________________________________
Questions
.3 Perform magazine/RSL/Magazine upkeep/maintenance. ABCDEFGHI
___________________________________
.4 Receive and log privately owned weapons. ABCDEFGHI
___________________________________
.5 Perform procedures for loss of the following: ABCDEFGHI
a. Weapon
b. Grenade/ammunition
c. AA&E keys
___________________________________

taken?
abnormal condition.
Questions
323.4 .1 Negligent discharge of a firearm. ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
382
Questions
323.4 .2 Broken/bent AA&E keys. ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.3 Damaged grenade or ammunition. ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.4 Grenade missing safety pin. ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
323.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
Questions
323.5 .1 Fire or high temp in magazine. ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.2 Flooding or flood alarm in magazine. ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.3 Intruder in the armory/magazine. ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
383
Questions
323.5 .4 IDS alarm. ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.5 Unsecured magazine/armory/RSL. ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
323.6 WATCHES
Duty Armorer (3 times)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.2 STAND THE FOLLOWING WATCHES UNDER QUALIFIED SUPERVISION:
Duty Armorer (3 times)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
384
___________________________________
___________________________________
385
324 LINE COACH
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified LINE COACH (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
387
WATCHSTATION 323
324 LINE COACH

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: LINE COACH.
NOTE: THE LINE COACH MUST BE QUALIFIED WITH WEAPON BEING COACHED.

REQUIRED BY POLICY
324.1 PREREQUISITES

.1 SCHOOLS: NONE.
.2 COURSES: Coaching TIPS for (IDC) Workspace Trainer Qualification Program (CNL-
IDC-AP1A) (REQUIRED)

.4 PQS QUALIFICATIONS: SEE NOTE ABOVE.
129 Line Coach

324.2 TASKS

B. What are the reasons for each step
389
324 LINE COACH (CONT’D)
Questions
324.2 .1 Prepare shooters for small arms dry-fire. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.2 Prepare shooters for small arms live-fire. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.3 Prepare shooters for CSW dry-fire. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.4 Prepare shooters for CSW live-fire. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.5 Coach shooters to perform rifle sighting and zeroing. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.6 Coach shooters to perform rifle NV zeroing. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.7 Coach shooters to perform CSW sighting and zeroing. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 Coach shooters to perform CSW NV zeroing. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
390
Questions
324.2 .9 Coach shooters to perform rifle NV sighting and zeroing. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 Coach shooters to engage stationary targets at known and

unknown distance using the following: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
c. CSW
d. NV, Thermal Optics, Lasers, and Scope
e. Shotgun
f. Grenade Launcher
___________________________________
.11 Coach limited exposure time/target engagement with small arms. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Coach shooters to engage targets wearing CBR protective gear

using the following: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
c. CSW
d. Grenade Launcher
e. Shotgun
___________________________________
.13 Coach no light/low light and flashlight techniques for small arms. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
391
Questions
324.2 .14 Coach shooters to engage multiple targets using the following: ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
c. CSW
d. Shotgun
e. Grenade Launcher
___________________________________
.15 Coach shooters to engage moving targets using the following: ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
c. CSW
d. Shotgun
e. Grenade Launcher
___________________________________
.16 Perform shooter marksmanship and remedial training

using the following and associated equipment: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
c. CSW
d. Shotgun
e. Grenade Launcher
___________________________________
.17 Assist in pre-qualification training. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.18 Perform a range orientation brief. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
392
Questions
324.2 .19 Mark and make ready the ready and firing line. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.20 Identify and call shooter saved rounds and alibis. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.21 Instruct shooters on actions if they do not understand commands

during all phases of instruction. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.22 Identify shooter safety violations. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.23 Assist in development of a range premishap plan. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.24 Instruct shooter on Training Time Out procedures. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.25 Coach shooter to perform remedial actions for malfunctions and

stoppages for small arms. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________

stoppages for CSW. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
393
Questions
324.2 27 Coach shooter on weapon handling commands and procedures for
small arms. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.28 Coach shooter on weapon handling commands and procedures for

CSW. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.29 Coach shooter on small arms assembly/disassembly/maintenance. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.30 Coach shooter on CSW arms assembly/disassembly/maintenance. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.31 Coach shooter on small arms/CSW shot grouping. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.32 Conduct shooter small arms/CSW shot grouping analysis and

feedback. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.33 Conduct shooter Grenade Launcher shot analysis and feedback. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
394
Questions
324.2 .34 Coach shooter field firing techniques for including associated
equipment: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
c. CSW
d. Shotgun
e. Grenade Launcher
___________________________________
.35 Coach shooter on weapon handling commands and procedures for

Grenade Launcher. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.36 Coach shooter on Grenade Launcher assembly/disassembly/

maintenance. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________

stoppages for Grenade Launchers. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.38 Prepare shooters for Grenade Launcher dry-fire. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.39 Prepare shooters for Grenade Launcher live-fire. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.40 Coach shooters to perform Grenade Launcher sighting and zeroing. A B C D E F G

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
395
Questions
324.2 .41 Coach shooters on the following NV procedures: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Inspection and Initial Adjustment

b. Alignment Procedures
c. Focus Procedures
d. Image Assessment Procedures
e. SLAP
f. Goggle/Degoggle Procedures
g. Hazards
h. Shooter Preparation
i. Ordnance Employment
___________________________________
.42 Coach shooters for use of the following Grenade Launcher

specialty rounds: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Parachute, B504 Green Star, B505 Red Star

b. B506 Red Smoke, B508 Green Smoke, B509 Yellow Smoke
c. B534 Multiple Projectile, B535 White Star, B536 White Star
d. B567 & BA05 CS
e. Practice, B577
f. Foam Rubber Baton, Non-Lethal BA07
g. Rubber Ball, Non-Lethal BA08
k. Wooden Baton, Non-Lethal BA09
___________________________________
.43 Coach shooters for use of the following 12 GA specialty rounds: ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
a. Door Breaching, Mk 246 Mod 0

b. 12 Gauge Bean Bag, Non-Lethal
c. 12 Gauge, Launching, For Grenade, Non-Lethal
d. 12 Gauge, Rubber, Fin Stabilized, Non-Lethal
e. UWD-AY04 Airburst Warning Device
___________________________________
396
Questions
324.2 .44 Coach the following qualification and familiarization courses of fire:
{2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Basic Handgun Course

b. Navy Handgun Qualification Course
c. Handgun Low-light Course
d. Handgun Practical Weapons Course
e. Rifle Qualification Course
f. Rifle Low-light Course
g. Shotgun Qualification Course
h. Light and Medium Machine Gun Qualification:
i. MG Qualification Course Bipod
j. MG Qualification Course Tripod/T&E Mechanism
k. Weapons Stand/Mount Firing Familiarization
l. Heavy MG Qualification Course
m. Grenade MG Qualification Course
n. Grenade Launcher Qualification Course
___________________________________
.45 Conduct procedures to: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Confront shooter problems/fears

b. Shooter errors
___________________________________
.46 Complete range and shooter checklists. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.47 Demonstrate the use of training and marksmanship devices and

exercises. ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.48 Coach the following pistol firing skills: ABCDEFG
a. Standing Position with Weaver and Isosceles variations {2, 3, 4}

b. Kneeling Position with Weaver and Isosceles variations {2, 3, 4}
c. Prone Position with Weaver and Isosceles variations {2, 3, 4}
d. Crouch Position({2, 3, 4}
397
Questions
324.2 .48 e. Grip: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
1. One Handed(
2. Two Handed(
3. Fist Grip(
4. Palm Support Grip(
5. Weaver Grip(
f. Crouching 360 degree Traverse {3, 4}
g. Kneeling 360 degree Traverse {3, 4}
h. Cover and concealment {2, 3, 4}
i. Firing from Cover {2, 3, 4}
j. Supported Firing Positions: {2, 3, 4}
1. Supported Prone
2. Supported Kneeling
3. Supported Standing
k. Searching and engaging targets from cover: {3, & 4}
1. Pie Technique
2. Roll Out
3. Pie/Roll Out Combination
___________________________________
.49 Coach shooters to load, and combat load (If applicable)

unload the following: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
c. CSW
d. Pyrotechnic Pistol
e. Shotgun
f. Grenade Launcher
___________________________________
.50 Coach shooter in firing MG night fire from Bipod/Tripod. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, & 4
___________________________________
398
Questions
324.2 .51 Coach shooters to load the magazine of the following: ABCDEFG
{2, 3, & 4
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
c. CSW
___________________________________
.52 Coach shooters on the following MG Mount and Bipod/Tripod ABCDEFG

a. Mount
b. Unmount
c. Stow
d. Placing into action
e. Taking out of action
f. Loading of ammunition
___________________________________
.53 Coach shooter in the following machine gun firing positions: ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
a. Prone Position, Bipod Supported

b. Fighting Position, Bipod Supported
c. Prone Position, Tripod Supported
d. Fighting Position, Tripod Supported
___________________________________
.54 Coach shooter on the following pistol presentation skills: ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
a. Presentation from the Ready

b. Presentation from the Alert
c. Presentation from Holster Transport
1. While assuming Kneeling Position
d. Standing Carries Isosceles and Weaver variations:
1. Presentation from the Ready and from the Alert (arms straight)
2. Presentation from the Alert (close quarters, elbows bent)
399
Questions
324.2 .54 e. Standing Holster Transport Isosceles and Weaver variations ABCDEFG
1. While Assuming the Prone Position
f. Isosceles Prone from the Standing Holster Transport
g. Weaver Prone from the Standing Holster Transport
h. Search and Assess
___________________________________
.55 Coach shooter in the following pistol engagement skills: ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
a. Target Detection
b. Double Action Mode
c. Single Action Mode
d. Two-shot
e. Slow Fire
f. Reengagement Techniques
___________________________________
.56 Coach shooter in the following one-handed pistol firing skills: ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
a. One-Handed Presentation and Shooting

1. One-Handed Firing
2. Adjustment of the Standing Position
3. Searching and Assessing after firing
1. Dry Reload
2. Condition 1 Reload
c. One-Handed Remedial Action
d. Presentation from the Holster with the Weak Hand
1. Pistol Rotation Method
2. Hand Rotation Method
3. Knee Placement Method
e. Transferring the Pistol from one hand to the other
___________________________________
400
Questions
324.2.57 Coach shooter in the following advanced pistol firing skills: ABCDEFG
a. Shooting on the Move {3, 4}

b. Moving with the Pistol {3, 4}
1. Alert Position {2, 3, 4}
2. Ready Position {1, 2, 3, 4}
c. Glide Technique {3, 4}
d. Engaging Targets {3, 4}
e. Continue Moving {3, 4}
f. Reloading and Stoppages. {2, 3, 4}
g. Turn and Fire Techniques {3, 4}
___________________________________
.58 Coach shooter in the following rifle presentation skills: ABCDEFG
a. From Tactical Carry {2, 3, 4}

b. From Ready/Alert Carry {2, 3, 4}
c. From Strong Sling Arms Transport {2, 3, 4}
d. From Weakside Sling Arms Transport {2, 3, 4}
e. Search and Assess
1. Searching and assessing to a higher profile {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.59 Coach shooter in machine gun CBRN firing from bipod/Tripod. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.60 Coach shooter on the following MG firing positions: ABCDEFG
a. Underarm {2, 3, 4}
b. Hip Firing {2, 3, 4}
c. Standing (Offhand) {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
401
Questions
324.2 .61 Coach shooter on the following machine gun moving target
engagement skills: ABCDEFG
a. Leads {2, 3, 4}
b. Tracking Techniques {2, 3, 4}
c. Trapping Techniques {2, 3, 4}
d. Position and Aim {2, 3, 4}
e. Bipod Technique {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.62 Coach shooter on the following rifle firing skills: ABCDEFG
a. Prone Position (Moving Forward/Dropping Back into Position) {2, 3, 4}

b. Straight Leg Prone Position with the Hasty/Loop Sling {2, 3, 4}
c. Cocked Leg Prone Position with the Hasty/Loop Sling
d. Sitting Position {2, 3, 4}
e. Crossed Ankle Sitting Position with the Hasty/Loop Sling {2, 3, 4}
f. Crossed Leg Sitting Position with the Hasty/Loop Sling {2, 3, 4}
g. Open Leg Sitting Position with the Hasty/Loop Sling {2, 3, 4}
h. Kneeling Position (Moving Forward/Dropping Back into Position)
{2, 3, 4}
i. High Kneeling Position with the Hasty/Loop Sling {2, 3, 4}
j. Medium Kneeling Position {2, 3, 4}
k. Low Kneeling Position {2, 3, 4}
l. Standing Position with Hasty/Parade Sling {2, 3, 4}
m. Firing from Specific Cover Types
1. Fighting Hole {2, 3, 4}
2. Rooftop {2, 3, 4}
3. Window (Supported/Unsupported) {2, 3, 4}
4. Vehicle {3, 4}
n. Supported Firing Positions {2, 3, 4}
o. Adjustment of Shooting Position {2, 3, 4}
p. Searching for targets and engaging from cover
1. Pie Technique {3, 4}
2. Rollout Technique {3, 4}
3. Combing Techniques {3, 4}
4. Moving Out from Behind Cover {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
402
Questions
324.2 .63 Coach shooter on the following machine gun fire skills: ABCDEFG
a. Traverse and Search from Bipod/Tripod({2, 3, 4}

b. Direct Lay {2, 3, 4}
c. Application of Fire {2, 3, 4}
d. Fire Adjustment
1. Sight Corrections Method {2, 3, 4}
2. Adjusted Aiming Point Method {2, 3, 4}
3. Measurement by Visual Estimation {2, 3, 4}
4. Measurement from a Map {2, 3, 4}
5. Measurement by Pacing {2, 3, 4}
6. Binocular Measurement {2, 3, 4}
7. Measurement by Laser Range Finder {2, 3, 4}
8. Measurement by Firing {2, 3, 4}
9. Measurement by Lateral Distance {2, 3, 4}
e. Movement, Speed and Alignment and reloading {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.64 Coach shooter on the following rifle engagement skills: ABCDEFG
a. Target Detection {2, 3, 4}

b. Identify Target Location {2, 3, 4}
c. Hasty/Detailed Area Search {2, 3, 4}
d. Maintaining Observation {2, 3, 4}
e. Range Estimation and factors effecting
1. Unit of Measure Method {2, 3, 4}
2. Front Sight Post Method({2, 3, 4}
3. Visible Detail Methods({2, 3, 4}
f. Offset Aiming {2, 3, 4}
g. Techniques of Fire
1. Two-shot {2, 3, 4}
2. Single-shot {2, 3, 4}
3. Three Round Burst {2, 3, 4}
h. Engaging Immediate Threat
1. Engaging Multiple Targets {2, 3, 4}
2. Prioritizing Targets {2, 3, 4}
3. Techniques
(a) Prone/Alternate Prone {2, 3, 4}
(b) Sitting {2, 3, 4}
(c) Kneeling {2, 3, 4}
(d) Standing/Modified Standing {2, 3, 4}
(e) Alternate Prone {2, 3, 4}
(f) Kneeling Supported/Unsupported {2, 3, 4}
(g) Urban Operations {2, 3, 4}
403
Questions
324.2 .64 h. 3. (h) Burst Fire/Automatic Position {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
f. Types of Moving Targets {2, 3, 4}
g. Leading and lead types {2, 3, 4}
h. Tracking/Ambush engagement methods {2, 3, 4}
i. Marking of Targets
1. Number of targets and spacing {2, 3, 4}
2. Target exposure time {2, 3, 4}
3. Good/Bad aiming points {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.65 Coach shooters on the following combat/range fire commands:

{2, 3, 4}A B C D E F G
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
c. Shotgun
d. CSW/MG
e. Pyrotechnic Pistol
f. NLW
___________________________________
.66 Coach shooters on MG aerial defense techniques. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.67 Coach shooter on the following MG Grenade Launcher skills: ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
a. Prone Position
b. Kneeling Position
c. Sitting Position
d. Sitting Position Cross-Ankle/Cross-Legged
e. Squatting Position
f. Fighting Position
g. Standing Position
h. Limited Visibility
i. NBC Environment
j. Sensing and Adjustment of Fire
k. Zeroing
l. Range estimation methods
m. Offensive/Defensive employment and considerations
404
Questions
324.2 .67 n. Heavy MG Affects against various target types ABCDEFG
o. Complimentary Effects
p. Danger Space
q. Overhead Fires
___________________________________

Questions
324.3 .1 Assist in development of a range premishap plan. {2, 3, 4} ABCDFGHI
___________________________________

taken?
abnormal condition.
405
Questions
324.4 .1 Perform procedures for shooter failing to clear stoppages or
remedial action. {1, 2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.2 Perform Training Time Out procedures. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.3 Shooter fails to follow/obey orders, procedures or commands. ABCDEFGH

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
324.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
Questions
324.5 .1 Negligent discharge. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.2 Injured wounded shooter/instructor. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
406
324.6 WATCHES
324.6.1 STAND THE FOLLOWING WATCHES UNDER INSTRUCTION:
LINE COACH (3 times) (FOR ALL W EAPONS COACHED)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
324.6.2 LINE COACH (3 times) (FOR ALL W EAPONS COACHED)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
407
325 SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP INSTRUCTOR
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP INSTRUCTOR (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
409
WATCHSTATION 324

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP
INSTRUCTOR.
NOTE: THE SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP INSTRUCTOR MUST BE QUALIFIED WITH

WEAPON BEING INSTRUCTED.

REQUIRED BY POLICY
325.1 PREREQUISITES

.1 SCHOOLS: SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP INSTRUCTOR (A-041-0148) (REQUIRED)

.2 COURSES:
Instructional Delivery Continuum (IDC) Apprentice (CNL-IDC-AP-1) (Required)

324 Line Coach

411
325 SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP INSTRUCTOR (CONT’D)
325 .6 130 Range and Instruction

325.2 TASKS

Questions
325.2 .1 Instruct shooters for small arms dry-fire. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.2 Call lines of fire during small arms live-fire. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.3 Instruct shooters to perform rifle sighting and zeroing. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.4 Instruct shooters to perform rifle NV sighting and zeroing. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.5 Prepare range for live weapons training, qualification, and

exercises. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
412
Questions
325.2 .6 Complete marksmanship awards documentation. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.7 Conduct static/fire maneuver range training, qualification, and

___________________________________
.8 Qualify Line Coaches to perform their duties. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.9 Conduct and record training, qualification, and exercise for shooters. A B C D E F G

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 Maintain and utilize tower/range internal and external

communications. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.11 Conduct the following marksmanship simulator procedures: ABCDEFG
a. Lane training exercises {2, 3, 4}

b. Setting weapon options {2, 3, 4}
c. Course selection {2, 3, 4}
d. Results and analysis {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Maintain target, ammunition, equipment, and supply inventory. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
413
Questions
325.2 .13 Prepare marksmanship training material, and area/classroom for
training . {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.14 Conduct marksmanship training and remedial training. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.15 Assign range personnel to duties/stations. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.16 Assign shooter to target/lane. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.17 Conduct range briefs. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.18 Perform weapon/ammunition accountability procedures. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.19 Plan and execute annual marksmanship/unit employment ABCDEFG

training plan. {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.20 Maintain required reference/publication and training files. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
414
Questions
325.2 .21 Instruct shooters on engaging stationary targets at known and
unknown distance using the following: ABCDEFG
a. Pistol {2, 3, 4}
b. Rifle {2, 3, 4}
c. NV, Thermal Optics, Lasers, and Scope {2, 3, 4}
d. Shotgun {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.22 Instruct limited exposure time/target engagement with small arms. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.23 Instruct shooters on engaging targets wearing CBR protective gear

a. Pistol
b. Rifle
c. Shotgun
___________________________________
.24 Instruct no light/low light and flashlight techniques for small arms. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.25 Instruct shooters on engaging multiple targets using the following: ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
c. Shotgun
___________________________________
415
Questions
325.2 .26 Instruct shooters on engaging moving targets using the following: ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
c. Shotgun
___________________________________
.27 Certify firing line/range hot and cold. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.28 Approve/disapprove shooter saved rounds and alibis. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.29 Identify the following safety violations: ABCDEFG
a. Shooter {2, 3, 4}
b. Line Coach {2, 3, 4}
c. Clearing barrel {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.30 Develop and implement range premishap plan. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.31 Demonstrate Training Time Out procedures. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.32 Instruct shooter to perform remedial actions for malfunctions and

stoppages for small arms. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
416
Questions
325.2 .33 Instruct shooter on weapon handling commands and procedures for
small arms. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.34 Instruct to perform small arms assembly/disassembly/maintenance. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.35 Instruct small arms shot grouping, analysis and feedback. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.36 Instruct shooter field firing techniques for the following and ABCDEFG
associated equipment:{2, 3, 4}
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
c. Shotgun
___________________________________
.38 Instruct shooters on the following NV procedures: ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
a. Inspection and Initial Adjustment

b. Alignment Procedures
c. Focus Procedures
d. Image Assessment Procedures
e. SLAP
f. Goggle/Degoggle Procedures
g. Hazards
h. Shooter Preparation
i. Ordnance Employment
___________________________________
417
Questions
325.2 .39 Instruct/Qualify shooters for use of the following 12 GA specialty ABCDEFG
rounds: {2, 3, 4}
a. Door Breaching, Mk 246 Mod 0 {3, 4}

b. 12 Gauge Bean Bag, Non-Lethal {2, 3, 4}
c. 12 Gauge, Launching, For Grenade, Non-Lethal {2, 3, 4}
d. 12 Gauge, Rubber, Fin Stabilized, Non-Lethal {2, 3, 4}
e. UWD-AY04 Airburst Warning Device {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.40 Instruct the following qualification and familiarization courses of fire: A B C D E F G
b. Navy Handgun Qualification Course. {2, 3, 4}

c. Handgun Low-light Course {2, 3, 4}
d. Handgun Practical Weapons Course {2, 3, 4}
e. Rifle Qualification Course {2, 3, 4}
f. Rifle Low-light Course {2, 3, 4}
g. Shotgun Practical Weapons Course {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.41 Complete range, shooter, and ammunition checklists and

expenditure documents. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.42 Instruct Line Coaches/shooters on the use of training and

marksmanship devices/exercises and range signals. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.43 Instruct students to perform the following pistol firing skills: ABCDEFG
a. Standing Position with Weaver and Isosceles variations {2, 3, 4}

b. Kneeling Position with Weaver and Isosceles variations {2, 3, 4}
c. Prone Position with Weaver and Isosceles variations {2, 3, 4}
d. Crouch Position {2, 3, 4}
e. Grip:
1. One Handed {2, 3, 4}
2. Two Handed {2, 3, 4}
418
Questions
325.2 .43 e. 3. Fist Grip {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
4. Palm Support Grip {2, 3, 4}
5. Weaver Grip {2, 3, 4}
f. Crouching 360 degree Traverse {3, 4}
g. Kneeling 360 degree Traverse {3, 4}
h. Cover and concealment {2, 3, 4}
i. Firing from Cover {2, 3, 4}
j. Supported Firing Positions:
1. Supported Prone {2, 3, 4}
2. Supported Kneeling {2, 3, 4}
3. Supported Standing {2, 3, 4}
k. Searching and engaging targets from cover:
2. Roll Out {3, 4}
3. Pie/Roll Out Combination {3, 4}
___________________________________
.44 Coach shooters to load, and combat load (If applicable)

unload the following: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
c. Pyrotechnic Pistol
d. Shotgun
___________________________________
.45 Coach shooters to load the magazine of the following: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
___________________________________
.46 Instruct students to perform the following pistol presentation skills: ABCDEFG
a. Presentation from the Ready {2, 3, 4}

b. Presentation from the Alert {2, 3, 4}
c. Presentation from Holster Transport {2, 3, 4}
1. While assuming Kneeling Position {2, 3, 4}
419
Questions
325.2 .46 d. Standing Carries Isosceles and Weaver variations: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
1. Presentation from the Ready and from the Alert (arms straight){2, 3, 4}
2. Presentation from the Alert (close quarters, elbows bent) {2, 3, 4}
e. Standing Holster Transport Isosceles and Weaver variations
1. While Assuming the Prone Position {2, 3, 4}
f. Isosceles Prone from the Standing Holster Transport {2, 3, 4}
g. Weaver Prone from the Standing Holster Transport {2, 3, 4}
h. Search and Assess({2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.47 Instruct students to perform the following pistol engagement skills: ABCDEFG

b. Double Action Mode {2, 3, 4}
c. Single Action Mode {2, 3, 4}
d. Two-shot {2, 3, 4}
e. Slow Fire {2, 3, 4}
f. Reengagement Techniques {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.48 Instruct students to perform the following one-handed pistol firing skills:A B C D E F G
a. One-Handed Presentation and Shooting

1. One-Handed Firing {2, 3, 4}
2. Adjustment of the Standing Position {2, 3, 4}
3. Searching and Assessing after firing {2, 3, 4}
1. Dry Reload {2, 3, 4}
2. Condition 1 Reload {2, 3, 4}
c. One-Handed Remedial Action {2, 3, 4}
d. Presentation from the Holster with the Weak Hand
1. Pistol Rotation Method {2, 3, 4}
2. Hand Rotation Method {2, 3, 4}
3. Knee Placement Method {2, 3, 4}
e. Transferring the Pistol from one hand to the other {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
420
Questions
325.2 .49 Instruct students to perform the following advanced pistol firing skills: A B C D E F G
a. Shooting on the Move {2, 3, 4}

b. Moving with the Pistol
1. Alert Position {2, 3, 4}
2. Ready Position {2, 3, 4}
c. Glide Technique {3, 4}
d. Engaging Targets {2, 3, 4}
e. Continue Moving {3, 4}
f. Reloading and Stoppages. {2, 3, 4}
g. Turn and Fire Techniques {3, 4}
___________________________________
.50 Instruct students to perform the following rifle presentation skills: ABCDEFG
a. From Tactical Carry {2, 3, 4}

b. From Ready/Alert Carry {2, 3, 4}
c. From Strong Sling Arms Transport {2, 3, 4}
d. From Weakside Sling Arms Transport {2, 3, 4}
e. Search and Assess
1. Searching and assessing to a higher profile {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.51 Instruct students to perform the combat/range fire

commands for the below equipment: ABCDEFG
a. Pistol {2, 3, 4}
b. Rifle {2, 3, 4}
c. Shotgun {2, 3, 4}
d. Pyrotechnic Pistol {2, 3, 4}
e. NLW {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.52 Instruct students to perform the following rifle firing skills: ABCDEFG
a. Prone Position (Moving Forward/Dropping Back into Position)

{2, 3, 4}
b. Straight Leg Prone Position with the Hasty/Loop Sling {2, 3, 4}
c. Cocked Leg Prone Position with the Hasty/Loop Sling {2, 3, 4}
d. Sitting Position {2, 3, 4}
421
Questions
ABCDEFG
325.2 .52 e. Crossed Ankle Sitting Position with the Hasty/Loop Sling {2, 3, 4}
f. Crossed Leg Sitting Position with the Hasty/Loop Sling {2, 3, 4}
g. Open Leg Sitting Position with the Hasty/Loop Sling {2, 3, 4}
h. Kneeling Position (Moving Forward/Dropping Back into Position)
{2, 3, 4}
i. High Kneeling Position with the Hasty/Loop Sling {2, 3, 4}
j. Medium Kneeling Position {2, 3, 4}
k. Low Kneeling Position {2, 3, 4}
l. Standing Position with Hasty/Parade Sling {2, 3, 4}
m. Firing from Specific Cover Types
1. Fighting Hole {2, 3, 4}
2. Rooftop {2, 3, 4}
3. Window (Supported/Unsupported) {1, 2, 3, 4}
4. Vehicle {2, 3, 4}
n. Supported Firing Positions {2, 3, 4}
o. Adjustment of Shooting Position {2, 3, 4}
p. Searching for targets and engaging from cover
2. Rollout Technique {3, 4}
3. Combing Techniques {3, 4}
4. Moving Out from Behind Cover {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.53 Instruct students to perform the following rifle engagement skills: ABCDEFG

b. Identify Target Location {2, 3, 4}
c. Hasty/Detailed Area Search {2, 3, 4}
d. Maintaining Observation {2, 3, 4}
e. Range Estimation and factors effecting
1. Unit of Measure Method {2, 3, 4}
2. Front Sight Post Method {2, 3, 4}
3. Visible Detail Methods {2, 3, 4}
f. Offset Aiming {2, 3, 4}
g. Techniques of Fire
1. Two-shot {2, 3, 4}
2. Single-shot {2, 3, 4}
3. Three Round Burst {2, 3, 4}
h. Engaging Immediate Threat
1. Engaging Multiple Targets {2, 3, 4}
2. Prioritizing Targets {2, 3, 4}
3. Techniques
(a) Prone/Alternate Prone {2, 3, 4}
422
Questions
325.2 .53 h. 3. (b) Sitting {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
(c) Kneeling
(d) Standing/Modified Standing {2, 3, 4}
(e) Alternate Prone {2, 3, 4}
(f) Kneeling Supported/Unsupported {2, 3, 4}
(g) Urban Operations {2, 3, 4}
(h) Burst Fire/Automatic Position {2, 3, 4}
f. Types of Moving Targets {2, 3, 4}
g. Leading and lead types {2, 3, 4}
h. Tracking/Ambush engagement methods {2, 3, 4}
i. Marking of Targets
1. Number of targets and spacing {2, 3, 4}
2. Target exposure time {2, 3, 4}
3. Good/Bad aiming points {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.54 Coach shooters to Blank fire: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Pistol
b. Rifle
___________________________________

Questions
325.3 .1 Remove shooter for safety violation. {2, 3, 4} ABCDFGHI
___________________________________
423

taken?
abnormal condition.
Questions
325.4 .1 Handle shooter failing to clear stoppages or
remedial action. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.2 Fouled range. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.3 Loss of communications. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
325.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
424
Questions
___________________________________
.2 Injured wounded shooter/Line Coach. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
325.6 WATCHES
SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP INSTRUCTOR (3 times) (FOR ALL W EAPONS INSTRUCTED)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP INSTRUCTOR (3 times) (FOR ALL W EAPONS INSTRUCTED)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
425
___________________________________
___________________________________
426
326 CREW SERVED WEAPONS INSTRUCTOR
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified CREW SERVED WEAPONS INSTRUCTOR (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
427
WATCHSTATION 326

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: CREW SERVED W EAPONS
INSTRUCTOR.
NOTE: THE CREW SERVED W EAPONS INSTRUCTOR MUST BE QUALIFIED WITH WEAPON
BEING INSTRUCTED.

REQUIRED BY POLICY
326.1 PREREQUISITES

.1 SCHOOLS: Crew Served Weapons Instructor (A-830-2215) (REQUIRED)

.2 COURSES:
Instructional Delivery Continuum (IDC) Apprentice (CNL-IDC-AP-1) (Required)

324 Line Coach

429
326 CREW SERVED WEAPONS INSTRUCTOR (CONT’D)
326.1.6 130 Range Set-up and Instruction

326.2 TASKS

Questions
326.2 .1 Instruct shooters for CSW/Grenade Launcher dry-fire. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.2 Call lines of fire during CSW/Grenade Launcher live-fire. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.3 Instruct shooters to perform sighting and zeroing of: ABCDEFG
a. CSW {1, 2, 3, 4}
b. Grenade Launcher {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
430
Questions
326.2 .5 Prepare range for live weapons training, qualification, and
exercises. ABCDEFG
a. Static:
1. Ashore {2, 3, 4}
2. Afloat {2, 3, 4}
b. Dynamic:
1. Ashore {2, 3, 4}
2. Afloat {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.6 Conduct static/fire maneuver range training, qualification, and

___________________________________
.7 Qualify Line Coaches to perform their duties. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.8 Conduct and record training, qualification, and exercise for shooters. A B C D E F G

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________

___________________________________
.10 Conduct the following marksmanship simulator procedures: ABCDEFG
a. Lane training exercises {2, 3, 4}

b. Setting weapon options {2, 3, 4}
c. Course selection {2, 3, 4}
d. Results and analysis {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
431
Questions
326.2 .11 Maintain target, ammunition, equipment, and supply inventory. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Prepare marksmanship training material and area/classroom

for training . {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.13 Conduct marksmanship training and remedial training. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
___________________________________
.15 Assign shooter to target/lane. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
.17 Perform weapon/ammunition accountability procedures. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
COMPLETED .2 AREA COMPRISES 40% OF WATCHSTATION
.18 Plan and execute annual marksmanship/unit employment

training plan. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
432
Questions
326.2 .19 Maintain required reference/publication and training files. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.20 Conduct CSW/Grenade Launcher shooter shot analysis and feedback.

{2, 3, 4} A B C D E F G
___________________________________
.21 Instruct shooters on engaging stationary targets at known and

unknown distance using the following: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. CSW
b. Grenade Launcher
c. NV, Thermal Optics, Lasers, and Scope
___________________________________
.22 Instruct shooters on engaging targets wearing CBR protective gear

a. CSW
b. Grenade Launcher
___________________________________
.23 Instruct no light/low light for CSW/Grenade Launchers. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.24 Instruct shooters on engaging multiple targets using the following: ABCDEFG
a. CSW {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
433
Questions
326.2.25 Instruct shooters on engaging moving targets using the following: ABCDEFG
a. CSW {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.26 Certify firing line/range hot and cold. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.27 Approve/disapprove shooter saved rounds and alibis. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.28 Identify the following safety violations: ABCDEFG
a. Shooter {2, 3, 4}
b. Line Coach {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.29 Develop and implement range premishap plan. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
.31 Instruct shooter to perform immediate/remedial actions for

malfunctions and stoppages for CSW/Grenade Launcher. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
434
Questions
326.2 .32 Instruct shooter on weapon handling commands and
procedures for CSW/Grenade Launcher. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.33 Instruct to perform CSW/Grenade Launcher assembly/

disassembly/maintenance. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.34 Instruct shooter field firing techniques for the following and
associated equipment: ABCDEFG
a. CSW {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.36 Coordinate with EOD to remove dud/unexploded grenade rounds. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.37 Instruct shooters on the following NV procedures: ABCDEFG
a. Inspection and Initial Adjustment {2, 3, 4}

b. Alignment Procedures {2, 3, 4}
c. Focus Procedures {2, 3, 4}
d. Image Assessment Procedures {2, 3, 4}
e. SLAP {2, 3, 4}
f. Goggle/Degoggle Procedures {2, 3, 4}
g. Hazards {2, 3, 4}
h. Shooter Preparation {2, 3, 4}
i. Ordnance Employment {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.38 Complete range, shooter, and ammunition checklists and

___________________________________
435
Questions
326.2 .39 Instruct Line Coaches/shooters on the use of training and
marksmanship devices/exercises and range signals. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.40 Coach shooters to load the magazine/ammunition belt/container. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.41 Instruct students to perform the combat/range fire

commands for the below equipment: ABCDEFG
a. CSW {2, 3, 4}
c. NLW {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.42 Instruct the following qualification and familiarization courses of fire: ABCDEFG
a. Light and Medium Machine Gun Qualification: {2, 3, 4}

b. MG Qualification Course Bipod {2, 3, 4}
c. MG Qualification Course Tripod/T&E Mechanism {2, 3, 4}
d Weapons Stand/Mount Firing Familiarization {2, 3, 4}
e. Heavy MG Qualification Course {2, 3, 4}
f. Grenade MG Qualification Course {2, 3, 4}
g. Grenade Launcher Qualification Course {2, 3, 4}
h. MK38 Weapons System Familiarization Fire {2, 3, 4}
i. MK44 Weapons System Familiarization Fire {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.43 Instruct shooters to perform the following MG Mount and Bipod/

Tripod procedures: ABCDEFG
a. Mount {2, 3, 4}
b. Unmount {2, 3, 4}
c. Stow {2, 3, 4}
436
Questions
326.2 .43 d. Placing into action {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
e. Taking out of action {2, 3, 4}
f. Loading of ammunition {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.44 Instruct shooters to perform machine gun CBRN firing from

Bipod/Tripod. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
45 Instruct shooters to perform the following machine-gun firing

positions: ABCDEFG
a. Prone Position, Bipod Supported {2, 3, 4}

b. Fighting Position, Bipod Supported {2, 3, 4}
c. Prone Position, Tripod Supported {2, 3, 4}
d. Fighting Position, Tripod Supported {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.46 Instruct shooters to perform the following MG firing positions: ABCDEFG
a. Underarm {2, 3, 4}
b. Hip Firing {2, 3, 4}
c. Offhand {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.47 Instruct shooters to perform the following machine gun fire skills: ABCDEFG
a. Traverse and Search from Bipod/Tripod {2, 3, 4}

b. Direct Lay {2, 3, 4}
c. Application of Fire {2, 3, 4}
d. Fire Adjustment
1. Sight Corrections Method {2, 3, 4}
2. Adjusted Aiming Point Method {2, 3, 4}
3. Measurement by Visual Estimation {2, 3, 4}
4. Measurement from a Map {2, 3, 4}
5. Measurement by Pacing {2, 3, 4}
6. Binocular Measurement {2, 3, 4}
7. Measurement by Laser Range Finder {2, 3, 4}
437
Questions
326.2 .47 d. 8. Measurement by Firing {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
9. Measurement by Lateral Distance {2, 3, 4}
e. Movement, Speed and Alignment and reloading {2, 3, 4}
f. Blank Fire {1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.48 Instruct shooters to perform MG aerial defense techniques. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.49 Instruct shooters to perform the following MG Grenade Launcher

skills: ABCDEFG
a. Prone Position {2, 3, 4}

b. Kneeling Position {2, 3, 4}
c. Sitting Position {2, 3, 4}
d. Sitting Position Cross-Ankle/Cross-Legged {2, 3, 4}
e. Squatting Position {2, 3, 4}
f. Fighting Position {2, 3, 4}
g. Standing Position {2, 3, 4}
h. Limited Visibility {2, 3, 4}
i. NBC Environment {2, 3, 4}
j. Sensing and Adjustment of Fire {2, 3, 4}
k. Zeroing {2, 3, 4}
l. Range estimation methods {2, 3, 4}
m. Offensive/Defensive employment and considerations {2, 3, 4}
n. Heavy MG Affects against various target types {2, 3, 4}
o. Complimentary Effects {2, 3, 4}
p. Danger Space {2, 3, 4}
q. Overhead Fires {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.50 Instruct/Qualify shooters for use of the following Grenade Launcher

specialty rounds: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, Parachute, B504 Green Star, B505 Red Star

b. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, B506 Red Smoke, B508 Green Smoke, B509 Yellow
Smoke
c. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, B519 Practice [ch. 5, pg. 5-8]
d. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, B534 Multiple Projectile, B535 White Star, B536
White Star Cluster
438
Questions
326.2 .50 e. Cartridge, 40mm, Tactical, CS, B567 & BA05 CS ABCDEFG
i. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, Practice, B577
i. Cartridge, 40 Millimeter, Foam Rubber Baton, Non-Lethal
___________________________________
Completed .2 area comprises 10% of watchstation.

Questions
326.3 .1 Remove shooter for safety violation. {2, 3, 4} ABCDFGHI
___________________________________

taken?
abnormal condition.
439
Questions
326.4 .1 Handle shooter failing to clear stoppages or remedial action. ABCDEFGH
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
326.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
Questions
___________________________________
.2 Injured wounded shooter/Line Coach. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.3 Dud/unexploded grenade round. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGHI
___________________________________
440
Questions
326.5 .4 Fire caused by grenade smoke/parachute grenade round/tracer. A B C D E F G H I
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
326.6 WATCHES
CREW SERVED W EAPONS INSTRUCTOR (3 times) (FOR ALL W EAPONS INSTRUCTED)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
CREW SERVED W EAPONS INSTRUCTOR (3 times) (FOR ALL W EAPONS INSTRUCTED)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
441
___________________________________
___________________________________
442
327 GRENADIER INSTRUCTOR
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified GRENADIER INSTRUCTOR (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
443
WATCHSTATION 327

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: GRENADIER INSTRUCTOR.
NOTE: THE GRENADIER INSTRUCTOR MUST BE QUALIFIED WITH GRENADE BEING

INSTRUCTED.

REQUIRED BY POLICY
326.1 PREREQUISITES

.2 COURSES: NONE.
311 Grenadier

324 Line Coach

130 Range Set-up and Instruction

445
327 GRENADIER INSTRUCTOR (CONT’D)
327.1 .7 SYSTEMS FROM THIS PQS: NONE.
327.2 TASKS

Questions
327.2 .1 Instruct Grenadier to identify the following types of grenades: ADG
a. Fragmentation {3, 4}
b. Illuminating {2, 3, 4}
c. Chemical {2, 3, 4}
d. Offensive {2, 3, 4}
e. Practice and Training {2, 3, 4}
f. Non-lethal (Diversionary/Stun) {2, 3, 4}
g. Non-lethal (Discomfort/Incapacitation Causing) {2, 3, 4}
h. Non-lethal (Trauma Causing) {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.2 Instruct Grenadier to perform right and left handed grip of grenades. ADG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.3 Instruct Grenadier on the following chemical grenade areas: A D G
a. PPE {2, 3, 4}
b. Weather and Heat/Sun effects {2, 3, 4}
c. Decontamination {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
446
Questions
327.2 .4 Instruct Grenadier on grenade specifics: {2, 3, 4} A D G
a. Components
b. Functioning
c. Intended use
d. Fragmentation and travel distance
e. Average throwing distance
f. Delay
g. Affects
___________________________________
.5 Instruct Grenadier on grenade employment rules. {2, 3, 4} A D G
___________________________________
.6 Instruct Grenadier on detonating and igniting fuzes. {2, 3, 4} A D G
___________________________________
.7 Instruct Grenadier to perform the following grenade maintenance

procedures: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Inspection
b. Newly Issued
c. Packed or Stored
d. Cleaning
e. Lubrication
f. Preventive Maintenance
g. Unpackaging
___________________________________
.8 Instruct Grenadier on storing of grenades in container and Grenade Vest/Pouches.

{2, 3, 4} ADG
___________________________________
.9 Instruct Grenadier on ashore and afloat grenade deployment commands. ADG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
447
Questions
327.2 .10 Instruct Grenadier to perform the following grenade throwing
procedures: ADG
a. Employment {2, 3, 4}
b. Standing {2, 3, 4}
d. Prone-to-Standing {2, 3, 4}
e. Kneeling {2, 3, 4}
f. Prone-to-Kneeling {2, 3, 4}
g. Pull and Drop {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.11 Instruct Grenadier on differences between burning and burst riot grenades. ADG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Instruct Grenadier on burning and burst riot grenade throwing placement
and distance. {2, 3, 4} ADG
___________________________________
.13 Instruct Grenadier on grenade milking issues. {2, 3, 4} ADG
___________________________________
.14 Instruct Grenadier on the following grenade safety issues procedures: ADG
{2, 3, 4}
a. CS Grenade Misfire
b. Dropped Hand Offensive Grenade with pin removed (Ashore/Afloat)
c. Throwing pit sump and ditch
d. Dropped Chemical Grenade with pin removed
e. Dropped Diversionary/Stun Grenade with pin removed
f. Riot Control Grenade Hang-fire
___________________________________
.15 Prepare Grenadier for practice qualification. {2, 3, 4} ADG
___________________________________
448
Questions
327.2 .16 Instruct Grenadier to employ the following types of grenades: ADG
{2, 3, 4}
a. Fragmentation
b. Illuminating
c. Chemical
d. Offensive
e. Practice and Training
f. Non-lethal (Diversionary/Stun)
g. Non-lethal (Discomfort/Incapacitation Causing)
h. Non-lethal (Trauma Causing)
___________________________________
.17 Qualify Grenadier Line (Pit) Coaches. {2, 3, 4} ADG
___________________________________
.18 Call grenade courses of fire. {2, 3, 4} ADG
___________________________________
.19 Supervise removal of grenades from training area. {2, 3, 4} ADG
___________________________________
.20 Prepare range for live weapons training, qualification, and ABCDEFG
exercises. {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.21 Instruct Grenadier to engage enemy from the following positions/

placements: ABCDEFG
a. Standing {2, 3, 4}
b. Prone-to-Standing {2, 3, 4}
d. Prone-to-Kneeling {2, 3, 4}
e. Pull and Drop {2, 3, 4}
f. Watercraft {2, 3, 4}
g. From behind cover
___________________________________
449
Questions
327.2 .22 Complete grenade qualification documentation. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________

___________________________________
.24 Maintain target, ammunition, equipment, and supply inventory. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.25 Prepare training material and area/classroom for training. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.26 Conduct Grenadier training and remedial training. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
.28 Assign Grenadier to target/lane/pit. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
___________________________________
.30 Perform ammunition accountability procedures. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
450
Questions
327.2.31 Plan and execute annual grenade unit employment
training plan. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.32 Maintain required reference/publication and training files. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.33 Instruct limited exposure time and cover positions. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.34 Instruct Grenadier on engaging targets wearing CBR protective gear. A B C D E F G

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.35 Certify range hot and cold. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.36 Identify the following safety violations: {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
a. Grenadier
b. Line Coach
___________________________________
.37 Develop and implement range RAC and premishap plan. ABCDEFG
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
___________________________________
451
Questions
327.2.39 Instruct Grenadier to perform immediate actions grenadier
malfunctions or emergencies. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.40 Complete range, grenadier, and ammunition checklists and

___________________________________
.41 Instruct Pit Coaches/Grenadiers on the use of training and

exercises and range signals. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________

Questions
327.3 .1 Remove Grenadier for safety violation. {2, 3, 4} ABCDFGHI
___________________________________
452
327.4 For the abnormal conditions listed below:

taken?
abnormal condition.
Questions
327.4 .1 Grenadier failing to perform immediate/remedial action. ABCDEFGH
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
.4 Grenadier freezes after arming grenade. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.5 Grenadier watches grenade after throw. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.6 Grenadier milks grenade. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
453
Questions
327.4 .7 Grenadier fails to take cover after throwing grenade. ABCDEFGH
{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
327.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
Questions
327.5 .1 Grenade cook off. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.2 Improper grenade location impact (Bounce off). {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.3 Grenadier hit by grenade fragments/practice round. ABCDEFGH

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.4 Injured wounded Grenadier/Line Coach to include: ABCDEFGH

{2, 3, 4}
a. Eyes
b. Hearing
c. Lacerations/trauma
454
Questions
327.4 d. Burns
e. Respiration issues caused by Chemical grenade
___________________________________
.5 Dropped live grenade. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
327.6 WATCHES
GRENADIER INSTRUCTOR (3 times) (FOR ALL GRENADES INSTRUCTED)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
GRENADIER INSTRUCTOR (3 times) (FOR ALL GRENADES INSTRUCTED)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
455
___________________________________
___________________________________
456
328 RANGE SAFETY OFFICER
NAME______________________________ RATE/RANK____________________

as a qualified RANGE SAFETY OFFICER (NAVEDTRA 43466-D).
Supervisor
Division Officer
Department Head
QUALIFIED_____________________________________________ DATE______________
457
WATCHSTATION 327

IN PREVIOUS VERSIONS, SHALL BE COMPLETED: RANGE SAFETY OFFICER.
NOTE: THE RANGE SAFETY OFFICER MUST BE QUALIFIED AS INSTRUCTOR FOR THE
RANGE TYPE BEING SUPERVISED.

REQUIRED BY POLICY
328.1 PREREQUISITES

328.1 .1 SCHOOLS: None.
.2 COURSES:
USMC RANGE SAFETY COURSE (Required)

325 SMALL ARMS INSTRUCTOR

326 CREW SERVED W EAPONS INSTRUCTOR

459
328 RANGE SAFETY OFFICER (CONT’D)
328.1 .5 327 Grenadier Instructor


328.2 TASKS

Questions
328.2 .1 Direct conduct of range day/ night marksmanship and exercises. ABCDEFG
{1, 2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.2 Qualify the following instructors IAW range SOPs to perform

range marksmanship and exercises: ABCDEFG
a. Small Arms Instructor {2, 3, 4}

b. Crew Served Weapons Instructor {2, 3, 4}
c. Grenadier Instructor {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.3 Develop range SOPs and instructions. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
460
Questions
328.2 .4 Develop and execute range annual schedule. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.5 Monitor range environmental compliance. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.6 Monitor range safety compliance. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.7 Establish range training area enhancement program. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.8 Design the following range types: ABCDEFG
a. Small Arms
1. Afloat {2, 3, 4}
2. Ashore {2, 3, 4}
b. Crew Served Weapons
1. Afloat {2, 3, 4}
2. Ashore {2, 3, 4}
c. Grenade
1. Afloat {2, 3, 4}
2. Ashore {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.9 Design the following range SDZs: ABCDEFG
a. Small Arms
1. Afloat {2, 3, 4}
2. Ashore {1, 2, 3, 4}
b. Crew Served Weapons
1. Afloat {2, 3, 4}
2. Ashore {2, 3, 4}
461
Questions
328.2 .9 c. Grenade ABCDEFG
1. Afloat {2, 3, 4}
2. Ashore {2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.10 Prepare and submit NOTAM,PMAPS. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.11 Prepare, submit and maintain range deviation requests. ABCDEFG

{2, 3, 4}
___________________________________
.12 Perform range inspections. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.13 Perform range laser safety procedures. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.14 Perform range policing supervision. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.15 Complete range matrix and checklists. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
.16 Certify as RSO at all ranges command utilizes. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFG
___________________________________
462

Questions
328.3 .1 Remove Instructor or Line Coach qualifications. {2, 3, 4} ABCDFGHI
___________________________________

taken?
abnormal condition.
Questions
328.4 .1 Fouled range. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
___________________________________
463
328.5 EMERGENCIES

taken?
Questions
328.5 .1 Laser injuries. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
.2 Round impacting outside SDZ. {2, 3, 4} ABCDEFGH
___________________________________
328.6 WATCHES
Range Safety Officer (3 times)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
464
328.6.2 Stand the following watches under qualified supervision:
Range Safety Officer (3 times)
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
465
NAVEDTRA 43466-D CH-1
QUALIFICATION PROGRESS SUMMARY

FOR SECURITY FORCE WEAPONS
NAME _____________________________________ RATE/RANK___________________
This qualification progress summary is used to track the progress of a trainee in the watchstations
for this PQS and ensure awareness of remaining tasks. It should be kept by the individual or in
the individual's training jacket and updated with an appropriate signature (Training Petty Officer,
Division Officer, Senior Watch Officer, etc.) as watchstations are completed.
In Change-1, Watchstation moved to NAVEDTRA 43466-1A, Security Force Weapons, Pistols
303 .38 CALIBER REVOLVER OPERATOR
304 AN/M8 PYROTECHNIC PISTOL OPERATOR
467

FOR SECURITY FORCE WEAPONS (CONT’D)
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
306 MP5 (SERIES) SUBMACHINE GUN OPERATOR
Watchstation deleted in Change-1. See summary of changes page.
307 M14 SERVICE RIFLE OPERATOR
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
308 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE OPERATOR
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
468

311 GRENADIER
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
312 MK46 MOD 0 LIGHT MACHINEGUN/M249 SQUAD AUTOMATIC WEAPON (SAW)

OPERATOR
313 M240 (B/N) MEDIUM MACHINEGUN OPERATOR
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
314 M60 (SERIES) MACHINEGUN OPERATOR
315 M-2 .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINEGUN OPERATOR
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
316 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINEGUN OPERATOR
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
469

317 MK38 MOD 1 25MM MACHINE GUN OPERATOR
318 MK44 MOD 0/1 GUN WEAPON SYSTEM OPERATOR
319 DESIGNATED MARKSMAN/OBSERVER
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
321 M107 LONG RANGE SNIPER RIFLE OPERATOR
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
470

323 DUTY ARMORER
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
324 LINE COACH
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
Completed ___________________________________ Date_______________

(Signature)
471
LIST OF REFERENCES USED IN THIS PQS
AFI 36-2226, Combat Arms Program
Air Force Instruction 31-207, Arming and Use of Force by Air Force Personnel
Army Field Manual 3-23.30, Grenades and Pyrotechnic Signals
Barrett Firearm Manufacturing, Inc. Operators Manual .50 cal Rifle M82A1
CJCSI 3121.01B, Standing Rules of Engagement for U.S. Forces
CVL Manual, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Carbine Visible Laser, AN/PEQ-5
DA-PAM 385-63, Range Safety
DoD 4540.5-M, DoD Nuclear Weapons Transportation Manual
DoD 5160.65-M, Single Manager for Conventional Ammunition
DOD 5525.1 Status of Forces Agreements
FM 23-65, Browning Machine Gun Caliber .50 HB, M2
FM 23-8, M-14 and M-14A1 Rifles
FM 27-100, Legal Support to Operations
FM 3-19.12, Protective Services
FM 3-22.27, MK 19, 40-MM Grenade Machine Gun, Mod 3
FM 3-22.31, 40MM, Grenade Launcher, M203
FM 3-22.68, Crew-Served Machine Guns, 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm
FM 3-22.9, Rifle Marksmanship, M16A1, M16A2/3, M16A4, and M4 Carbine
FM 3-23.30, Grenades and Pyrotechnic Signals
FM 3-23.35, Combat Training with Pistols, M9 and M11
FM 4-30.13, Ammunition Handbook (TT&P) and Procedures for Munition Handlers
FM 44-8, Combined Arms for Air Defense
FM23-65, Browning Machine Gun Caliber .50 HB M2
FW 370-AF-OMP-010, Operator and General Support, Maintenance Manual (Including Basic
Issue Items and Repair Parts List), Small Arms Targets and Target Material
Handbook 03-22, Own the Night V2
MCRP 3-01A, Marine Corps Rifle Marksmanship Manual
MCRP 3-01B, Marine Corps Pistol Marksmanship Manual
MCWP 3-15.1, Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery
MCWP 3-15.3, Sniping
NAVEDTRA 14137, Master at Arms
NAVEDTRA 14234, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 1
NAVEDTRA 14235, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 2
NAVEDTRA 14324, Gunner’s Mate
NAVSEA OP 3347, U.S. Navy Ordnance Safety Precautions
NAVSEA OP 3565, Electromagnetic Radiation Hazards, Vol. I (Hazards to Personnel, Fuel, and
Other Flammable Material)
NAVSEA OP4, Ammunition Afloat
NAVSEA OP5, Ammunition Ashore
NAVSEA SW010-AF-ORD-010, Identification of Ammunition
NAVSEA SW030-AA-MMO-010, Navy Gun Ammunition Description, Operation and
Maintenance
NAVSEA SW050-AB-MMA-010, Pyrotechnic, Screening, Marking and Counter Measure
Devices
NAVSUP P-724, Conventional Ordnance Stockpile Management
NTRP 3-07.2.2, Force Protection Weapons Handling Standard Procedures and Guidelines
473
LIST OF REFERENCES USED IN THIS PQS (CONT’D)
NTTP 3-07.11, Maritime Interception Operations

NTTP 3-07.2.1, Antiterrorism/Force Protection
NTTP 3-07.3.2, Tactical Employment of Non-lethal Weapons
NWP 3-07.31, Multiservice Procedures for the Tactical Employment of Non -lethal Weapons
OP 3833, Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Grenades
OPNAVINST 3500.39B, Operational Risk Management
OPNAVINST 3591.1e, Small Arms Training and Qualification
OPNAVINST 5100.19E, Navy Occupational Safety and Health (NAVOSH) Volume I SOH and
Major Hazard-Specific Programs
OPNAVINST 5530.13C, Department of the Navy Physical Security Instruction for Conventional
Arms, Ammunition, and Explosives (AA&E)
OPNAVINST 5530.13C, Physical Security of Arms, Ammunition, and Explosives
OPNAVINST 5530.14D, Navy Physical Security and Law Enforcement
OPNAVINST 5580.1A (Change 2), Navy Law Enforcement Manual
SECNAVINST 5500.29C, Use of Deadly Force and the Carrying of Firearms by Personnel of
the Department of the Navy in Conjunction with Law Enforcement Security Duties and
Personal Protection
SW 361-AC-MMM-010, Technical Manual Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual
(Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Machine Guns, Caliber .50; M2,
Heavy Barrel
SW 363-C3-MMM-010, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Machine Gun, 40MM, MK19,
MOD 3
SW 370-AE-MMI-010, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and
Special Tools List for Launcher, Grenade, 40MM, M203 W/E; Launcher, Grenade,
40MM, M203A1 W/E; Launcher, Grenade, 40MM, M203A2 W/E
SW 370-BUJ-OPl-010, Operator Manual, for Rifle, 5.66 MM, M16A2 W/E; Rifle, 5.56 MM,
M16A3; Rifle, 5.56 MM, M16A4; Carbine, 5.56 MM, M4 W/E; Carbine, 5.56 MM, M4A1
SW010-AD-GTP-010, Technical Manual, Small Arms and Special Warfare Ammunition
SW010-AF-ORD-010, Identification of Ammunition
SW030-AA-MMO-010, Technical Manual, Navy Gun Ammunition, Description Operation, and
Maintenance
SW073-AC-MMA-010, Miscellaneous Chemical Munitions
SW215-AL-MMO-010, Technical Manual, Operator’s and Maintenance Manual, for AN/PVS-12,
Night Vision Individual Served Weapon Sight
SW215-AT-OMI-010, Operator’s Manual, Night Vision Goggles, AN/PVS-7
SW215-BC-MMO-010, Technical Manual, Operator’s and Maintenance Manual, for AN/PVS-20,
Night Vision Crew Served Weapon Sight
SW300-AA-OPI-010, User’s Manual, for Gun Mounts Mk 26 Mod 17, MK 58 Mod 5, and Mk 64
Mod
SW300-AC-OPI-010, Users Manual for Gun Mount, MK 95 MOD 0 with Machine Gun, Caliber
.50 M2, Heavy Barrel and Gun Mount, MK 95 MOD 1 with Machine Gun, Caliber .50 M2,
Heavy Barrel
SW300-AQ-MMO-010, Technical Manual, Maintenance Manual, Small Arms Machine Gun
Mount, MK 99 Mod 1
SW300-BC-SAF-010, Clearing Live Ammunition from Guns
474
SW360-AA-MMO-A10, Logbook for Machine Gun

SW360-AG-MMO-010, Operator’s Manual, 5.56MM, MK46 MOD 0 Lightweight Machine Gun
SW360-AH-OMP-010, Technical Manual Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual
SW360-AH-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, Machine Gun, 7.62MM, M240 Series
SW360-AJ-MMM-010, Technical Manual, Maintenance Manual, Small Arms Machine Gun
Mount, MK 97 Mod 0
SW361-AB-MMO-010, Operator’s Manual, Machine Guns, Caliber .50; M2, Heavy Barrel
SW361-AE-MMM-010/MK26, Technical Manual, Maintenance Manual, Small Arms Machine
Gun Mount, MK 26 Mods 15, 16, and 17
SW361-AJ-MMM-010, Technical Manual, Maintenance Manual, Small Arms Machine Gun
Mount, MK 95 Mods 0 and 1
SW361-AK-MMM-010, Technical Manual, Maintenance Manual, Small Arms Machine Gun
Mount, MK 93 Mod 2
SW363-AO-MMO-010, Technical Manual, 40mm Saluting Mount MK 11 MODS 0-2
SW363-C3-MMM-020, Technical Manual, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual
(Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Machine Gun, 40MM, MK19, MOD 3
SW363-D4-MMM-010, Technical Manual Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual
(Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for, Machine Gun Mounts, MK 64 Mod
4,5,6,8, and 9
SW363-D4-MMM-010/MK64, Technical Manual, Maintenance Manual, Small Arms Machine
Gun Mount, MK 64 Mods 4, 5, 6, 8, and 9
SW370-A2-OPI-010 Operators Manual for Rifle, 7.62 MK14 Mod 0 Enhanced Battle Rifle
SW370-A3-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, for Carbine, 5.56MM MK 18 MOD 0
SW370-AE-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, for Launcher, Grenade, 40MM, M203; Launcher,
Grenade, 40MM, M203A1
SW370-AH-11N-010, Shipboard Small Arms Ranges
SW370-AQ-MMO-010 Maintenance Manual Naval Special Warfare Shotgun 12 Gauge
Mossberg 500A1
SW370-AU-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, Submachine Gun, 9mm H&K MP5
SW370-BB-OPI-010, Operator’s Manual, Shotgun, 12 Gauge Mossberg 500A1
SW370-BU-MMI-010, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and
Special Tools Lists, for Rifle, 5.66 MM, M16A2 W/E; Rifle, 5.56 MM, M16A3;Rifle, 5.56
MM, M16A4; Carbine, 5.56 MM, M4 W/E; Carbine, 5.56 MM, M4A1
TC 23-13, Crew Served Weapon Night Vision Sight
TM 02648C-10/1, Operator’s Manual, Rifle, 7.62MM, M14 Designated Marksman Rifle (DMR)
W/E
TM 10698A-23B&P/2, USMC, Technical Manual, Shotgun, Combat 12 Gauge, Semiautomatic,
M1014
TM 11-5855-213-10, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Night Vision Sight, Individual
Served Weapon, AN/PVS-4
TM 11-5855-214-10, Operator’s Manual, Night Vision Sight, Crew Served Weapon, AN/TVS-5
TM 11-5855-262-10-2, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Night Vision Goggle, AN/PVS-7B
TM 11-5855-301-12&P, Technical Manual, Operator’s and Unit maintenance Manual (Including
Repair Parts List), Target Pointer Illuminator/Aiming Light (TPIAL), AN/PAQ-4B
475
TM 11-5855-306-10, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Monocular Night Vision Device,

AN/PVS-14
TM 11-5855-308-12&P, Technical Manual, Operator’s and Unit maintenance Manual (Including
Repair Parts List), Target Pointer Illuminator/Aiming Light (TPIAL), AN/PEQ-2A
TM 11-5855-312-10, Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual, Sight Thermal, AN/PAS-13B
TM 43-0001-29, Technical Manual, Army Ammunition Data Sheets, for, Grenades
TM 9-1005-201-10, Operator’s Manual, Machinegun, 5.56MM, M249 W/Equip
TM 9-1005-223-12P, Operator and Organizational Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tool
USTS for Rifle, 7.62-MM, M14 (National Match) and Rifle, 7.62MM, M14(M)
TM 9-1005-223-20, Organizational Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special
Tools Lists, Rifle, 7.62-MM, M14, W/ E Rifle, 7.62-MM, M14A1, W/E and Bipod, Rifle,
M2
TM 9-1005-223-34, Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair
Parts and Special Tools Lists, Rifle, 7.62-MM, M14, W/ E Rifle, 7.62-MM, M14A1, W/E
and Bipod, Rifle, M2
TM 9-1005-224-10, Operator’s Manual, Machine Gun, 7.62-MM, M60 W/E and Machine Gun,
7.62-MM, M60D W/E
TM 9-1005-237-23&P, Operator and Unit Maintenance Manual, including Repair Parts and
Special Tools List for, Bayonet-Knife, M6 & M7, w/ Bayonet-Knife, Scabbard, M10; M9
Multipurpose Bayonet System
TM 9-1005-239-10 Long Range Sniper Rifle (LRSR) USMC Special Application Scoped Rifle
(SASR) CAL .50 M107
TM 9-1005-239-23&P, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual M107 Long range Sniper
Rifle
TM 9-1005-245-13&P, Technical Manual, Operator’s Unit, and Direct Support Maintenance
Manual with Repair Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL) for Machine Gun Mounts and
Combinations for Tactical/Armored Vehicles and Ground Mounting
TM 9-1005-249-10, Operator’s Manual, for Rifle, 5.56MM, M16 and M16A1
TM 9-1005-314-12&P, Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual (Including Repair
Parts and Special Tools List), Blank Firing Attachment (BFA) M19 for CAL. .50 M2
Heavy Barrel Machine Gun
TM 9-1005-338-13&P, Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual, Mossberg
12-Gauge Shotgun, Model 500
TM 9-1240-413-12, Operator and Unit Maintenance Manual, including Repair Parts and Special
Tools List for, M68 Sight, Reflex, w/ Quick Release Mount and Sight Mount
TM 9-1240-415-13&P Technical Manual Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual
(Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Telescope, Straight: M145
TM 9-5855-450-24, Organizational, Direct Support, and General Support, and Maintenance
Manual, For Night Vision Sight, Infrared AN/TAS-4
TM 9-6920-746-12&P, Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual (Including Repair
Parts and Special Tools List), M2 Practice Bolt for Plastic Ammunition
TM 9-l 005-203-l 2&P, Recoil Amplifier M3
USMC Range Safety Pocket Guide
USN/USMC, Helicopter Night Vision Device (NVD) Manual, 6th Edition
476
PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION STANDARD
Feedback Form for NAVEDTRA 43466-D CH-1
From _______________________________________________ Date _______________
Via _____________________________________________________ Date _______________

Department Head
Activity _____________________________________________________________________
Mailing Address _______________________________________________________________
Email Address ___________________________________________ DSN_______________
PQS Title __________________________________________ NAVEDTRA_______________
Section Affected ______________________________________________________________
Page Number(s) ______________________________________________________________
For faster response, you may submit your feedback via the PQS Manager via email:
john.a.capomaggi@navy.mil
Remarks/Recommendations (Use additional sheets if necessary):
477
(FOLD HERE)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY
___________________________
OFFICIAL BUSINESS
COMMANDING OFFICER
NETC N7)
1905 REGULUS AVE
VIRGINIA BEACH VA 23461
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(FOLD HERE)
478

Personnel Qualification Standard: Naval Education and NAVEDTRA 43466-D CH-1 Training Command 6 August 2020

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Personnel Qualification Standard: Naval Education and NAVEDTRA 43466-D CH-1 Training Command 6 August 2020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Naval Education and NAVEDTRA 43466-D CH-1

Training Command 6 August 2020

SECURITY FORCE WEAPONS

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT B: Distribution authorized to U.S. Government agencies only due to

TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................ 1

100 INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS ........................................................................................ 17

200 INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS ................................................................................................... 169

300 INTRODUCTION TO WATCHSTATIONS ..................................................................................... 223

QUALIFICATION PROGRESS SUMMARY .............................................................................................. 467

GMC(SW) David, HUDSON MIDLANT RMC, Norfolk, VA

The Model Manager for this PQS:

CENSECFOR VIRGINIA BEACH VA (N54) 757-462-5209 DSN 253

1. CATEGORY I. THOSE PERSONNEL WHO ARE ISSUED A PISTOL PRIMARILY FOR

2. CATEGORY II. THOSE PERSONNEL WHO ARE ISSUED A PISTOL PRIMARILY TO

3. CATEGORY III. EXPEDITIONARY WARFARE COMBAT SKILLS.

4. CATEGORY IV. SPECIAL OPERATIONS TRAINING.

PQS FEEDBACK REPORTS

CHANGES TO FUNDAMENTALS, SYSTEMS, AND WATCHSTATIONS:

Fundamental Title Action Comment

System Title Action Comment

Watchstation Title Action Comment

CHANGES TO FUNDAMENTALS, SYSTEMS, AND WATCHSTATIONS:

Fundamental Title Action Comment

M11 Service Pistol Deleted These 4 fundamentals updated and

AN/M8 Pyrotechnic Deleted

MP5 (series) Submachine Gun Deleted

M79 Grenade Launcher Deleted

MK44 MOD 0/1, Gun Weapon System Deleted

System Title Action Comment

M11 Service Pistol Deleted These 4 systems updated and moved to

AN/M8 Pyrotechnic Deleted

MP5 (series) Submachine Gun Deleted

M79 Grenade Launcher Deleted

MK44 MOD 0/1, Gun Weapon System Deleted

Watchstation Title Action Comment

M11 Service Pistol Operator Deleted These 4 watchstations updated and

AN/M8 Pyrotechnic Operator Deleted

The following watchstations regardless of qualifications achieved in previous versions, shall be

Only fundamental and watchstation tasks associated with warning shots.

API Armor Piercing Incendiary

TP-T Target Practice – Tracer

100.2 HOW TO COMPLETE

101 .1 Discuss the concept of ORM. [ref. f, encl. 1, pg. 1] {1, 2, 3, 4}

.19 Discuss the following: [ref. d, ch. 2] {1, 2, 3, 4}

.21 Discuss the following: {1, 2, 3, 4}

.24 Discuss electrical safety. [ref. h, ch. B7] {1, 2, 3, 4}

a. Rapid Fire [ref. c, ch. 7, pg. 7-7]

a. Universal Safety Rules [ref. a, ch. 1, pg. 1-1 thru 1-2]

.19 Discuss Category I and II personnel as it relates to weapons qualifications. [ref. b,

.21 Discuss the following terms as it relates to simmunition use: {1, 2, 3, 4}

.25 Discuss mixing of weapon parts or modification of weapon assembles/parts/mounts.

a. Mounts and assigned stands

[a] OPNAVINST 5530.13C, Physical Security of Arms, Ammunition, and Explosives

a. Screening Officials [pg. 1-4]

.4 Explain accountability and stowage procedures for weapons: [ref. a] {1, 2, 3, 4}

a. Physical count [ch. 5, pg. 5-1 thru 5-4]

.5 Explain the following types of gun ammunition: {1, 2, 3, 4}

a. Small arms [ref. b, ch. 2, pg. 2-1]

.7 Discuss applicable safety precautions when handling gun ammunition. [ref. d,

.8 Discuss the purpose and features of hand-manipulated signaling devices. [ref. g,

.12 Discuss the following types of magazines: [ref. f, ch. 8] {1, 2, 3, 4}

a. Standard earth covered [pg. 8-13]

a. Class I [pg. 6-13]